Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

T3403-380-01
r
Fo

Authored and published using

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its
In

subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This software
is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and
C

other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
PT

third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
r

User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright
Fo

laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement
that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to
the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation
if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance
with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy
made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of
PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any
means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to
change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by
PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this document.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see
backside of this guide.
About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!

With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
• An innovative learning methodology - PTC’s Precision Learning
Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.

y
• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive

nl
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.

O
• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting

se
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
U
derived from thousands of deployments.
• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you
al

need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries

offering content in nine languages.
rn

• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people

have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
te

organization’s overall performance goals.

In

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:
C

• Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
PT

post-classroom tools.
• Pro/FICIENCY - This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
r

• eLearning Libraries - 24/7 access to Web-based training that will

Fo

compliment your instructor-led course.

• Precision LMS - A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America
• Education Services Registration
– Tel: (888) 782-3773
– Fax: (781) 370-5307
• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
– Tel: (800) 477-6435
– Fax: (781) 707-0328

y
• License Management and Contracts

nl
– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)

O
– Fax: (781) 707-0331
Europe

se
• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
U
Asia
al

• Please refer to [Link] for contact

information.
rn

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at [Link]. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
te

to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
In

searches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
C

Support, and PTC Partners.

r PT
Fo
Precision Learning

Precision Learning In The Classroom

PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:
• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key
concepts.

y
• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.

nl
• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.

O
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to
assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also

se
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
U
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.
al

Precision Learning After the Class

rn

Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
te

have one.
In

As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a
C

Recommended Learning Report based on your results.

PT

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same

instructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
r
Fo

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.
Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at [Link]

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 ― Advanced Selection
Module 02 ― Advanced Datum Features
Module 03 ― Advanced Sketching
Module 04 ― Advanced Hole Creation
Module 05 ― Advanced Drafts and Ribs
Module 06 ― Advanced Shells
Module 07 ― Advanced Rounds and Chamfers

y
nl
Day 2

O
Module 08 ― Relations and Parameters
Module 09 ― Advanced Blends

se
Module 10 ― Sweeps with Variable Sections
Module 11 ― Helical Sweeps
U
Module 12 ― Swept Blends
al

Day 3
rn

Module 13 ― Advanced Layers

Module 14 ― Advanced Reference Management
te

Module 15 ― Family Tables

In

Module 16 ― Reusing Features

Module 17 ― Advanced Copy
C

Module 18 ― Advanced Patterns

r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Table of Contents

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric

Advanced Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Advanced Chain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Advanced Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Advanced Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Creating Datum Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

y
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

nl
Creating Points at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

O
Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Sketching Geometry Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

se
Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Creating a Curve Through a Point Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
U
Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Creating a Curve From Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
al

Creating Composite Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

rn

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
te

Projecting and Wrapping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

In

Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Creating Offset Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
C

Creating Cosmetic Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

PT

Advanced Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Using Sketched Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Sketching Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
r

Sketching Elliptical Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fo

Sketching Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Importing and Exporting Spline Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Sketching Conics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Sketching Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Locking Sketcher Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Advanced Hole Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Creating Standard Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
 Lightweight Hole Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Creating Sketched Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Creating On Point Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Creating Cosmetic Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Advanced Drafts and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Drafting Intent Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Creating Drafts Split at Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

y
Creating Drafts Split at Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

nl
Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

O
Creating Trajectory Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Advanced Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

se
Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Excluding Surfaces from Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
U
Extending Shell Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Analyzing Shell Corner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
al

Advanced Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

rn

Analyzing Round Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Analyzing Round Creation Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
te

Creating Rounds Through Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

In

Creating Variable Radius Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Auto Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
C

Creating Rounds by Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

PT

Analyzing Round References and Pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Using Intent Edges for Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Using Round Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
r

Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Fo

Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Creating Corner Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Creating Chamfers by Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Using Intent Edges for Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Using Chamfer Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Relations and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Understanding Relation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Understanding Relation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . 8-10
 Exact Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Creating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Creating Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Creating Relations for Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating Section Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Using the Evalgraph Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Using Simultaneous Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Advanced Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Understanding Rotational and General Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

y
Creating a Rotational Blend Protrusion or Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

nl
Analyzing Rotational Blend Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

O
Creating a General Blend Protrusion or Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Analyzing General Blend Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

se
Defining Rotational and General Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Selecting Sections for Rotational and General Blends . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
U
Sweeps with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
al

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
rn

Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
te

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection . . . 10-16

In

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple
C

Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories10-29
PT

Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and

Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
r

Using Trajpar with Solid Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fo

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features. . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Helical Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Understanding Swept Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
 Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend . . . . . 12-22
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Analyzing Swept Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Analyzing Swept Blend Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
Advanced Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Creating Layer Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Creating Layers in Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

y
Advanced Reference Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

nl
Editing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

O
Replacing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Replacing Sketcher References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

se
Replacing Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Family Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
U
Understanding Family Table Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Creating a Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
al

Patternizing Family Table Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

rn

Creating a Multi-Level Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Editing Family Table Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
te

Reusing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

In

Creating UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Placing UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
C

Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 16-11

PT

Creating Inheritance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16

Using External Merge to Add Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Using External Merge to Remove Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
r

Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Fo

Configuring Independency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary. . . . . . . . 17-12
Advanced Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Creating Geometry Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Creating Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Specifying Fill Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Creating Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-29
 Applying Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Creating Curve Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-38
Creating Point Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-42
Unpatterning Group Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-45
Creating Patterns of Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-49
Moving/Mirroring Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-54

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
r
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
 Student Preface — Using the Header
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

y
nl
Course Handbook Layout:

O
• Modules
– Topics

se
♦ Concept
♦ Theory
U
♦ Procedure
♦ Exercise (if applicable)
al

Procedure / Exercise Header:

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.
• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an

y
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide

nl
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a “process

O
module.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise Header

se
U
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as
concise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name
al

of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
rn

The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.
te

2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The
In

Scenario is only found in Exercises.

3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory:
C

• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.

PT

• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.

4. Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
r

stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to
Fo

the lab files is:

• PTCU\CreoParametric1\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Rounds is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric1\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.
 6. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
• Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you

y
configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab

nl
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:

O
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.

se
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.
U
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
al

– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
rn

the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.

te

• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.

– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
In

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
C
r PT
Fo
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

the lab exercises properly.

y
nl
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

O
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.

se
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1.
U
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
al

• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

rn

• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be

PTCU\CreoParametric1.
te

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.

• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
In

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
C

Step 2: Add the Erase not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar.
PT

1. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed.
• Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
r
Fo

Step 3: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Quick Access toolbar.

• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
 Step 4: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.

1. Notice the folder indicated in the header above.

2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser tab from the navigator.

• Click Working Directory to view the current working directory
folder in the browser.
• Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.

y
3. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working

nl
Directory.
4. Double-click the Topic1_Folder folder to display its contents in the

O
browser.

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the

C

browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and

PT

select Set Working Directory from the browser.

Step 5: Open the file for this procedure.

r
Fo

1. Notice the lab model is specified in the header above.

• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
• Read the first task.
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
datum display for the procedure or exercise. Complete the optional
task below to customize the In Graphics toolbar, making the
selection of the datum display options easier
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 6: OPTIONAL: Customize the In Graphics toolbar to show the datum
display options.

1. Right-click the In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display

Filters check box.
• Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys
Display check boxes.
• Click in the graphics window.
• Enable only the following Datum Display types:

y
2. The In Graphics toolbar should appear as shown.

nl
O
3. The model should now appear

se
as shown.
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo
 Module 1

y
Advanced Selection

nl
O
Module Overview

se
In this module, you learn advanced methods for selecting edges and
geometry within a part model. Learning advanced methods for selection
enables you to create more robust models in a shorter period of time.
U
Objectives
al

After completing this module, you will be able to:

rn

• Understand advanced chain selection.

te

• Understand advanced surface selection.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Advanced Chain Selection
You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different
types of chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness.
• Chain types:
– Intent chain
– One-by-one
– Tangent chain
– Surface loop
– Surface loop from to

y
– Boundary Figure 1 – Intent Chain

nl
– From-to Boundary loop

O
– Multiple chains
• Selection methods:

se
– Direct with mouse
– Chain dialog box
U
Figure 2 – Surface Loop
al

Advanced Chain Selection

rn

You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of
chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness. A chain is a collection
te

of adjacent edges and curves that share common endpoints. Chains can be
open-ended or closed-loop, but they are always defined by two ends.
In

Chain Types
C

The following are the different types of chains that can be used to select
PT

edges:
• Intent chain – Enables you to select edges based on their intent. For
example, say you use an intent chain to select the four edges of a square
r

cut for purposes of rounding them. If the square cut is redefined into a
Fo

hexagon cut, the intent chain automatically adds the two additional edges
and rounds them, because your intent was to round the edges of the cut.
If you instead select the edges one at a time and round them, the round
feature either fails or does not round the newly added edges.
• One-by-one – Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a
continuous path.
• Tangent chain – Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to
an anchor edge.
• Surface loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface.
• Surface loop from to – Enables you to select a range of edges from the
surface loop.
• Boundary – Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt.
• From-to Boundary loop – Enables you to select a range of edges from
the boundary.

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Multiple chains – You can select multiple chains by selecting the first chain,
pressing CTRL and selecting an edge for a new chain, then holding down
SHIFT and completing the new chain from the selected edge.

Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Chain dialog box –

The Chain dialog box enables a
GUI approach to selection. This

y
dialog box is only available in the

nl
context of a tool. You can click
the Details button near the tool's

O
reference collector to display the
Chain dialog box.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Chain Dialog Box

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Selection\Adv_Chain ADV_CHAINS.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the different chain selection types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 3.
3. Cursor over one of the top edges

y
and right-click to query-select the

nl
end edges Intent chain.

O
4. Cursor over one of the vertical
edges and right-click to

se
query-select the side edges
Intent chain.
U
5. De-select all geometry.
al

6. Select the top, front horizontal

edge.
rn

7. Press SHIFT and select the two

adjacent edges One-by-one.
te

8. De-select all geometry.

In

9. Select Extrude 1.
10. Select the top, front horizontal
C

edge.
PT

11. Press SHIFT and select the top,

right front edge to select the
Tangent chain.
r

12. De-select all geometry.

Fo

13. Select Extrude 1.

14. Select one of the top, front
edges.
15. Press SHIFT and select the top,
right flat surface to select the
Surface loop.
16. De-select all geometry.

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 17. Select Extrude 1.
18. Select the top, front edge.
19. Press SHIFT and select the top,
back edge to select the Surface
loop from to chain.

20. Select the quilt on the right.

21. Select an edge of the quilt.
22. Press SHIFT and select the quilt
to select the Boundary.

y
23. De-select all geometry.

nl
O
24. Select the quilt again.
25. Select the front, vertical edge.
26. Press SHIFT and select the se
U
back, vertical edge to select the
From-to Boundary loop.
al

27. De-select all geometry.

rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

Advanced Surface Selection
You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using
different types of sets.

• Surface set types:

– Individual Surfaces
– Solid Surfaces
– Intent Surfaces
– Seed and Boundary

y
– Loop Surfaces

nl
– Exclude Surfaces
• Selection methods:

O
– Direct with mouse Figure 1 – Selecting Multiple
– Chain dialog box Individual Surfaces

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Selecting a Surface Loop

Advanced Surface Selection

C

You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of
PT

sets. A surface set is a collection of surface patches from solids or quilts.

Surface patches do not need to be adjacent.
r

Surface Set Types

Fo

The following are the different types of surface sets that can be used to
select surfaces:
• Individual Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces from solids or quilts
one at a time. To select multiple individual surfaces, press CTRL.
• Solid Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces of the solid geometry
in a part model.
• Intent Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces based on their intent.
An intent surface set tends to be more robust because it can account for
changes made to geometry.
• Seed and Boundary Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces from the
selected seed surface up to the boundary or boundaries.
• Loop Surfaces – Enables you to select all the surfaces that are adjacent
to the edges of a surface.

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 • Exclude Surfaces – Enables you to exclude surface patches during or
after a surface set has been created.

Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Surface Sets dialog

box – The Surface Sets dialog
box enables a GUI approach
to selection. This dialog box is

y
only available in the context of

nl
a tool. You can click the Details
button next to the tool's reference

O
collector to display the Surface
Sets dialog box.

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Surface Sets Dialog Box

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Selection\Adv_Surface ADV_SURFACE-[Link]

Task 1: Experiment with the different surface set selections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 1.
3. Select the front surface of

y
Extrude 1.

nl
4. Press CTRL and select the

O
second individual surface.
5. De-select all geometry.

6. Select any feature.

se
U
7. Select any surface on that
feature.
al

8. Right-click and select Solid

Surfaces.
rn

9. De-select all geometry.

te

10. Right-click to query and select

In

cut Extrude 2.
11. Select the Intent surface.
C
r PT
Fo

12. De-select all geometry.

13. Select the front surface on the
silver protrusion as the seed
surface.
14. Press SHIFT and select the
top, right flat surface as the
Boundary.

Module 1 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 15. Release SHIFT to select all the
surfaces from the seed surface
up to the Boundary.

You can continue to use

SHIFT to select additional
boundaries.

16. Select the top, flat surface.

17. Press SHIFT and select the front

y
edge.

nl
18. Release SHIFT to select the
Surface loop.

O
19. Press CTRL and click to
se
U
de-select the two surfaces,
excluding them from the loop.
al

20. De-select all geometry.

rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 9

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 1 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Module 2

y
Advanced Datum Features

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Datum features often serve as the foundation when modeling advanced
geometry. A datum feature framework can efficiently capture the design
intent of the model, and then solid features can be created on the framework.
U
Datum curves and sketches may reference other datum features, such as
datum points and coordinate systems. In addition, you can create datum
al

graphs that can be utilized by relations to control part geometry.

rn

In this module, you learn how to create datum points and several types of
datum curves. You will also learn how to create datum graphs and coordinate
te

systems.
In

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
C

• Create datum graphs.

PT

• Create datum coordinate systems.

• Sketch geometry datums.
• Create numerous types of datum points.
r
Fo

• Create numerous types of datum curves.

• Create cosmetic sketches.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 1

Creating Datum Graphs
A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model.

• Created like a Sketch feature:

– Used as an X-Y function.
– Can be used to control
part geometry.
• Must contain a Sketcher
coordinate system.
• Must contain sketched

y
geometry.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Datum Graph Features

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Creating a Datum

Graph using Lines Figure 3 – Creating a Datum Graph
In

from a Spline
C

Creating Datum Graphs

PT

A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model, as shown in

Figure 1. The datum graph is created much like a sketch feature, except that
a visible datum curve is not created. Instead, the system is able to use the
r

sketch as an X-Y function. This function can then be utilized by relations to

Fo

control part geometry based on the X-Y relation of the graph.

The datum graph must contain a Sketcher coordinate system, and sketched
geometry. Centerlines and construction geometry can be used to simplify the
sketch creation, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. However, the system
only recognizes solid sketched geometry such as lines, arcs, and splines
for the graph function.

Module 2 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Graphs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Graph DATUM_GRAPH.PRT

Task 1: Create a datum graph comprised of lines.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .

y
3. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_1.

nl
4. A new Sketcher window opens.

O
5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

se
6. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch a
U
vertical and horizontal centerline.
7. Click Coordinate System
al

from the Sketchng group.

rn

• Click the intersection of

the centerlines to place the
coordinate system.
te
In

8. Click Line Chain and sketch

an angled line and a horizontal
C

line. The left endpoint of the

PT

angled line should be aligned to

the vertical centerline.
r
Fo

9. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the sketch, editing the values as
shown.
10. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 3

 11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.

Task 2: Create a datum graph comprised of two arcs.

1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .

y
2. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_2.

nl
3. A new Sketcher window opens.

O
4. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch
two vertical centerlines and one
horizontal centerline. se
U
5. Click Coordinate System
al

and click the left intersection

of the centerlines to place the
rn

coordinate system.
te

6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

and sketch two arcs. The
In

arcs should be tangent to

one-another, and their endpoints
aligned to the vertical centerlines.
C
PT

7. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and constrain the

r
Fo

arc endpoints perpendicular to the vertical centerlines.

8. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the arcs and centerlines,
pressing ENTER to accept the
default values.
9. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
10. Click OK .

Module 2 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 5

Creating Datum Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems can be used as a modeling or
assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and for
assembling components.

• Define References:
– Datum features
– Existing model geometry
• Define Orientation:
– References selection

y
– Selected CSYS axes

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Datum Coordinate

te

System Types
In

Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems are individual features that can be redefined,
C

suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A coordinate system defines a specific

PT

location in space based on coordinates. Datum coordinate systems can be

used as a modeling or assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and
for assembling components.
r

Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Fo

To create a new datum coordinate system, you must define the following
two items:
• References – Used to define the coordinate system location. You can
select existing datum references including datum planes, datum axes,
datum points, or other datum coordinate systems. You can also select
existing geometry including edges, vertices, and surfaces.
• Orientation – Used to define the position of the coordinate system's axes.
There are two different ways to orient the datum coordinate system:
– References selection – Enables you to select reference geometry for
any two of the coordinate system's axes.
– Selected CSYS axes – Is available only when another coordinate
system is specified as the reference. This option enables you to rotate
the coordinate system about the axes of the reference coordinate

Module 2 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 system. You can also use the Set Z Normal to Screen option to orient
the z-axis perpendicular to the screen.

Defining Coordinate System Offset Types

If a coordinate system is selected as a reference, there are three coordinate
system offset types that can be created in Creo Parametric.
• Cartesian – Created by defining X, Y, and Z parameters.
• Cylindrical – Created by defining R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters.
• Spherical – Created by defining r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters.

Defining Coordinate System Placement Types

y
If datum planes or surfaces are specified as references, there are up to three

nl
coordinate system types that can be defined in Creo Parametric. The type
defines the dimensioning scheme used to locate the coordinate system. The

O
three types are as follows:

se
• Linear – Places the coordinate system using two linear dimensions.
• Radial – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and an
U
angular dimension.
• Diameter – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and
al

an angular dimension.
You must specify the offset references from which to define the dimensions.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Coord_Sys [Link]

Task 1: Create an offset datum coordinate system.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Coordinate System

nl
from the Datum group in the
ribbon.

O
3. Select coordinate system DEF.
4. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, edit the Offset type to
Cartesian, if necessary.
se
U
• Edit the Z offset to 10.
• Select the Orientation tab.
al

• Select the Selected CSYS

rn

axes option.
• Edit the About Z angle to 180.
te

• Click OK.
In

5. De-select the geometry.

Task 2: Create a datum coordinate system using three planes.

C
PT

1. Click Coordinate System .

2. Select the front surface of the
r

model.
Fo

3. Press CTRL and select datum

planes TOP and RIGHT from the
model tree.
4. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, select the Orientation tab.
• Use the surface to determine
Z.
• Use datum plane TOP to
project Y.
• Click OK.
5. De-select the geometry.

Module 2 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Create a datum coordinate system using axes and planes.

1. Start the Coordinate System

.
2. Press CTRL and select datum
axis A_4 and datum plane DTM1
as references.
3. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, select the Orientation tab.
4. In the Orientation tab, click in the

y
First Direction collector.

nl
• Select datum coordinate

O
system CS1 and use Z to
determine Z.

5. In the Orientation tab, click in the

Second Direction collector. se
U
• Select datum axis A_4.
al

• Use datum axis A_4 to project

Y.
rn

• Click Flip to flip the Y

projection.
te

6. Click OK from the Coordinate

System dialog box.
In

7. De-select the geometry.

C

Task 4: Create a datum coordinate system on a surface.

PT

1. Start the Coordinate System

.
r
Fo

2. Select the top, rounded surface.

3. Right-click and select Offset
References.
4. Press CTRL and select datum
plane RIGHT from the model
tree and the front surface.
5. Edit the Angle from datum plane
RIGHT to 0.
6. Edit the Axial distance from the
front surface to 30.
7. Click OK.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 9

 8. Enable only the following Datum
Display types: .

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Points On or Offset from Entities
You can create datum points both on and offset from geometry
or other datum features.

• Reference types:
– Placement
– Offset
• Reference combinations:
– On/Offset surface or datum
plane

y
– On/Offset axis

nl
– On curve:

O
♦ Length Ratio
♦ Real Length

se
♦ Reference
– Center of surface or curve Figure 1 – Datum Point on a
U
Surface Offset from Datum Planes
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Datum Point on

PT

Figure 3 – Datum Point at

Curve Ratio Offset Center of Curve

Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

r
Fo

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points both on and
offset from geometry or other datum features. Most geometry that defines or
locates a point in 3-D space can be specified as a reference. Both Placement
references and Offset references can be selected, depending upon the
combination.
The following reference combinations are available:
• On/Offset surface or datum plane – Locate a point directly on a surface or
datum plane, or offset a specified distance. In Figure 1, the datum point is
on the selected surface, and offset from the two datum planes.
• On/Offset axis – Locate a point on a datum axis, or offset a specified
distance.
• On curve – You can locate a point on a curve. There are three ways to
further define the point location on the curve:

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 11

 – Length ratio – Enables you to locate the point as a function of the curve's
overall length. For example, if you want to locate the curve 3/4 from the
end of the curve you type 0.75 as the ratio. You can also switch from
which curve endpoint the ratio is determined by clicking Next End. In
Figure 2, the point is on the curve, offset from the right endpoint a ratio
of 0.75.
– Real length – Enables you to locate the point a specified distance from
the curve's endpoint. You can switch from which curve endpoint the
distance is measured by clicking Next End.
– Use reference – You can specify another entity as an offset reference
and specify the offset value from that reference.
• Center of surface or curve – Selecting a rounded surface or curve enables

y
you to locate a point at the center of the surface or curve, as shown in

nl
Figure 3.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_On-Offset POINTS_ON-[Link]

Task 1: Create datum points on and offset from surfaces.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Point from the Datum

nl
group in the ribbon.
3. Select the top surface in the

O
back, left quadrant.
4. In the Datum Point dialog box,

se
click in the Offset references
collector.
U
5. Press CTRL and select datum
planes FRONT and RIGHT from
al

the model tree.

6. Edit both offset values to 5.
rn

7. In the Datum Point dialog box,

te

click New Point.

In

8. Select the right, drafted surface

near the front center.
• Edit the Offset from On to
C

Offset.
PT

• Edit the Offset value to 2.

r
Fo

9. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Offset
References.
• Press CTRL and select datum
plane FRONT from the model
tree and the bottom, flat
surface.
• Edit the offset from datum
plane FRONT to 3.00.
• Edit the offset from the bottom
surface to 7.00.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 13

 10. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click New Point.
11. Select the top, curved surface.
• Edit the Offset from Offset to
Center.
12. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.

Task 2: Create datum points on axes and curves.

y
nl
1. Click Point .

O
2. Select datum axis A_2 in the
model tree.

se
3. In the graphics window,
right-click and select Offset
References.
U
• Right-click to query and select
al

the bottom, flat surface.

4. In the graphics window, edit the
rn

offset value to 25.00.

te

5. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
In

6. Select the back, top vertex.

C
r PT
Fo

7. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
8. Select the curve on the right,
drafted surface.
9. Edit the offset to Center.
10. Click OK.

Module 2 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Create datum points on curves.

1. Click Point .
2. Select the front datum curve to
the right of the datum plane that
intersects it.
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Ratio.
• Edit the Offset value to 0.75.
• Click Next End twice.

y
nl
3. In the Datum Point dialog box,

O
click New Point.
4. Select the front datum curve to
the right of the datum plane that
intersects it. se
U
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Real.
al

• Edit the Offset value to 8.00.

rn

• Click Next End twice.

te

5. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
In

6. Select the front datum curve to

the right of the datum plane that
C

intersects it.
PT

• Select Reference as the

Offset reference.
• Select datum plane RIGHT as
r

the reference.
Fo

• Edit the Offset value to 2.00.

• Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 15

Creating Points at Intersections
You can create points at the intersections of two or three
references from geometry or other datum features.
• Combinations include:
– Three planes/three surfaces
– Two curves
– Two edges
– A curve and edge
– Two axes

y
– Curves/Edges/Axes with

nl
Surfaces/Planes
• References do not need to

O
physically intersect
• Next Intersection

se
Figure 1 – Point at the Intersection
of Three Planes
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Points at the Intersections Figure 3 – Point at the Intersection

PT

of Curves and Planes of a Surface and Datum Axis

Creating Points at Intersections

r
Fo

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points at the
intersections of two or three references from geometry or other datum
features. Most geometry that defines or locates a point in 3-D space can
be specified as a reference.
The following reference combinations are available for creating intersections:
• Three planes/three surfaces – Locate a point at the intersection of three
planes, three surfaces, or a combination. In Figure 1, the point is located at
the intersection of the three datum planes.
• Two curves – Locate a point at the intersection of two curves. In Figure 2,
points 4 and 5 are located at the intersection of the two curves.
• Two edges – Locate a point at the intersection of two edges.
• A curve and edge – Locate a point at the intersection of a curve and edge.
• Two axes – Locate a point at the intersection of two axes.

Module 2 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 • Curves/Edges/Axes with Surfaces/Planes – Locate a point at the
intersection of a curve, edge, or axis, and a surface or plane. In Figure 2,
point 6 is located at the intersection of a datum plane and a curve. In Figure
3, the point is located at the intersection of the datum axis and the surface.
There does not need to be a physical intersection between the selected
entities. The system extrapolates to find an intersection, if one exists. If
more than one intersection exists between the selected entities, you can
click Next Intersection to toggle between all available intersections for the
specified entities. In Figure 2, there are two intersections between the two
datum curves. Point 4 is located at one intersection, and point 5 is located at
the other intersection.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Points at Intersections
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_Intersect POINTS_INTERSECT.PRT

Task 1: Create points at the intersections of different entities.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Click Point from the Datum

y
group.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select datum

O
axis A_1 from the model tree,
and the top surface.

4. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
se
U
5. Press CTRL and select the top,
rear edge and datum plane
al

RIGHT from the model tree.

rn

6. Click OK.
7. Disable .
te
In

8. Click Point .
9. Press CTRL and select datum
planes TOP, RIGHT, and
C

FRONT from the model tree.

r PT
Fo

10. Disable the following Datum

Display types: .
11. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click New Point.
12. Press CTRL and select the rear,
right, and front surfaces.
13. Click OK.
14. Notice that the selected
references do not have to
physically touch. The point
determines the intersection.

Module 2 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 15. Click Point .
16. Press CTRL and select the two
datum curves to the left side of
the model.

17. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
18. Press CTRL and select the two
datum curves on the left side of

y
the model.

nl
19. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click Next Intersection.

O
20. In the Datum Point dialog box,

se
click New Point.
21. Press CTRL and select the top
U
datum curve and datum plane
RIGHT.
al

22. Click OK.

rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 19

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate
System
You can create an array of datum points by referencing a
coordinate system.

• Array is one feature in model tree.

• Specify reference coordinate system.
• Specify coordinate system type:
– Cartesian

y
– Cylindrical

nl
– Spherical
• Specify parameters based on coordinate system type.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 1 – Creating an Array of Points using an Offset Coordinate System

PT

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System

You can create an array of datum points by referencing a coordinate system.
The entire array of points created becomes a single feature in the model tree.
r
Fo

To create the array of points you must first select a reference coordinate
system. You can then specify the type of coordinate system selected. The
coordinate system type specified determines the parameters that must be
typed for each datum point. The locations of all points in the array are based
on the coordinates for each parameter. The following coordinate system
types are available:
• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters for the points.
• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters for the points.
• Spherical – You must specify r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters for the
points.
You can create new points in the array by clicking in the empty row at the
bottom of the existing point array. You can edit the point coordinate values
within the table by editing the values in the graphics window, or by dragging
the handle in the appropriate parameter direction. For example, if the

Module 2 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 reference coordinate system type is Cartesian, the drag handle parameters
are X, Y, and Z.
You can also specify the option for Use Non Parametric Array. Enabling this
option converts the point array to a Non Parametric Array, which does not
include any dimensions. You are not able to modify the values using the
Edit command in the right mouse button menu, as this option is removed
from the menu.
The following file options are available for creating points using an offset
coordinate system:
• Import – Enables you to import a text file of coordinate data. The file type
that can be imported is a .pts file.

y
• Update Values – Enables you to add, delete, or update the point

nl
coordinates using a text editor. Upon saving the file in the text editor, the
list of points in the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box updates.

O
• Save – Enables you to save an array of points as a .pts file.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Creating Points using an Offset
Coordinate System

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_Offset-Csys POINTS_OFFSET-[Link]

Task 1: Create a set of datum points using an offset coordinate system.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the ribbon, select Offset
Coordinate System from the

O
Point types drop-down menu in
the Datum group.
3. Select coordinate system CS0.
se
U
4. Click in the first row of the Datum
Point dialog box to create the
al

first row of points.

• Right-click the first row of
rn

points and select Rename.

• Edit the name to START.
te

• Verify that the X, Y, and Z

In

coordinates are 0, 0, and 0,

respectively.
C

5. Click in the second row of the

Datum Point dialog box to create
PT

the second row of points.

• Edit the X, Y, and Z coordinates
to 0, 10, and 0, respectively.
r
Fo

6. Click in the third row of the

Datum Point dialog box and
create seven more rows of
points.
7. Edit the values as shown.

Module 2 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 8. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.
9. Disable the following Datum
Display types: .

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 23

Sketching Geometry Datums
Create points, axes, and coordinate systems in a Sketch.
• Geometry Points Create:
– Datum Points (External Sketch)
– Datum Axes (Internal Sketch)
• Geometry Centerlines Create:
– Datum Axes
• Geometry Csys Create:
– Datum Csys

y
Figure 1 – Geometry Points

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Geometry Centerline

and Csys Figure 3 – Datum Features Created
te

Sketching Geometry Datums

In

You can create datum points, datum axes, and datum coordinate systems
in a sketch. A sketch may contain any number of sketched datum features
C

without any further geometry. Likewise, a sketch may contain sketched

geometry or construction geometry in addition to sketched geometry datums.
PT

You can also use a sketch that contains sketched datum features to create
features, such as an extrude or revolve.
The following tools, found in the Datum group of the ribbon, are used to
r

create geometry datums:

Fo

• Point
• Centerline
• Coordinate System
Traditional sketched points, centerlines, and coordinate systems
now have new icons with a dashed appearance to distinguish from
the new sketched geometry tools.

Geometry datums can be created in external or internal sketches:

• For external sketches existing on their own, the geometry datums are
created in the sketching plane.
• For an internal sketch within an Extrude, the Geometry Point tool creates
an axis normal to the sketching plane.

Module 2 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Note the following when creating geometry datums:
• When a sketch containing geometry datums is used for a feature, the
geometry datums are hidden along with the sketch.
• When a geometry datum is selected, you can right-click and select
Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Likewise you can select
a construction point, centerline, or sketched coordinate system, and
right-click and select Geometry to convert the entity to a geometry datum.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Sketching Geometry Datums

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Geometry_Datums SKETCH_DATUMS.PRT

Task 1: Create geometry points in an external sketch.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1 from the model

y
tree.

nl
• Right-click and select Edit
Definition.

O
3. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types:
.
U
4. Select the arc, then right-click
and select Construction.
al
rn

5. Click Point from the Datum

group in the ribbon.
te

• Place three points on the

construction arc: one on each
In

centerline, and one on the

vertical reference.
C
PT

6. Click OK .
7. Notice that datum points are
created as part of Sketch 1 in the
r

model tree.
Fo

Task 2: Place geometry points in an internal sketch for an extrude.

1. Click Extrude from the Shape group in the ribbon.

• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
• Click Use Previous.

Module 2 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 2. Click Center and Ends from
the Arc drop down menu in the
Sketching group in the ribbon.
Sketch and dimension an arc as
shown.
3. Click Point , and place a
geometry point on each arc
endpoint.
4. Click OK .

y
5. Right-click and select Remove

nl
Material.
6. Right-click and select Flip Depth

O
Direction.
7. Right-click the depth handle and
select Through All.
8. Click Complete Feature . se
U
9. Notice the created axes.
al

Task 3: Create a geometry centerline and a geometry coordinate system.

rn
te

1. Click Sketch . Click Use

Previous.
In

2. Right-click and select

References. Select PNT1
C

and click Close.

PT

3. Click Centerline from the

Datum group in the ribbon.
r
Fo

• Place a horizontal geometry

axis through PNT1.

4. Click Coordinate System

from the Datum group.
• Place a geometry coordinate
system as shown.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 27

 5. Click OK .
6. Notice the axis and coordinate
system.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex
You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum
points, or edge/curve vertices.
• Curve Dashboard options:
– Use Line – Line
– Use Spline – Spline
• Curve Attributes:
– Free
– Place curve on surface

y
• Ends conditions:

nl
– Free

O
– Tangent
– Normal

se
– Curvature Continuous
Figure 1 – Defining Curve
• Tweak: Placement
U
– Move type
– Style Points
al

– Movement Plane
rn

– Motion direction
– Region
te

– Sliders
In

– Diagnostics

Figure 2 – Displaying Curvature Plot

C

Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex

PT

You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum points, or
edge/curve vertices. Each point to point segment can be defined as either a
line (Use Line ) or a spline (Use Spline ).
r
Fo

Segments defined as straight lines can be filleted at the points where they
connect to one another using the Add fillet option. When this option is used,
the segments are selectable so that a dragger for a radius value can be
accessed. If no radius is added, the segments are joined through each point.
You can group points of equal fillet radii together, thereby controlling multiple
radii with a single dimension.
Defining Curve Placement Options
When creating a curve through points, you can define the following placement
options:
• Free (Default) – The curve passes through the selected points using the
Free option. The curve in the upper image of Figure 1 is Free.
• On Surface – The curve passes through the selected points and lies on
a specified quilt or surface using the Place curve on surface option. Only

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 29

 one surface can be selected, so it may be necessary to merge surfaces if
more than one is to be selected. The curve in the lower image of Figure
1 lies on the surface.

Defining Tangency Conditions

Using the Ends Condition tab in the dashboard, you can define tangency
conditions for both the start point and end point of the curve. The following
options are available for tangency conditions:
• Free – Enables you to set the end tangencies to be free (default).
• Tangent – Enables you to define the curve endpoints tangent to the
selected reference.
• Normal – Enables you to define the curve endpoints normal to the selected

y
reference.

nl
• Curvature Continuous – Enables you to define the curve as curvature

O
continuous. This means that the curvature equals the curvature of the
selected tangency reference. This option is only available for the tangent
condition.

se
When specifying the tangency condition, you must select a reference that is
used to set the tangency condition against. For example, if you define a
U
tangent condition, you must select a reference to which the curve endpoint
is tangent. The reference types that can be selected include curves, edges,
al

axes, surfaces, or a surface normal to the edge. You can also create an axis.
rn

You can always remove a tangency condition from either end point by
selecting Free from the End condition drop down list.
te

Defining Tweak Options

In

The Tweak curve option enables you to click Tweak Curve Settings and
dynamically manipulate the spline. The following types of manipulations can
be performed to the curve:
C

• Move type – Enables you to move the curve either using its control
PT

polyhedron or by its spline points. In Figure 2, the spline's control

polyhedron is displayed.
• Style Points – Enables you to move, add, delete, or redistribute points.
r

This option is only available when the Move type is set to spline points.
Fo

• Movement Plane – Enables you to specify the movement plane as the

Curve Plane, a Defined Plane, or the View Plane.
• Motion direction – Enables you to move the curve in the First direction,
Second direction, or the Normal direction.
• Region – Enables you to determine which area of the curve to move,
whether Local, Smooth Region, Linear Region, or Constant Region.
• Sliders – You can move the curve using sliders for First direction, Second
direction, and Normal direction. You can also adjust the sensitivity of the
sliders.
There is also a series of diagnostics available to help you achieve the desired
curve shape. Available diagnostics include:
• Curvature display
• Radius display

Module 2 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 • Tangents display
• Interpolation Points display

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Creating Curves Through a Point or
Vertex

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Curve_Through-Pnt-Vtx CURVE_THRU-[Link]

Task 1: Create a curve through two vertices.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve through

O
Points from the Curve types
drop-down list.

se
3. Select the two vertices. U
4. Select the Ends Condition tab
from the Curve dashboard.
al

5. Select Start Point from the Curve

side list and select Tangent from
rn

the End condition drop-down

menu.
te

• Select the front edge on the

left surface.
In

6. Select End Point from the Curve

side list and select Tangent from
C

the End condition drop-down

PT

menu and select the front edge

on the right surface.
r
Fo

7. Select the Options tab, select

Tweak curve and click Tweak
Curve Settings.
8. In the Modify Curve dialog box,
click Diagnostics and display
the Curvature plot.
9. In the graphics window, click the
middle two points and drag them
outward so the curvature plot
line resembles an arc.

Module 2 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 10. Click Apply Changes from
the Modify Curve dialog box.
11. Click Complete Feature from
the dashboard.

Task 2: Create a curve through two vertices and a point.

1. Click Curve from the Datum

y
drop-down menu.

nl
2. Select the left vertex, the datum
point, and the right vertex.

O
3. Cursor over the left control se
U
handle, then right-click and
select Normal.
al

4. Select the long adjacent edge on

rn

the left surface.

te
In

5. Cursor over the right control

handle, then right-click and
C

select Normal.
6. Select the long adjacent edge on
PT

the right surface.

7. Click Complete Feature from
the dashboard.
r
Fo

8. Right-click datum plane DTM2

from the model tree and select
Edit.
9. Edit the offset value to -1.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 33

Task 3: Create a curve through a point and vertex.

1. Click Curve .
2. Select datum point PNT1, and
the rear vertex.

y
nl
3. Spin the model and notice that
the curve is above the surface.

O
• Select the Placement tab
in the dashboard and select

se
Place curve on surface.
• Right-click to query, select
U
Quilt:F11.
• Notice that the curve now lies
al

on the quilt.
rn

4. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a Curve Through a Point Array
You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of
points.

• Connection types:
– Spline
– Single Radius
– Multiple Radius
• Point selections:

y
– Single Point

nl
– Whole Array

O
se
U Figure 1 – Fitting a Spline Curve
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Fitting a Single Figure 3 – Fitting a Multiple

Radius Curve Radius Curve
r
Fo

Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of points when those
points are created as a point array. When selecting the points, query the
array until all points highlight, then select the whole array. You can fit the
following types of curves through an array of datum points:
• Use Spline – Enables you to create a spline curve through the
selected array of datum points.
• Use Line – Enables you to join points with line segments and, if
desired, to add a radius to the line segments, making the resulting curve
smoother.
– Zero Radius
– Single Radius – A single radius value controls the fit of the curve.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 35

 – Multiple Radii – Provided the points are selected individually within the
array, multiple radii can be used to control the fit. Enable the Group with
equal radius points option to group separate radii controls together,
thereby controlling them with a single dimension value.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Crv_Thru-Pnt-Array CRV_THRU-[Link]

Task 1: Create a spline datum curve through an array of points.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Click the Datum group drop-down

y
menu and select Curve through

nl
Points from the Curve
drop-down list.

O
3. Highlight datum point START.

4. Right-click so the entire point

array highlights, then select the se
U
point.
5. Click Complete Feature .
al

6. Right-click Curve 1 in the model

rn

tree and select Hide.

te
In

Task 2: Create a curve through an array of points with straight line

segments, with zero radius and a single radius.
C
PT

1. Click the Datum group drop-down

menu and select Curve .
2. Highlight datum point START,
r

then right-click and then select it.

Fo

3. Click Use Line in the

dashboard to toggle from a
spline to straight lines.
4. Click Preview Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 37

 5. Click Resume Feature .
6. Click Round Curve and edit
the radius to 10.
7. Click Complete Feature .
8. Right-click Curve 2 in the model
tree and select Hide.

y
nl
Task 3: Create a multiple radius datum curve through an array of points.

O
1. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve .
2. Select datum point START.
3. Select the next adjacent datum se
U
point in the array.
al

4. Click Use Line from the

dashboard.
rn

5. Select the next 7 points in the

array.
te

6. Select the Placement tab in the

dashboard.
In

7. Press CTRL and select Point 2,

C

Point 3, and Point 4.

PT

• Select Add fillet.

• Edit the Radius to 5.00.
8. Select Point 5.
r

• Select Add fillet.

Fo

• Disable Group with equal

radius points.
• Edit the Radius to 10.00.
9. Select Point 6, press CTRL and
select Point 7, Point 8, and
Point 9.
• Select Add fillet.
• Edit the Radius to 5.00.
• Enable Group with equal
radius points.

Module 2 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 10. Double-click any of the 5.00
radius values on the model, and
edit it to 2.00.

y
nl
11. Click Complete Feature .

O
12. Right-click the third Curve 3 in
the model tree and select Edit.
• Notice that even though bend
radius 2 was used in multiple se
U
locations, it is only displayed
once.
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 39

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section
You can create a curve at the intersection of a planar
cross-section and part outline.

• You can use solid or surface models.

• The cross-section boundary is used to create the datum curve.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section Figure 2 – Creating the Curve

te

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

In

You can use the Curve from Cross Section option to create a datum
curve from a planar cross-section by selecting the cross-section from the
drop-down list in the dashboard.
C

Alternatively, you can create or select a cross-section from the Xsec tab
PT

in the View Manager, by right-clicking and selecting Curve from xsec. The
system creates a curve at the intersection of the planar cross-section and
the part outline. You can create cross-section curves from solid or surface
r

models. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a

Fo

cross-section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve.
In Figure 1, a cross-section was created at a datum plane intersecting the
model. The curve in Figure 2 was then created using this cross-section
boundary.
You cannot use a boundary from an offset cross-section to create
a datum curve.

Module 2 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Cross-Section [Link]

Task 1: Create a surface cross-section.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from

y
the In Graphics toolbar.

nl
• Select the Xsec tab.
• Click New and press ENTER

O
to accept the default name of
Xsec0001.

se
3. In the menu manager, click
Surf/Quilt > Planar > Single >
U
Done.
4. Click anywhere on the model.
al

5. Select datum plane DTM3 from

the model tree.
rn

6. Click Repaint from the In

te

Graphics toolbar.
7. Click Close.
In

Task 2: Create the curve from the cross-section.

C
PT

1. Click the Datum group drop-down

menu and select Curve from
Cross Section from the
Curve types drop-down menu.
r
Fo

2. In the dashboard, select

cross-section XSEC0001 from
the Cross-section drop-down list.
3. Click Complete Feature .
4. Notice that the curve is created.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 41

Task 3: Create a Cross Section Curve from the View Manager.

1. Click View Manager from

the In Graphics toolbar.
• Select the Xsec tab, if
necessary.
• Double-click cross section A
to activate it.

y
nl
O
2. Right-click and select Curve

se
from xsec.
• Notice that the curve is
U
created.
al
rn
te
In
C

This completes the procedure.

r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a Curve From Equation
You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a
mathematical equation.
• Can create in terms of parameter T
– Varies from 0 to 1
• Can also type in explicit equations
– Automatically finds the
independent variable.
Figure 1 – Straight Line Curve
– Range specified by the user.

y
– You may use substitutions to
keep expressions simple.

nl
• You must specify the following:

O
– Coordinate system
– Coordinate system type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Cylindrical se
U
♦ Spherical
Figure 2 – Parabola Curve
al

– Equation
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Sine Wave Curve

C

Creating a Curve From Equation

PT

You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a mathematical
equation. The equation can be defined for one, two, or three coordinate
system axes. The coordinate system type can be specified for the selected
r

coordinate system. The following three coordinate system types can be used:
Fo

• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters in the equation.

• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters in the
equation.
• Spherical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters in the
equation.
You type the equation into a text editor, which launches once you specify the
type of coordinate system. You define the three parameters for the coordinate
system type specified, each on a separate line of the text editor.
Using the ‘T’ Parameter
One method of defining equations is to do so in terms of a parameter T,
which varies from 0 to 1. The following are examples of different Cartesian
coordinate system equations that you can create a curve from:
• Straight Line (in X direction) – x=35*t, y=0, z=0. Shown in Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 43

• Parabola (in XZ plane) – x=35*t, y=0, z=35*t^2. Shown in Figure 2.
• Sine wave (in XY plane) – x=t*10, y=3*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure 3.
• Circle (in XY plane) – x=4*cos(t*360), y=4*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure
4.

Figure 4 – Circular Curve

y
nl
Using Explicit Equations

O
Another method of defining curves is to type in an explicit equation. Creo
Parametric automatically finds the independent variable and internally
parameterizes the equations to draw the curve. You type in the independent

se
variable’s range, with the default range being 0 to 1. You may use
substitutions to keep the expressions simple, as long as there is only a single
U
independent variable.
The following are examples of different explicit equations that you can create
al

a curve from:
rn

• Straight Line – y=x, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 5.

te
In

Figure 5 – Straight Line Curve

C

• Angled Line – y=x/2+5 range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 6.

r PT
Fo

Figure 6 – Angled Line Curve

• Full parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range –10 to 10. Shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7 – Full Parabola Curve

• Half parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 8.

Module 2 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Figure 8 – Half Parabola Curve
• Sine wave – y=100*sin(2*x)+10, range 0 to 360. Shown in Figure 9.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 9 – Sine Wave Curve
• Helix along Z axis, cylindrical csys – r=1000, z=5*theta, range 0 to 360.
U
Shown in Figure 10.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 10 – Helical Curve

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 45

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve From Equation

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curves_Equation CURVES_EQUATION_1.PRT

Task 1: Create a datum curve from an equation using the T parameter.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve from

y
Equation from the curve

nl
types drop-down list.
3. In the model tree, select

O
coordinate system CS0.
4. In the dashboard, select

se
Cartesian, if necessary.
5. Click Equation.
U
6. Read the Equation information
dialog box then click Close.
al
rn

7. In the Equation dialog box, type

the following equation:
te

• x=6*t
• y=0
In

• z=0
C
PT

8. Click OK from the Equation

dialog box.
r
Fo

9. Click Complete Feature .

Module 2 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 10. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
11. Click Equation.
12. In the Equation dialog box, edit
the equation to:
• x=6*t
• y=14*t
• z=0
13. Click OK.
14. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
se
U
15. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
al

16. Click Equation.

rn

17. In the Equation dialog box, edit

the equation to:
te

• x=6*t
• y=14*t^3
In

• z=0
18. Click OK.
C

19. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 47

Task 2: Investigate and refine a datum curve using an explicit equation.

1. Click Open , select

CURVES_EQUATION_2.PRT,
and click Open.
2. Enable only the following Datum
Display types: .
3. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
4. Click Equation from the

y
dashboard to review the
equation.

nl
5. Click OK from the Equation

O
dialog box.
6. Edit the From range value to 0.
7. Click Complete Feature .
se
U
8. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
9. Click Equation.
al

10. In the Equation dialog box, edit

rn

the equation to:

• y=100*sin(2*x)+10
te

11. Click OK.

In

12. Edit the To range value to 360.

13. Click Complete Feature .
C

14. Edit the definition of Curve 1.

PT

15. Edit the Coordinate System type

to Cylindrical.
16. Click Equation.
r
Fo

17. In the Equation dialog box, edit

the equation to:
• r=1000
• z=5*theta
18. Click OK.
19. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Composite Curves
You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a
solid or surface model to create a composite datum curve.

• Two types of composite curves:

– Exact
– Approximate

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating an Exact
Composite Curve
se
Figure 2 – Creating an Approximate
Composite Curve
U
al
rn

Creating Composite Curves

You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a solid or
te

surface model to create a composite datum curve. There are two types of
In

composite curves that can be created:

• Exact – Creates an exact copy of the selected edge(s).
C

• Approximate – Creates a datum curve that approximates a chain of

tangent (C1) curves by creating a single curvature continuous (C2) spline.
PT

This is useful for surfacing applications, when a continuous curvature curve

is desired to create a surface, in cases where the original edges may only
be tangent. You can also use approximate curves to remove small surfaces
r

from the design, and create a single surface with continuous curvature,
Fo

instead of a surface with multiple patches.

Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then

5 degrees.

During curve creation, you can drag the handles at either endpoint of the
previewed curve to lengthen or shorten the resulting curve. You can also edit
the values directly. In Figure 1, you can view the drag handles. To shorten
the resulting composite curve you can type negative values. To lengthen or
extend the endpoints of the resulting composite curve you can type positive
values.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 49

PROCEDURE - Creating Composite Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Composite [Link]

Task 1: Create an exact copy composite curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the boundary blend
surface.

y
3. Query-select the straight, front,

nl
surface edge until the entire
edge length is pre-highlighted.

O
4. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.

se
U
5. Click Copy and click Paste
.
al

6. Select Exact from the Curve type

drop-down list in the dashboard,
rn

if necessary.
te

7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Notice the Copy 1 feature in the
In

model tree.
C

Task 2: Create an approximate copy composite curve.

PT

1. Select the boundary blend

surface.
2. Query-select the rear tangent
r
Fo

chain of edges until the entire

edge length is pre-highlighted.
3. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.

Module 2 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 4. Click Copy and click Paste
.
5. Select Approximate from the
Curve type drop-down list in the
dashboard.
6. Click Complete Feature .
7. Notice the Copy 2 feature in the
model tree.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 51

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections
With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two sketches.

• System extrudes theoretical

surfaces.
• Curve created at the intersection
of these surfaces.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 1 – Viewing Theoretically Figure 2 – Creating a Curve from

Extruded Surfaces Curve Intersections
In

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections

C

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
PT

of two sketches. The system theoretically extrudes surfaces towards each

other from the selected sketches, as shown Figure 1, and then creates the
curve at the intersection of the theoretical surfaces.
r

The Intersect feature automatically completes without opening the Intersect

Fo

dashboard if you preselect both references. You can, however, redefine the
intersect feature to change the selected sketch references. You can also
preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the Intersect
dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

Module 2 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from Curve
Intersections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Isect-Curve CURVE_INTERSECTION.PRT

Task 1: Create a new curve from the intersection of two other curves.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Notice that there are two 2-D
datum curves.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select the two

O
datum curves.

se
U
4. Click Intersect from the
al

Editing group in the ribbon.

5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
rn

created. Notice that the original

two curves are hidden.
te
In

6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

7. Select the References tab in the
C

dashboard and view the selected

sketches.
PT

8. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 53

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection
The Intersect tool enables you to create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two surfaces.

• Curve created at the intersection

of two surfaces.
• Resulting curve can be 2-D or 3-D.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 1 – Creating a Curve from

Surface Intersection
In

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

C

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
PT

of two surface quilts. The system creates the curve at the intersection of
the surfaces, as shown in Figure 1. The Intersect feature automatically
completes without opening the Intersect dashboard if you preselect both
r

references, since the Intersect process is fully defined. However, you can
Fo

redefine the intersect feature to change the selected quilt references. You
can also preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the
Intersect dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

Module 2 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Isect-Surface CURVE_INTERSECT-[Link]

Task 1: Create a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the two surfaces.
3. Press CTRL and select the two

y
surfaces.

nl
O
4. Click Intersect from the
se
U
Editing group in the ribbon.
5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
al

created.
rn
te

6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

In

7. Select the References tab and

view the selected quilts.
C

8. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 55

Projecting and Wrapping Curves
You can project or wrap curves onto a surface or set of surfaces.

• Projected Curves
– Projected onto a surface or set of surfaces
– Normal to reference plane
– Length can increase or decrease from original
• Wrapped Curves
– Formed over a surface

y
– Length does not change from original

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Projecting a Curve Figure 2 – Wrapping a Curve

te

Creating Project Curves

In

You can project a selected curve onto a surface or set of surfaces, normal to
C

a reference plane. Depending on the shape of the surface and the angle of
the plane, the length of the projected curve can increase or decrease from
PT

the original.
When projecting a curve, the following options are available:
r

• References – Enables you to select the sketch or chain of curves to be

Fo

projected and the surface or surfaces to be projected onto. If desired,

you can define an internal sketch.
• Direction – Enables you to specify both the direction reference and the
direction. There are two different directions you can select:
– Along direction – Projects the selected chains or sketch in a specified
direction.
– Normal to surface – Projects the selected chains or sketch normal to the
target surface.
• Flip – Enables you to flip the direction of the projected datum curve.

Creating Wrap Curves

You can wrap (form) a sketched curve over a surface. The length of the
wrapped curve is not changed from the original. The surface the curve

Module 2 | Page 56 © 2011 PTC

 is wrapped onto must be developable, meaning that it must be some type
of ruled surface.
When wrapping a curve, the following options are available:
• Select the sketch to be wrapped. If desired, you can define an internal
sketch.
• Specify the destination surface onto which the curve is to be wrapped.
• Define the wrap origin – By default, the wrap origin is the sketch center.
You can also create a sketched coordinate system in the wrapped sketch
and define it as the wrap origin.
• Ignore intersection surface – Causes any intersecting surfaces to be
ignored when wrapping the curve.

y
• Trim at boundary – Trims the portion of a curve that cannot be wrapped at

nl
the surface boundary.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 57

PROCEDURE - Projecting and Wrapping Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Project-Wrap PROJECT_WRAP.PRT

Task 1: Project a datum curve onto a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the two circular datum
curves.

y
3. Select datum curve

nl
PROJ_CURVE from the model
tree.

O
4. Click Project from the
Editing group in the ribbon.
5. Select the surface.
se
U
6. Click Complete Feature .
7. The curve is projected onto the
al

surface.
rn

8. Edit the definition of Project 1.

9. In the dashboard, click in the
te

Direction reference collector to

activate it.
In

• Select datum plane DTM2

from the model tree as the
C

new datum reference.

PT

10. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

Task 2: Wrap a datum curve onto a surface.

1. Select datum curve

WRAP_CURVE.
2. Select the Editing drop-down
menu and click Wrap .
3. Click Complete Feature .

Module 2 | Page 58 © 2011 PTC

 4. Edit the definition of datum curve
WRAP_CURVE.

5. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group.
• Place a sketched coordinate
system on the sketch.
6. Click OK .

7. Orient to the WRAP view

orientation.

y
8. Edit the definition of Wrap 1.

nl
9. Edit the Wrap Origin from Center

O
to Sketcher CSYS.
10. Notice the difference in the

se
wrapped curve location.
11. Click Complete Feature .
U
al

This completes the procedure.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 59

Trimming Curves
You can trim a curve at a selected point to either break it into
segments or specify which side to keep.

• Curve trimmed at Trimming object:

– Datum Point
– Datum Plane
– Another curve
• Blue side denotes the portion to

y
be removed.

nl
• You can flip which side to keep:
– Keep side 1

O
– Keep side 2
– Keep both sides

se
Figure 1 – Keeping Both Sides
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Selecting Trimming Object, Keeping a Side,

C

Viewing Completed Trim

PT

Trimming Curves
r
Fo

The Trim tool adapts to the object selected. It enables you to trim a curve or a
surface, whichever is selected. You can use the Trim tool to either remove a
portion of a curve or break it into multiple segments.
To trim a curve, you must select it as the Trimmed curve. You must then
select the Trimming object such as a datum point, datum plane, or point. The
curve is split at the Trimming object location. In Figure 2, a datum plane
is selected as the Trimming object.
The blue “shading” on the curve indicates the side that will be trimmed, or
removed. The yellow arrow points towards the side to be kept. In the lower
image of Figure 2, the right half of the curve is to be removed.
You can flip the side of the curve that is trimmed using the following order:
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 1.
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 2.

Module 2 | Page 60 © 2011 PTC

 • Curve split at Trimming object, keep both sides. No geometry is trimmed.
Rather, the curve is segmented. In Figure 1, both sides of the curve are
to be kept. Thus, both sides display an arrow.
You can flip the side by clicking the yellow arrow in the graphics window, by
right-clicking and selecting Flip, or by clicking Flip Trim Sides from the
dashboard.

You cannot access the option to keep both sides by clicking the
arrow in the graphics window.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 61

PROCEDURE - Trimming Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Trim CURVE_TRIM.PRT

Task 1: Trim a datum curve.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1.

y
nl
3. Click Trim from the Editing
group in the ribbon.

O
4. Select datum point PNT0.

se
5. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides to make the arrow
U
point to the left, leaving blue
geometry on the right.
al
rn
te

6. Click Complete Feature .

7. The curve side that was blue has
In

been trimmed away.

8. De-select all features.
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 62 © 2011 PTC

 9. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
10. Enable Plane Display .
11. Select the curve on its left side
as shown. Notice it is a trim
feature in the model tree.
12. Also notice that only one piece
is available for subsequent
selection.

y
nl
O
13. Click Trim . se
U
14. Select datum plane DTM1 from
the model tree.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 63

 15. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides twice to keep both
sides.

y
nl
O
16. Click Complete Feature .
se
U
17. De-select all features.
18. Select the curve. Notice it is
al

another trim feature in the model

tree.
rn

19. Also notice that two pieces

are available for subsequent
te

selection.
In

20. Select the lower half of the curve.

C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 64 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Offset Curves
You can create curves that are offset either along a surface or
normal to a surface.

• Curves offset along a surface:

– Original reference can be a
curve or surface edge.
– Define offset values:
♦ Distance
♦ Distance Type

y
♦ Location

nl
• Curves offset normal to a surface:

O
– Original reference must be a
curve.

se
– Specify Scale.
Figure 1 – Offsetting a Curve
– Can specify datum graph. Along a Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Offsetting a Curve Figure 3 – Offsetting a Curve

PT

Normal to a Surface using a Datum Graph

Creating Offset Curves Along a Surface

r
Fo

You can create a datum curve that is offset from a surface boundary edge,
a chain of edges, or another curve on that surface. The resulting curve lies
on the surface. By default, one offset value is provided. However, you can
create additional offset values and then locate those offset values along the
offset edge as desired. The offset value location is a ratio of the entire offset
line length. For example, if you want to locate an offset value at the midpoint
of the curve, you would specify a Location of 0.5. You can also locate the
offset values on the curve endpoints. In Figure 1, the curve has two offset
values defined, one at each endpoint.
For each offset value, you can specify the distance the curve is offset from
its original curve. In Figure 1, the curve is offset on one side by 2.00, and
on the other side by 1.00. This distance value can be measured using the
following distance types:
• Normal to Edge – Measures offset distance normal to the boundary edge.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 65

• Along Edge – Measures offset distance along the measurement edge.
• To Vertex – Starts offset curve at the vertex and parallel to the boundary
edge.

Creating Offset Curves Normal to a Surface

You can offset a curve on a surface, normal to a reference surface. The
resulting curve is raised off the surface by a distance, as shown in the lower
figures.
You can specify this offset distance using the following methods:
• Offset value – The distance the curve is offset from the surface.

y
• Unit Datum Graph – A datum graph with a constant X-length of 1.0 is used

nl
to specify the curve offset. The resulting curve is offset at a constant value
as defined by the Scale value in the dashboard. In Figure 2, a unit datum

O
graph is used to offset the curve. As a result, the offset is the same along
the entire curve.

se
• Optional Datum Graph – The curve offset is determined by an optionally
specified datum graph. When an optional datum graph is defined, the
U
system uses the Offset value as a multiplier. In Figure 3, the optional
datum graph is specified. As a result, the offset varies along the curve
al

based on the datum graph.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 66 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curves_Offset CURVES_OFFSET.PRT

Task 1: Create a curve offset along a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the surface.
3. Select the front edge.

y
nl
4. Click Offset from the Editing
group in the ribbon.

O
5. Edit the offset distance to 2.

se
6. In the dashboard, select the
Measurements tab.
U
• Right-click in the tab and select
Add. A point is added.
al

• Drag the point's dot to the

rightmost end.
rn

• Edit the Distance Type to

Along Edge.
te

7. Right-click in the Measurements

In

tab and select Add. Another

point is added.
C

• Edit the Location to 0.35.

PT

• Edit the Distance to 1.

r
Fo

8. In the Measurements tab,

right-click the third point and
select Delete.
9. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 67

Task 2: Create a curve offset normal to a surface.

1. Edit the definition of GRAPH1.

• In the menu manager, click
Done.
• Press ENTER.
2. View the graph. Notice that it
slopes from 0.5 to 1.25.
3. Click OK .

y
nl
O
se
4. Select curve Offset 1.
5. Click Offset .
U
6. The dashboard now has more
options. The first, and default,
al

option is Offset Along Surface

rn

. The first curve was this

type.
te

7. Select Offset Normal To

In

Surface .
• Edit the Scale to 1.0, if
C

necessary.
PT

8. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
r
Fo

9. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Click in the Graph collector to
activate it.
• Select GRAPH1.
• Notice that the curve has
updated.
10. Click Complete Feature .

Module 2 | Page 68 © 2011 PTC

 11. Spin the model to notice the
difference in curve creation.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 69

Creating Cosmetic Sketches
Cosmetic sketches are used to sketch entities on the model for
purely visual purposes.
• Purely visual
• Do not add or remove material
• Fully constrained or
Under-Constrained
• Unique display on screen and in
model tree
Figure 1 – Before and After

y
• Can be cross-hatched
Cosmetic Features

nl
O
se
U
Figure 3 – Cosmetic Sketched
al

Figure 2 – Under-Constrained Mode Text Created

rn

Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Cosmetic sketches are created very similar to a typical sketch feature
te

(sketched datum curve). Unlike sketch features, cosmetic features are not
used to add or remove material from the model, but instead are used to
In

sketch on the model for purely visual purposes, as shown in Figure 1.

Cosmetic sketches are created using the Cosmetic Sketch option in the
C

Engineering group of the ribbon, and can contain any sketched geometry.
PT

The sketch can be fully constrained, as with standard sketched features,

or can use the special Under-Constrained Mode of sketcher. This mode
enables you to snap the sketched geometry to references if desired, but
does not require dimensions to fully constrain the sketch, as shown in Figure
r

2. Under-Constrained Mode enables the import of large and complex 2-D

Fo

geometry.
By default, cosmetic sketches are created in a different color (orange) from
standard sketches (blue), and also have a unique icon in the model tree,
as shown in Figure 3.
Cosmetic sketched can contain cross-hatching that can be modified on a
drawing.
Several restrictions apply to cosmetic sketches:
• They do not appear by default when rotating the model.
• They cannot be used as a sketch reference for a sketch-based feature
(such as extrude).
• They cannot be referenced by other features or sketches. For example,
you cannot select a cosmetic sketched curve for a sweep trajectory or for
a snapping reference in sketcher.

Module 2 | Page 70 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Cosmetic\Sketch [Link]

Task 1: Create a constrained cosmetic sketch with text.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT
in the model tree, then right-click

y
and select Open.

nl
• Notice the existing standard
sketch features (blue).

O
3. Click the Engineering group

se
drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Sketch.
U
4. Select the main model surface
and click Sketch.
al

5. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
rn

.
te

6. Click Text and sketch a

reference line.
In

7. In the Text dialog box:

C

• Type 5mm.
• Select Right for the Horizontal
PT

Position.
• Select Middle for the Vertical
Position.
r
Fo

• Click OK.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.

9. Click OK to complete the

sketch.
10. Click the screen to de-select any
geometry.
• Notice the difference in the
cosmetic appearance.

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 71

Task 2: Create an unconstrained cosmetic sketch with hatching.

1. Press ALT and select the main

surface.
2. Click the Engineering group
drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Sketch.
3. Click the Setup group
drop-down menu and enable
Under-Constrained Mode.

y
4. Select Center Rectangle

nl
from the Rectangle drop-down
list, and create the sketch shown.

O
• Notice the lack of dimensions
in Under-Constrained Mode.

5. Select Center and Axis Ellipse

se
U
from the Ellipse drop-down
list and sketch two ellipses.
al

• Constrain the ellipse centers

coincident to the diagonal
rn

construction line endpoints, if

necessary.
te

6. Click Delete Segment and

In

trim the sketch as shown.

• Constrain the vertices
C

coincident as necessary.
PT

7. Click Sketch Setup from the

r

Setup group.
Fo

8. Select the Properties tab in the

Cosmetic Sketch dialog box.
• Enable Add cross-hatching.
• Edit the spacing to 5.
• Click Sketch.
9. Click OK to complete the
sketch.

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 72 © 2011 PTC

 Module 3

y
Advanced Sketching

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Sketches can consist of simple entities, such as lines, arcs, and circles.
However, you can create more complex shapes by using advanced entities,
such as ellipses, conics, splines, and elliptical fillets. You can also create
U
sketched text entities by either manually typing in the text value, or by using
the value of a parameter that you have specified in the design model. You
al

can adjust the text as desired. You can use Sketcher diagnostic tools to aid
you while in Sketcher to be more efficient.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Understand sketched curves.

• Sketch ellipses, elliptical fillets, and conics.
C

• Sketch and modify splines, as well as import and export spline points.
PT

• Sketch and modify text.

• Analyze Sketcher convert options including Strong, Spline, Reference,
Perimeter, and Tapered.
r

• Analyze Sketcher dimension options, including creating reference and

Fo

baseline dimensions as well as locking dimensions.

• Use Sketcher diagnostic tools including shading closed loops, highlighting
open ends, highlighting open geometry, and feature requirements check.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 1

Using Sketched Curves
Sketched curves can be used in a variety of different ways.

Uses include:
• Section
• Boundary
• Trajectory
• Reference Geometry
– Other curves

y
– Other datum features

nl
– Surfaces or supporting Figure 1 – Sketched Curve

O
geometry Used as a Section

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Sketched Curves Figure 3 – Sketched Curve

Used as Boundaries Used as a Trajectory
In
C

Using Sketched Curves

PT

Sketched curves are powerful because they can be used in so many different
ways. The following are common uses of sketched curves:
r

• Section – In Figure 1, the sketched curve was used as one of the three
Fo

sections in a rotational blend feature.

• Boundary – In Figure 2, the two sketched curves are used as the first
direction boundaries in a boundary blend feature.
• Trajectory – In Figure 3, the two sketched curves were used as trajectories
in the variable section sweep feature.
• As a reference for other geometry – Sketched curves can be used in
general for reference geometry for other features. They can be used as a
reference for other curves, other datum features, or ultimately for surfaces
or supporting geometry.

Module 3 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Ellipses
You can sketch elliptical sections using two methods.

• Ellipse creation options:

– Center and Axis
– Axis Ends
• Dimension options:
– Length of Major/Minor Axes
– Radius of Major/Minor Axes

y
– Any custom scheme

nl
• Either Ellipse type can be created
or rotated to any angle.

O
se
Figure 1 – Center and Axis Ellipse,
Length Dimensions
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Axis Ends Ellipse, Figure 3 – Center and Axis Ellipse,

Radius Dimensions Created on an Angle
r
Fo

Sketching Ellipses
You can create two different types of ellipses:
• Center and Axis Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a center location for the
major axis and one endpoint of the major axis. (The major axis is
always created symmetric to the center location.) You then select a third
location that defines the length of the minor axis.
• Axis Ends Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a location for one endpoint of
the major axis and the other endpoint of the major axis. You then select
a third location that defines the length of the minor axis.
Keep in mind the following when sketching ellipses:

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 3

• The center point can be dimensioned or snapped to Sketcher references.
In the previous figures, the center point has been located using the
horizontal and/or vertical references.
• Ellipses are created with construction lines for the major and minor axes.
These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain the ellipse.
• You can dimension an ellipse by its major and minor axes, even if the
ellipse is created on an angle. To create these dimensions, you can select
the axes construction lines and dimension them directly.
• You can also dimension an ellipse using the major axis (Rx) and minor axis
(Ry) radius dimensions. These radius values are measured along the axes
from the ellipse to its center. The major axis is always the first axis placed,
regardless of size compared to the minor axis.

y
• You can create an ellipse at any angle, based on the placement points for

nl
the major axis. You can also rotate the ellipse to any angle after creating it.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Ellipses

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Ellipse [Link]

Task 1: Sketch an Axis Ends Ellipse and dimension it using radius

dimensions on the major and minor axes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Click the Sketch from the
Datum group.

nl
3. Select datum plane FRONT from

O
the model tree as the Sketch
Plane.

se
• Click Sketch in the Sketch
dialog box. U
4. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
al

.
rn

5. Click Sketch View from the

Graphics toolbar.
te

6. Click Axis Ends Ellipse

In

from the Sketching group.

7. Click the intersection of the
C

references as the first endpoint

PT

of the major axis.

• Move the cursor to the right
and click to define the second
endpoint for the major axis.
r
Fo

• Move the cursor up and click

to define the length of the
minor axis.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 5

 8. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
dimensioning scheme.
9. Click Normal .
• Select the ellipse and then
middle-click. Click Major Axis
and click Accept. Type 120 as
the value and press ENTER.
• Select the ellipse again and
then middle-click. Click Minor

y
Axis and click Accept. Type

nl
75 as the value and press
ENTER.

O
Task 2: Sketch a Center and Axis Ellipse and dimension it using length

se
dimensions on the major and minor axes.
U
1. Select Center and Axis Ellipse
from the Ellipse type
al

drop-down menu.
rn

2. Click the center of the previous

ellipse.
te

• Move the cursor up and to the

right, then click to define the
In

endpoint of the major axis.

• Without permitting the ellipse
to snap to existing geometry,
C

move the cursor and click to

PT

define the length of the minor

axis.
r
Fo

Module 3 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 3. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
dimensioning scheme.
4. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 275 as the
value and press ENTER.
• Select the minor axis and
middle-click to place the

y
dimension. Type 85 as the

nl
value and press ENTER.
• Select the major axis from

O
each ellipse and then
middle-click to place the

se
angle. Type 75 as the value
and press ENTER.
5. Middle-click and then select the
U
dimensions and drag them as
shown.
al
rn

6. Click OK .
7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the standard orientation.
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 7

Sketching Elliptical Fillets
You can sketch elliptical fillets between sketched entities.

• Sketching elliptical fillets:

– Select two sketched entities.
– Tangent at the endpoints.
– Dimension schemes are the
same as ellipses.
♦ Fillets can be rotated.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating Elliptical Fillets

se
U
Sketching Elliptical Fillets
al

Creating an elliptical fillet is very similar to creating a circular fillet; the

size of the fillet is initially based on pick point locations. However, using
rn

elliptical fillets enables you to create an elliptical intersection between two

entities, rather than a rounded intersection. The elliptical fillet is tangent at its
te

endpoints to the adjacent geometry.

In

Elliptical fillets are similar to sketched ellipses in the following ways:

C

• Elliptical fillets are created with construction lines for the major and minor
axes. These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain
PT

the ellipse.
• You can dimension an elliptical fillet by its major and minor axes, as shown
in the right elliptical fillet. To create these dimensions, you can select the
r

axes' construction lines and dimension them directly.

Fo

• You can also dimension an elliptical fillet using the major axis (Rx) and
minor axis (Ry) dimensions, as shown in the upper-left elliptical fillet. These
radius values are measured along the axes from the elliptical fillet to its
center. The major axis is always the horizontal axis when the fillet is first
sketched, regardless of size compared to the minor axis.
• You can also rotate the elliptical fillet after creating it, as shown in the right
elliptical fillet.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.
You cannot select parallel lines as the entities for creating elliptical fillets.

Module 3 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Elliptical Fillets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Fillet_Elliptical ELLIPTICAL_FILLET.PRT

Task 1: Sketch and dimension three elliptical fillets using different

dimensioning schemes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

y
3. Enable only the following

nl
Sketcher Display types:

O
.
4. Click Elliptical from the

se
Fillet drop-down in the Sketching
group.
U
5. Click the vertical and horizontal
sketched entities at the locations
al

shown to create the elliptical

fillet.
rn

6. Click Vertical from the

te

Constrain group and select the

vertical minor axis.
In

7. Click Normal .
• Select the fillet and then
C

middle-click. Select Major

PT

Axis and click Accept. Type

0.47 as the value and press
ENTER.
r

• Select the fillet again and then

Fo

middle-click. Select Minor

Axis and click Accept. Type
0.25 as the value and press
ENTER.

8. Click Elliptical .
9. Click the vertical and horizontal
sketched entities at the locations
shown to create the elliptical
fillet.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 9

 10. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 0.42 as the
value and press ENTER.
• Select the minor axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 0.80 as the
value and press ENTER.

y
11. Click Elliptical .

nl
12. Click the vertical and horizontal

O
sketched entities at the locations
shown to create the elliptical
fillet.
13. Click Vertical and select the
vertical minor axis. se
U
al

14. Click Normal .

rn

• Select the right fillet endpoint

and left vertical line.
te

• Middle-click to place the

horizontal dimension and type
In

1 as the value.
• Select the left fillet endpoint
C

and bottom horizontal line.

• Middle-click to place the
PT

vertical dimension and type

0.25 as the value.
r

15. Further constrain and dimension

Fo

the sketch as shown.

16. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or
more points.
• Minimum two points required.
• Can have any number of
intermediate points.
• Dimensioning schemes include:
– Dimensioning and constraining
spline points
– Tangency Angle

y
– Radius-of-Curvature

nl
O
Figure 1 – Dimensioning a Spline

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Dimensioning Points Figure 3 – Dimensioning Radii

Tangency Angle of Curvature
C
PT

Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or more points. A
spline can also have any number of intermediate points. Each time you click
r

the mouse, you create an additional point through which the spline passes.
Fo

Note that a spline passing through only two points initially forms a straight line.

Dimensioning Splines
You can dimension the endpoints of a spline, and you can also dimension
any of the intermediate points if desired. You do not have to dimension any
points of a spline if both endpoints snap to Sketcher references.
There are special dimensioning schemes for splines:
• Tangency Angle Dimensions – You can create tangency angle dimensions
for endpoints and intermediate points of a spline. Changing the angle
value alters the shape of the spline. To create this dimension, select the
spline, the spline endpoint, and a reference for tangency, then middle-click
to place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement
location dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 11

 Figure 2, the spline endpoints and one intermediate point are dimensioned
with tangency angles.
• Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions – After a Tangency Angle dimension
is created for a spline endpoint, you can create a Radius of Curvature
dimension for that endpoint. The Radius of Curvature dimension can be
used to control the radius of curvature at the endpoint of a spline; changing
its value changes the shape of the spline near the endpoint. Controlling
the Radius of Curvature dimension is useful in cases where a spline meets
up with other geometry (an arc for example), and a curvature continuity
is desired. To create this dimension, select the spline endpoint, then
middle-click to place the dimension. The dimension appears similar to a
radius dimension. In Figure 3, the spline endpoints are dimensioned for
radius of curvature.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Splines

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines [Link]

Task 1: Sketch a spline.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Start the Sketch from the

nl
Datum group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT as

O
the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch

se
dialog box.
4. Enable only the following
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al
rn

5. Click Spline from the

Sketching group.
te

6. Click the vertical and horizontal

reference intersection as the
In

spline starting point.

7. Click four more times to create
C

additional points through which

the spline must pass. The first,
PT

third, and fifth points should all

be on the horizontal reference.
8. Middle-click to stop creating
r

points and complete the spline.

Fo

9. Click One-by-One and edit

the two dimensions to 5 and 12,
respectively.
10. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 13

Task 2: Edit the spline definition and dimension an intermediate point.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

2. Click Normal and dimension
the lowest intermediate point to
the horizontal reference. Type
2.65 as the value and press
ENTER.
3. Click One-by-One and edit
the weak, horizontal dimension
to 9.30.

y
nl
4. Click OK .

O
Task 3: Edit the spline definition and dimension tangency angles and

se
radii of curvature.
U
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
2. Click Normal .
al

• Click the spline, the left

endpoint, and the horizontal
rn

reference, and middle-click

to place the tangency angle
te

dimension.
• Type 65 and press ENTER.
In

• Click the spline, right endpoint,

and horizontal reference,
C

then middle-click to place the

dimension.
PT

• Type 90 and press ENTER.

When placing a tangency
r

angle dimension on a
Fo

spline, you must select the

spline body, a spline control
point, and a reference entity
to create the dimension.
However, it does not matter
in which order you make
the dimension reference
selections.

Module 3 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 3. Click the left endpoint, then
middle-click to place the radius
of curvature dimension.
• Type 7.5 and press ENTER.
• Click the right endpoint, then
middle-click to place the
dimension.
• Type 4.5 and press ENTER.
4. Click OK .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 15

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations
There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a
spline in Sketcher.
• Moving points.
• Spline Edit mode:
– Move individual points
– Move a range of points
– Specify X-Y coordinate
location

y
– Add points

nl
– Delete points Figure 1 – Moving a Point
– Extend spline

O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Deleting a Point

te

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations

In

There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a spline in

Sketcher. You can select individual points that comprise the spline and drag
C

them to new locations to change the shape of the spline, as shown in Figure 1.
PT

You can also perform further basic operations within Spline Edit mode. To
access Spline Edit mode, you have two options: you can either double-click
the spline in the graphics window, or you can select it, then right-click and
r

select Modify. Upon accessing Spline Edit mode, the dashboard appears.
Fo

You must be in Spline Edit mode to perform the following basic spline
operations:
• Moving Points – You can move points using the following methods:
– You can select individual points and drag them to new locations to
change the shape of the spline.
– You can also select multiple points to move simultaneously. To do this,
you select a range of points to move by pressing SHIFT and selecting
two points to limit the range. For example, to move points 2, 3, and 4
in a spline that has 5 points you press SHIFT, select points 1 and 5,
then drag points 2-3-4 together. Note that the range of points cannot
contain constrained points.
– You can move points to precise locations by selecting a point and then
using the Point tab in the dashboard. In the Point tab, you can specify
a reference as the sketch origin or a selected sketched coordinate

Module 3 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 system. Once the coordinate value's reference is selected, you can
specify precise X-Y location values. If the spline is placed in an internal
sketch for a sweep feature, and the spline is dimensioned to a Local
coordinate system, then you can edit the X, Y, and Z-coordinates to
create a 3-D spline.
• Adding and Deleting Points – You can add intermediate points to a spline
by right-clicking the spline and selecting Add Point, as shown in the
lower-right figure. You must right-click over the spline for this menu to
appear. You can delete intermediate points from a spline by right-clicking
the point you wish to delete and selecting Delete Point, as shown in Figure
2. You must right-click the top of the point for this menu option to appear.
• Extending the spline – You can also extend a spline by pressing CTRL+ALT
and clicking beyond a spline endpoint. This can only be done on an

y
endpoint without tangency or constraints defined.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Basic Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines_Modify MOD_SPLINE_BASIC.PRT

Task 1: Move the points of a spline.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 3.
3. Enable only the following

y
nl
Sketcher Display types: .
4. Notice that the spline contains

O
five points.

se
5. Click the point second from the
left and drag it upward.
U
6. Click the point third from the left
and drag it to the left.
al

7. Click the point fourth from the left

and drag it downwards and to
rn

the left.
te

Task 2: Access Spline Edit mode, add three points, and move points as a
range.
In

1. Double-click the spline to access

C

Edit mode.
PT

2. Right-click the spline below the

horizontal reference and select
Add Point.
r

3. Add two more points to the spline

Fo

below the horizontal reference.

4. Select the point fourth from the

left.
5. Press SHIFT and select the point
seventh from the left.
6. Select the point fifth from the left
and drag it downward. Notice
that points five and six move
together as a range.

Module 3 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Edit the X-Y coordinate values of a point to specific values and
delete a point.

1. In the Spline ribbon, select the

Point tab.
2. Select the point above the
horizontal reference. Notice that
the Point tab displays the X and
Y coordinate values of this point.
• Edit the X and Y coordinate
values to 4 and 3, respectively.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

3. Select the point sixth from the

In

left, then right-click and select

Delete Point.
C
r PT
Fo

4. In the dashboard, click Complete

Spline .
5. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 19

Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations
There are a number of advanced operations you can perform
on a spline in Sketcher.

Edit Spline mode enables you to

perform advanced operations:
• Fit Type
– Sparse
– Smooth
• Spline Curvature

y
– Scale

nl
– Density

O
• Interpolation versus Control Points
• Control Polygon mode Figure 1 – Using the Smooth

se
Fit Type
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Viewing Curvature Analysis

te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Interpolation versus

Control Points
r
Fo

Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations

There are a number of advanced operations you can perform on a spline
in Sketcher. These operations are performed within Spline Edit mode.
To access Spline Edit mode, you can either double-click the spline in the
graphics window, or select it, then right-click and select Modify.

Using Fit Type

Fit type enables you to remove redundant data in the spline. You can use
either of the following methods:
• Sparse – Using the Sparse option, you can evenly decrease the number of
points on a spline. To use this option, you specify a sparsity deviation value.
• Smooth – Using the Smooth option, you can alter the shape of the spline
to make it flow more smoothly. To use this option, you specify a quantity of

Module 3 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 spline points the system can use for averaging. In Figure 1, the Smooth
option was used to smooth the spline.

Displaying Spline Curvature

You can click Curvature Analysis in the Spline ribbon to display the
spline curvature. The spline curvature is a porcupine-style spline curvature
plot. The length of the spikes are proportional to the amount of curvature at
that location along the spline. The curvature plot can be displayed while
dynamically dragging spline points, and you can adjust the scale and density
of the curvature plot as desired. Scale increases or decreases the length of
all spikes, and density increases or decreases the quantity of spikes in the

y
plot. The spline curvature is displayed in Figure 2.

nl
O
Interpolation Points Versus Control Points
By default, the system uses interpolation points to control the shape of the

se
spline. If desired, however, you can switch to viewing control points instead
by clicking Control Points in the Spline ribbon, as shown in the top
U
image of Figure 3. When you have toggled to control points, you can then
drag the spline points by the control points, as shown in the bottom image
al

of Figure 3. You can add or delete control points to control the shape of the
spline. You cannot, however, dimension to the control points unless you
rn

switch to Control Polygon mode.

te

Control Polygon Mode

In

You can switch to Control Polygon mode to dimension to the control points
instead of the interpolation points. To access Control Polygon mode,
C

click Control Polygon in the Spline ribbon. You can also move the
PT

interpolation points by dragging the control points. Plus, you can add or
delete control points to control the shape of the spline.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Advanced
Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines_Modify-Advanced MOD_SPLINE_ADV.PRT

Task 1: Display the spline's curvature and adjust the fit type.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

nl
3. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types: .

O
4. Double-click the spline to access
Edit mode.

5. Click Curvature Analysis in se

U
the dashboard.
al

• Drag the Scale slider to the

right to increase the scale.
rn

• Drag the Density slider to the

right to increase the density.
te

• Drag one point upward to

simulate a “non-ideal” spline.
In

Notice that the curvature

becomes erratic.
C

6. In the dashboard, select the Fit

PT

tab.
• Select the Smooth Fit type.
• Edit the number of Odd Points
r

to 5.
Fo

• Edit the number of Odd Points

to 3. Click Yes, if necessary.

7. In the Fit tab, select the Sparse

Fit type.
• Edit the Deviation to 0.01.
• Close the Fit tab.
8. Click Curvature Analysis .

Module 3 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Edit the spline control point locations.

1. In the dashboard, toggle the

spline modification to Control
Points .
• Drag the point second from
the right upward to the height
of the point third from the right.

2. Click Display Dimensions

y
from the Graphics toolbar.
Notice the single dimension.

nl
O
3. Click Control Polygon to
access Control Polygon mode.

se
4. Drag the control points to
approximate a dome shape. U
5. In the Sketch tab, click Normal
as if to create a dimension.
al

6. Notice that the polygon control

rn

points are dimensioned rather

than the spline.
te

7. Click OK .
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 23

Importing and Exporting Spline Points
You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each
point along a spline.

• Requirements:
– Sketched Coordinate System
– Specify Coordinate System
Type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Polar

y
• Coordinate File options:

nl
– Open a .pts text file.

O
– Save current coordinate data to
a file.

se
– Display current coordinate data. U
Figure 1 – Importing Point
al

Coordinate File
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Viewing Spline

Point Coordinates
r
Fo

Importing and Exporting Spline Points

You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each point along
a spline. You must first select a sketched Coordinate System. You can then
specify the type of Coordinate System selected, whether Cartesian (X, Y, Z)
or Polar (R, Theta, Z).

Once the coordinate system is selected, you have three options available:

• Open a text file (with a *.pts extension) of coordinate data by selecting

Open Coordinates from the File tab.
• Save the current coordinate data to a file by selecting Save Coordinates
from the File tab.

Module 3 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 • Display the current coordinate data by selecting Coordinate Info from
the File tab.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Importing and Exporting Spline Points

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Spline_Points SPLINE_PTS.PRT

Task 1: Create a spline and import a file of point coordinates.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
3. Enable only the following

y
nl
Sketcher Display types: .
4. Click Spline and sketch a

O
spline with 5 points. The spline
endpoints should snap to the line

se
endpoints.
5. The third spline point should lie
U
on the horizontal line.
al

6. Click Coordinate System

rn

from the Datum group in the

Sketch ribbon.
te

7. Click the left line endpoint to

place the coordinate system.
In

8. Middle-click to stop sketching

coordinate systems.
C

9. Double-click the spline to access

PT

Edit mode.
10. In the dashboard, select the File
tab.
r

• Select the coordinate system.

Fo

• Click Coordinate Info to

view the current spline point
locations.
• You could save this information
to a text file.
• Click Close.

Module 3 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 11. In the File tab of the dashboard,
click Open Coordinates .
12. In the Modify Spline dialog box,
click Yes to delete the strong
dimensions.
13. In the Open dialog box, click
spline_data.pts and click Open.
14. Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box.

y
15. In the dashboard, click

nl
Coordinate Info to view
the current spline point locations.

O
• Click Close.
16. In the dashboard, click Complete
Spline .
17. Click OK . se
U
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 27

Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and
hyperbolic using conic arcs.

• The type of conic created depends

upon the value of RHO.
• Dimensioning Conic Sections
– Conic endpoints
– Using RHO parameter
♦ RHO = A/(A+B), where C=D

y
– Using three points

nl
– Tangency angle dimensions

O
Figure 1 – Understanding the

se RHO Parameter
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Creating a Conic Figure 3 – Creating a Conic

using RHO using Three Points
C
PT

Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic
using Conic arcs. To create a conic arc, select the endpoint locations and
r

then select an apex or shoulder location. A centerline is automatically created

Fo

connecting the endpoints of the conic.

Dimensioning Conic Endpoints

You can dimension the ends of the conic using dimensions or constraints.
You then further dimension conic sections by using the RHO parameter, by
using three points, or through tangency angle dimensions.

Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic, as shown in
the lower-left figure. This is a dimension that appears on the conic similar
to a radius dimension. As shown in Figure 1, the RHO value is the ratio of
length A to A+B (that is, A/(A+B)), where C=D. RHO can vary from 0.05 to

Module 3 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 0.95. Higher RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO
values create a more flat conic shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse

Using Three Points

y
Instead of using a RHO parameter, you can locate a Sketcher point at the

nl
apex of the conic to control the conic shape. The Sketcher point can then
be dimensioned or constrained accordingly. In Figure 3, the conic is created

O
using three points. Notice that a RHO parameter is not present.

Using Tangency Angle Dimensions

se
U
You can create tangency angle dimensions for endpoints of a conic. Changing
the angle value alters the shape of the conic. To create this dimension, select
the conic, the conic endpoint, a reference for tangency, and middle-click to
al

place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location
rn

dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In Figures 2 and

3, the endpoints have tangency angle dimensions defined.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Sketching Conics

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Conic [Link]

Task 1: Sketch a conic and dimension it with a RHO parameter.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the Sketch from the feature toolbar.

y
3. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane.

nl
• Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

O
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

se
5. Select Conic from the Arc
types drop-down menu in the
U
Sketching group.
• Click the origin of the vertical
al

and horizontal references as

the left endpoint.
rn

• Click the horizontal reference

to the right of the vertical
te

reference as the right endpoint.

• Move the cursor upward and
In

click to complete the conic.

C

6. Click Normal .
PT

• Click the conic, the left

endpoint, and the horizontal
reference, and middle-click
to place the tangency angle
r

dimension.
Fo

• Type 70 and press ENTER.

• Click the conic, right endpoint,
and horizontal reference,
then middle-click to place the
dimension.
• Type 50 and press ENTER.

Module 3 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 7. Click One-by-One and edit
the width dimension to 10. If the
RHO dimension is already 0.5,
select it, right-click, and select
Strong, and press ENTER.
8. Click OK from the Sketch tab.
9. In the model tree, right-click
Sketch 1 and select Hide.

Task 2: Sketch a conic and dimension it using three points.

y
nl
1. Start the Sketch .

O
• Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.

2. Click Conic .
• Click the origin of the vertical se
U
and horizontal references as
the left endpoint.
al

• Click the horizontal reference

to the right of the vertical
rn

reference as the right endpoint.

• Move the cursor upward and
te

click to complete the conic.

In

3. Click Point from the

C

Sketching group.
4. Click the conic near the apex to
PT

create the point.

r
Fo

5. Click Normal and create the

two tangency angles, editing the
left and right values to 70 and
50, respectively.
6. Notice that the point is
constrained to the conic and is
linearly dimensioned.
7. Notice that there is no RHO
dimension.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 31

 8. Click One-by-One and edit the
remaining dimensions as shown,
starting with the width dimension.
9. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Text
You can add text as a sketched entity.
• Creating Text
– Specify manually
– Using existing parameters
• Placing Text
– Define start and end point
• Modifying Text
– Fonts Figure 1 – Sketching Text

y
– Horizontal and Vertical Position

nl
– Aspect ratio

O
– Slant angle
– Place along curve

se
– Kerning
• Open-Type Fonts
U
– Multi-Language Support
Figure 2 – Modifying Text Attributes
– Expanded Character Set
al

– Advanced Control
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Placing Text Along

a Curve
PT

Creating Sketched Text

r
Fo

You can add text in a sketch when creating extruded protrusions and cuts,
trimming surfaces, and creating cosmetic features. The sketched text can
be used by almost any solid or surface feature, as long as the rules for open
and closed sketches are followed.
You can either manually type the value for the text, or use existing parameters
in the design model. The system displays the value of the parameters as the
text value. You can also include text symbols, such as degree (°), plus or
minus (±), and omega (Ω).

Placing Sketched Text

To add text, you must define a start point and an end point. The system
creates a construction line between the start point and end point. The

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 33

length of this line determines the height of the text, while the angle of the
line determines the text orientation.
To help you visualize the direction and the orientation of the text, a small
triangle symbol is presented at the text start position point.
You can select the start point of the construction line at the beginning of the
text flow, and drag it to increase or decrease the height of the text. You can
also select the end point of the construction line and drag it to change the
text orientation.

The construction line length is determined by a dimension, which

you can modify to change the overall text height.

y
nl
Modifying Sketched Text

O
You can perform the following types of modifications to sketched text entities:

se
• Fonts – To modify the font of sketched text entities, select from a list
of standard fonts, such as cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d, isofont,
U
leroy, norm_font. Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire enables you to read and place
Open-Type Font (OTF) characters into Sketcher.
al

• Horizontal and Vertical Position – You can modify the justification values
for the horizontal and vertical positions of the text, which updates the text
rn

justification around the text start position point. You can constrain the
vertical position of the text to Top, Middle, or Bottom. You can constrain
te

the horizontal position of the text to Left, Center, or Right. The default
dimensioning scheme for the text is consistent, regardless of its orientation.
In

The resulting text boundary box is tight against the text, providing additional
control on its exact position in Sketcher.
C

• Aspect ratio – Using this option, you can modify the aspect ratio factor of
the text without changing its height or orientation.
PT

• Slant angle – You can modify the slant angle of the text using this option.
The Slant angle option affects how the text is angled, with respect to the
sides of the rectangle in which it is contained.
r
Fo

• Place along curve – Using this option you can place text along a curve.
First, select the arc or circle on which you wish to place the text. Then,
select the direction in which you want the text to flow. You can always flip
the direction of the text flow. You can also control the justification of text
along a curve by using the horizontal and vertical position options. If you
change the horizontal position, the text moves along the curve, either to the
right or left side of the defined curve.
• Kerning – Enables font kerning for the text string. This controls the space
between certain pairs of characters, improving the appearance of the text
string. For example, in some font types an “i” and an “m” are allotted
the same amount of space. Kerning provides proportionate spacing for
narrow and wide letters. Kerning is a characteristic of the particular font.
Alternatively, set the sketcher_default_font_kerning configuration option to
automatically enable kerning for all the new text strings that you create.

Module 3 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Open-Type Fonts
OTF is becoming a global font standard, with added capabilities for advanced
typography. The font is based on Unicode, which enables the framework
for multi-language support. Open-Type Fonts offer an expanded character
set and layout features to provide better linguistic support and advanced
typographic control. This enables you to read and place these custom fonts,
including symbols and logos that have been mapped, to specific functional
keys. In addition, you can select a custom font and place it, while still
maintaining proportions and ratios.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Sketching Text

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Text [Link]

Task 1: Sketch text on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of feature TEXT_SKETCH.

y
3. Click No Hidden .

nl
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

O
5. Click Text from the Sketching
group.
6. Click at the center of the model
and drag a line upwards to se
U
approximately 75% of the total
model height. Click again to
al

create the overall text height.

rn

7. Move the Text dialog box to the

right.
te

8. In the Text dialog box, type 123

In

as the text. Notice that it moves

to the right.
• Edit the Horizontal Position to
C

Center.
PT

• Edit the Vertical Position to

Middle.
• Click Text Symbol and click
r

the ° (degree) symbol.

Fo

• Click Close in the Text Symbol

dialog box.

9. In the Text dialog box, edit the

Aspect ratio to 1.5.
• Edit the Slant angle to 15.

Module 3 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 10. In the Text dialog box, select the
Place along curve check box.
• Select the arc.
• Edit the Vertical Position to
Bottom.

11. In the Text dialog box, select Use

parameter.

y
12. In the Select Parameter dialog

nl
box, select parameter VENDOR.
• Click Insert Selected.

O
• Notice that the numbers are
replaced by the parameter

se
value text.
13. Click OK in the Text dialog box.
U
14. Click One-by-One .
al

15. Select the arc, then right-click

rn

and select Construction.

16. Click OK .
te
In
C

17. Click Shading .

PT

18. Click Parameters from the

Tools tab.
19. In the Parameters dialog box,
r

edit the VENDOR parameter

Fo

Value to PTC.
• Click OK.

20. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 37

Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options
Existing geometry and/or dimensions can be converted into
different formats in Sketcher without having to be re-created.
• The following conversions
can be performed:
– Strong
– Spline
– Reference
– Perimeter

y
– Tapered

nl
– Arc Length/Arc Angle
– Radius/Diameter/Linear

O
Figure 1 – Converting to a Reference
Dimension

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Converting an Offset Line

In

Figure 2 – Converting to a to a Tapered Line

Perimeter Dimension
C

Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

PT

Existing geometry or dimensions can be converted into different formats

in Sketcher without having to be re-created. Conversions are handled by
r

selecting the item to be converted, then selecting Operations > Convert To

Fo

from the main menu and selecting the desired conversion type. In many
cases, you can also select the item, then right-click and select the desired
conversion type. The following types of conversions can be performed:
• Strong – Enables you to convert a weak (gray) dimension to strong. You
can also select the weak dimension, then right-click and select Strong.
• Spline – Enables you to select a chain of lines and arcs, and convert them
to a spline that closely approximates the selected chain. After conversion,
you can delete the old entities to view or manipulate the spline.
• Reference – Enables you to select an existing dimension and convert
it to a reference dimension. You can convert any dimension type
including linear, angular, and radial dimensions. You can also select the
dimension, right-click, and select Reference. Reference dimensions track
with geometry, but you cannot edit their value. Reference dimensions
do not factor into a sketch's regeneration, so they cannot cause

Module 3 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 over-dimensioning. Also, you can display reference dimensions on a 2-D
drawing. You can always convert a reference dimension back to a strong
dimension.
• Perimeter – Enables you to convert existing dimensions into a perimeter
dimension. To create a perimeter dimension, you select all dimensions
to be converted and the geometry that is to be included in the perimeter
measurement. You must then specify the dimension to be varied. This
dimension is driven by the perimeter dimension. That is, as the perimeter
value is updated, the sketch geometry updates by varying the dimension
specified. You can also click Perimeter from the Dimension group in
the Sketch tab.
• Tapered – Enables you to select a single offset edge and taper it. The

y
system achieves this by creating a second dimension for the offset edge.

nl
You can then edit either dimension to create the taper. Note that you can
only taper single offset edges and not loops.

O
• Arc Length/Arc Angle – Enables you to convert an arc angle dimension
to an arc length dimension, or an arc length dimension to an arc angle

se
dimension.
• Radius/Diameter/Linear – Enables you to convert a radius, diameter, or
U
linear dimension to either of the other dimension types.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Convert [Link]

Task 1: Convert a radius to a diameter and an arc angle to an arc length.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
3. Enable only the following

y
Sketcher Display types:

nl
.

O
4. Select the 5 radius dimension,
then right-click and select

se
Convert to Diameter.
5. Select the 100 dimension, then
U
right-click and select Convert to
Length.
al

6. Click OK .
rn

Task 2: Convert a normal dimension to a reference dimension.

te

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

In

2. Click No Hidden .
3. Select the 8.38 dimension, then
C

right-click and select Reference.

PT

4. Notice the angle dimension is

created because the reference
dimension is no longer factored
into the sketch's regeneration.
r
Fo

5. Click Perpendicular from the

Constrain group and select the
two angled lines.
• Notice the angle dimension is
removed and the reference
dimension value has adjusted
to match the new geometry.
• Middle-click to stop
constraining entities.

Module 3 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Convert an existing dimension to a perimeter dimension.

1. Select the five lines in the sketch

and click Perimeter from the
Dimension group.
2. Read the message area prompt
and select the 6.00 dimension as
the dimension to vary.
3. Edit the perimeter value to 40.
4. Notice the variable dimension

y
adjusts to compensate for the

nl
new perimeter.

O
Task 4:
se
Convert a vertical line to a tapered line.
U
1. Click Offset .
al

2. Select the right, vertical edge of

rn

the protrusion.
• Type 4 as the offset and press
te

ENTER.
• Click Close.
In

3. Click Line Chain and sketch

two horizontal lines.
C
r PT
Fo

4. Click One-by-One .
5. Select the vertical offset line.
6. Click Operations > Convert To
> Tapered.
7. Notice the extra dimension that
is created.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 41

 8. Edit the top 4 dimension to 2.
9. Click OK .
10. Click Shading .

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 Locking Sketcher Entities
You lock Sketcher dimensions and/or geometry to prevent
accidental modifications.

• Locking Geometry
– Cyan lock icon
– Geometry cannot be dragged
– Will update to other edits
• Locking Dimensions

y
– Red color

nl
– Dimension cannot be dragged
– Value can be edited

O
se
Figure 1 – No Entities Locked
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Geometry Lines Locked Figure 3 – Dimensions Locked

PT

Locking Sketcher Entities

r

In a sketch, you can lock either geometry or dimensions to help preserve

Fo

your design intent. By locking an entity, you prevent accidental modifications

from dragging to an undesired value. However, you can still make changes to
locked geometry or dimensions by editing the dimension value.
Keep in mind the following when locking Sketcher entities:
• For geometry, a cyan lock symbol is shown when you highlight an entity
or Show entity locks.
• For dimensions, the whole dimension displays in red.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when you complete and
redefine a sketch.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when using dynamic edit to drag
a section from Part mode.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 43

Locking Sketcher Geometry
To lock sketcher geometry, select the geometry item (for example, a line
or arc) you want to lock and then either right-click and select Lock, or
selectToggle Lock from Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock
the selected geometry, select Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down
menu in the ribbon, or right-click and select Unlock.
You can toggle the display of the lock icons by right-clicking, with nothing
selected in the sketch, and selecting Show Entity Locks or Hide Entity Locks
from the right-click pop-up menu.

Locking Sketcher Dimensions

y
nl
To lock dimensions, select the dimension or dimensions you want to lock
and then either right-click and select Lock, or select Toggle Lock from the

O
Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock the selected dimension,
click Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon, or
right-click and select Unlock.

se
In addition, the Autolock option enables you to automatically lock
U
user-defined dimensions. You can specify whether you want to automatically
lock the dimension that you create or modify by setting the value of the
sketcher_dimension_autolock configuration option to yes. Alternatively,
al

you can click File > Options > Sketcher and select the Lock User Defined
rn

Dimensions option in the Miscellaneous tab of the Sketcher Preferences

dialog box. After you specify that the user-defined dimensions are to be
locked, all dimensions that you subsequently create or modify automatically
te

appear locked. The locked state of the user-defined dimension is maintained

when you quit or reenter Sketcher mode. The state of the dimensions that
In

are created before you specify to automatically lock the dimensions, do not
change.
C

The locked state of a dimension is not retained if the dimension is

PT

referenced in a relation; the relation takes priority over the locked

status of the dimension.
r
Fo

Module 3 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options
In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types
of dimensions within Sketcher and perform operations on
dimensions.

• Dimension options include:

– Creating Reference
Dimensions
♦ Driven dimension
♦ Track with geometry

y
♦ Not editable

nl
♦ REFsuffix

O
– Creating Baseline
Dimensions

se
♦ Creates ordinate Figure 1 – Creating a Reference
dimension scheme U Dimension
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Creating a Baseline

Dimension and Ordinate Dimensions
r
Fo

Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types of dimensions
within Sketcher. You can also perform various operations on dimensions
within Sketcher.

Creating Reference Dimensions

A Reference dimension is a driven dimension that is created within Sketcher.
Reference dimensions track with geometry, but you cannot edit their value.
Reference dimensions are denoted within Sketcher with the suffix REF.
You can create a Reference dimension for linear, angular, and radial
dimensions. Reference dimensions do not factor into a sketch's regeneration,
so they cannot cause over-dimensioning. Also, you can display Reference

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 45

dimensions on a 2-D drawing. A Reference dimension has been created in
Figure 1. You can click the Reference icon from the Dimension group.

Creating Ordinate Dimensions using a Baseline Dimension

A baseline dimension creates an ordinate dimension scheme. When you
place the baseline dimension, switch to normal dimensioning, and dimension
the baseline to a reference; the resulting dimension is ordinate. In Figure
2, the baseline dimension is the 0.00 dimension, and the 5.00 and 15.00
dimensions were dimensioned to the baseline dimension, which resulted in
an ordinate scheme. You click the Baseline from the Dimension group to

y
create the ordinate scheme.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Dimensions_Options [Link]

Task 1: Create a reference dimension and resolve a Sketcher conflict.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

y
3. Click No Hidden .

nl
4. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:

O
.
5. Click Reference from the
Sketcher toolbar.
6. Select the upper-right angled se
U
line and middle-click to place the
dimension.
al
rn

7. Click Normal and dimension

the adjacent angled line.
te

8. Notice the over-dimensioned

condition.
In

9. In the Resolve Sketch dialog

box, click Dim > Ref to resolve
C

the conflict.
PT

Task 2: Lock dimensions to restrict the sketch.

r

1. Click One-by-One .
Fo

2. Click the lower-right corner of the

sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
3. Notice that the whole sketch
moves.
4. Click Undo .
5. Press CTRL and select the 4.00
and 5.00 dimensions.
• Right-click and select Lock.
• Notice the red color.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 47

 6. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
7. Notice the sketch motion is restricted.
8. Click Undo .

9. Select the bottom sketched

entity, then right-click and select
Lock.
10. Cursor over the entity and notice
the lock.

y
11. Click the lower-right corner of the

nl
sketch and drag it.
12. Notice the sketch motion is fully

O
restricted.

se
Task 3: Create ordinate dimensions. U
1. Click Baseline from the
Dimension group.
al

2. Select the left vertical sketch line

rn

and middle-click above it to place

the baseline dimension.
te
In
C
PT

3. Right-click and select

Dimension.
• Select the 0.00 baseline
r

dimension.
Fo

• Select the first peak and

middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the first peak.
• Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box and press
ENTER.

Module 3 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 4. In the graphics window, select
the 0.00 baseline dimension.
• Select the second peak and
middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the second peak.
• Click Delete and press
ENTER.

y
5. Click OK .

nl
6. Click Shading .

O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 49

Sketcher Diagnostic Tools
Sketcher diagnostic tools enable you to analyze common
sketching problems.

Sketcher Diagnostic Capabilities

• Shade closed loops.
• Highlight overlapping geometry.
• Highlight open ends.
• Feature requirements check.

y
Figure 1 – Shade Closed Lopes

nl
O
se
U
al

Figure 2 – Highlight
Overlapping Geometry
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Highlight Open Ends

Figure 4 – Feature
Requirements Check
r
Fo

Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Four diagnostic tools have been added to Sketcher to help find, analyze, and
solve common sketching problems. The following icon tools are available
from the main toolbar in Sketcher:

• Shade Closed Loops – The area inside entities that form a closed
loop is shaded. The default shading color is a pale yellow.
– The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and
manipulate the sketch to view the shading appear and disappear.

• Overlapping Geometry – Sketched geometry that is overlapping is

highlighted in magenta. This includes sketched geometry that crosses
other geometry, or lies directly on other geometry.

Module 3 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 – The icon for this option does not remain depressed, meaning the
highlighting appears until the sketch view is changed or repainted, and
then you can click the icon again.

• Highlight Open Ends – The endpoints of entities that are not common
to more than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of
the sketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red dot on the
open endpoints in question.
– The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and
manipulate the sketch to view the open ends highlighting appear and
disappear.

• Feature Requirements – Provides a report indicating whether the

y
sketch meets the requirements for the feature being created. This option is

nl
available in 3-D (Part mode) Sketcher only. Although this option works for
an external or internal sketch, to get the full benefit from the tool you should

O
be in an internal sketch. This ensures that the tool can compare the sketch
geometry with the specific requirements for that feature. For example, the
following features each have different sketch requirements:

se
– Solid Extrude – Must form a closed loop by itself or against adjacent
geometry.
U
– Solid Revolve – Sketched geometry must be on one side of the
centerline.
al

– Rib – Must have an open sketch.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 51

PROCEDURE - Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Diagnostics [Link]

Task 1: Utilize the diagnostic tools on a sketch with issues.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the Extrude .

y
• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.

nl
• Select the front model surface.
• Click Sketch.

O
• Click No Hidden .

se
• Click Sketch View .
• Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
U
al

3. Click Palette .
• Double-click the diagnostic
rn

sketch.
–
te

If you do not see

In

the diagnostic
sketch, make
sure to set the
C

Working Directory
PT

to Sketcher\
Diagnostics
folder.
r

• Place the sketch anywhere on

Fo

the model.
• Click Close from the Sketcher
palette.
• Edit the Scale to 1.0 and press
ENTER.
• Drag the sketch to snap to the
centerlines.
• Click Accept Changes .

Module 3 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 4. Click OK .
• Notice the two warnings in the
message window.
• Click No.
5. Click Feature Requirements
.
• Notice the various warnings.
• Click Close.
6. Notice that the sketch is not

y
shaded, indicating that the

nl
section is open.
• Closed sections should be

O
shaded when Shade Closed
Loops is enabled in the

se
Inspect group. U
7. Click Overlapping Geometry
.
al

• Zoom in on the green

rn

highlighted lines.

8. Click Corner and trim the

te

lines.
In

• Click Refit .
C
r PT

9. Verify that Highlight Open Ends

Fo

is enabled in the Inspect

group.
• Zoom in on the two green dots.

10. Click Corner and trim the

lines.
• Click Refit .
• Notice that the closed sketch
is now shaded.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 53

 11. Click Feature Requirements
.
• Notice that the sketch has
no warnings and the section
is now shaded, indicating a
closed section.
• Click Close.
• Click OK .

y
nl
O
12. Click Shading .
13. Right-click and select Remove
Material. se
U
• Right-click the depth handle
and select To Selected.
al

• Select the rectangular surface

rn

of Extrude 2.
14. Click Complete Feature .
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 Module 4

y
Advanced Hole Creation

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Holes are found in most manufactured products, and come in a variety of
shapes and sizes. Holes can be drilled, contain counterbores, contain
countersinks, contain threads, or be created from an industry standard set
U
of sizes.
al

In this module, you learn more advanced methods of hole creation, including
using standard holes, sketched holes, and on point holes.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Create standard holes.

• Display holes in a lightweight manner.
C

• Create sketched holes.

PT

• Create on point holes.

• Create cosmetic threads.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 1

Creating Standard Holes
Standard holes use hole and thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF
engineering standards.

Standard hole options include:

• Thread series:
– ISO
– UNC
– UNF

y
– Represented by a surface • Drilled hole depth options:

nl
• Tapping: – Shoulder
– Tapered hole – Depth

O
• No tapping: • Add countersink:
– Drilled hole – Add Exit Countersink
– Clearance hole
se
• Add counterbore
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Standard Hole Options

te

Creating Standard Holes

In

Standard holes are based on industry-standard fastener tables. Creo

Parametric provides hole charts and tapped or clearance diameters for the
C

selected fastener from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards. Any hole can be made
PT

into a standard hole, including linear, radial, diameter, and coaxial holes.
The following standard hole options are available:
• Tapping – You can specify thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards.
r

You can also make a tapped hole tapered. In Creo Parametric, you can
Fo

specify whether threads are displayed in the interface. Threads are

represented by a surface, as shown on the left two holes in the figure.
• No Tapping – If you do not tap the hole, you must specify whether the hole
is a clearance hole or a drilled hole. If the hole is a clearance hole, specify
whether the fit is Close, Medium, or Free. If the hole is drilled, there are
two different ways to dimension the depth:
1. Hole Shoulder Depth – Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled
hole to the end of the shoulder.
2. Hole Depth – Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled hole to
the tip of the hole.
• Add countersink – Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the
countersink angle and diameter, although standard values are provided
based on the hole size. You can also create an exit countersink on a
through all hole.

Module 4 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Add counterbore – Creates a counterbore on the hole. Again, you can
edit the counterbore diameter and depth, although standard values are
provided based on the hole size.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Standard Holes
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Hole\Standard_Hole HOLE_STD.PRT

Task 1: Redefine four simple holes to make them standard holes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.
3. In the dashboard, click Standard

y
Hole .

nl
• Click Tap Hole , if

O
necessary.
• Edit the hole size to UNC

se
1/4-20 from the drop-down
lists.
U
• Edit the depth to Through All
.
al

• Click Countersink .
rn

4. Select the Shape tab in the

te

dashboard.
• Select the Include thread
In

surface check box, if

necessary.
C

• Select Thru Thread.

• Select the Exit Countersink
PT

check box.
5. Click Complete Feature .
r
Fo

6. Edit the definition of HOLE_4.

7. In the dashboard, click Standard
Hole .
• Click Tap Hole to de-select
it.
• Click Clearance Hole .
• Edit the hole size to UNC
3/8-16 from the drop-down
lists.
• Edit the depth to Through All
.
• Click Counterbore .

Module 4 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 8. Select the Shape tab in the
dashboard.
• Select Free Fit from the
drop-down list.
• Clear the Exit Countersink
check box, if necessary.
9. Click Complete Feature .

y
10. Edit the definition of HOLE_2.

nl
11. In the dashboard, click Standard

O
Hole .

se
• Click Tap Hole to enable
it, if necessary.
U
• Edit the hole size to ISO M8x1.
• Click Shoulder Depth , if
al

necessary.
• Edit the depth value to 20.
rn

12. Select the Shape tab in the

te

dashboard.
• Select the Include thread
In

surface check box if

necessary and edit the
C

depth to 15.
PT

13. Click Complete Feature .

14. Edit the definition of HOLE_3.

r
Fo

15. In the dashboard, click Standard

Hole .
• Click Tap Hole to de-select
it.
• Edit the hole size to ISO
M12x1.
• Click Tip Depth , if
necessary.
• Edit the depth value to 20.
16. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 5

 17. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters, select
Suppressed Objects to enable it, and click OK.
18. Right-click EXTRUDE_CUT and select Resume to compare holes.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Lightweight Hole Display
Only the hole outline appears with Lightweight Hole Display.
• Icon in Dashboard
– Hole outline appears
– Icon in model tree
• Mass Properties affected
– Dialog box appears upon
calculation

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Default and
Lightweight Holes
al
rn

Figure 2 – Lightweight Hole in Model

Tree
te
In

Figure 3 – Message Window

C

Lightweight Hole Display

PT

You can enable the Lightweight hole display option by clicking Lightweight
Hole in the dashboard for a straight hole. Once enabled, the hole
r

is represented by only its outline on the placement surface, speeding up

Fo

regeneration and simplifying the display for models with high quantities
of holes.
Keep in mind the following when using this option:
• The model tree displays the Lightweight hole icon for holes with the
Lightweight option enabled.
• Mass Properties are affected after changing a hole to Lightweight display.
– A dialog box appears to remind you if Lightweight holes are present
when calculating mass properties.
– A model with Lightweight holes enabled generally has an increased
mass over its mass with solid holes.
• The Lightweight hole option is only available for simple holes.
You can change the display of an existing solid hole by selecting it, (either on
the model or in the model tree) then right-clicking and selecting Convert to

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 7

Lightweight. Conversely, the display of a Lightweight hole can be converted
to that of a solid hole by selecting it, then right-clicking and selecting Convert
to Solid.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sketched Holes
For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can
create a sketched hole.
• Holes can be linear, radial, or
coaxial.
• Sketch the profile or open an
existing one.
• Sketch requirements:
– The hole must be sketched
vertically.

y
– The first vertical datum

nl
centerline is used to revolve the

O
section.
– The section must be closed.

se
– The uppermost horizontal
line must be aligned with the
placement surface. Figure 1 – Viewing the Sketch
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Horizontally Placed

C

Sketched Hole
PT

Figure 3 – Placing a Sketched Hole

Creating Sketched Holes

r
Fo

For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can create a
sketched hole. You can place a sketched hole using linear, radial, or coaxial
placement. You can either sketch within the context of the hole feature or
open an existing sketch file. If desired, your company can create a library of
previously saved sketches to be used in the creation of sketched holes.
When creating a sketched hole, the following are requirements for the sketch:
• The hole must be sketched vertically. However, the sketch can be placed
in any orientation in the model. For example, in Figure 2, the sketched
hole is placed horizontally.
• The first vertical datum centerline is used to revolve the section.
• The section must be closed.
• The system aligns the uppermost horizontal line in the sketch with the
placement surface on the model. In Figure 3, the top edge of the sketch is
aligned to the top surface of the model.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Sketched Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Hole\Sketched_Holes HOLE_SKETCHED.PRT

Task 1: Create a sketched hole by sketching the hole profile.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, click Hole from
the Engineering group.

y
3. Click the top surface to place the

nl
hole.

O
4. Right-click and select Offset
se
U
References Collector.
5. Press CTRL and select the left
al

and back surfaces.

• Edit the offset from the left
rn

surface to 12.5.
• Edit the offset from the back
te

surface to 6.75.
In

6. In the dashboard, click Use

C

Sketch .
PT

• Click Activate Sketcher .

• Click Centerline from the
Datum group and sketch a
r

vertical centerline.
Fo

• Sketch and dimension the hole

profile as shown.
• Click OK .

7. Click Complete Feature .

Module 4 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Create a sketched hole by importing the hole profile.

1. Click the Hole .

2. Click the front, rounded surface
to place the hole.
3. Right-click and select Offset
References Collector.
4. Press CTRL and select datum
planes FRONT and TOP.
• Edit the angle offset from

y
datum plane FRONT to 60.

nl
• Edit the axial offset from datum

O
plane TOP to 4.60.

5. In the dashboard, click Use

Sketch .
se
U
• Click Open .
• In the Open Section dialog
al

box, select hole_section.sec

and click Open.
rn
te
In

6. Click Complete Feature .

C
r PT
Fo

7. Select the Operations group

drop-down list, and click
Resume > Resume Last Set.
8. Spin the model to view the
sketched hole cross-sections.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 11

Creating On Point Holes
You can place a hole by selecting a datum point.

• Datum point must lie on a surface.

• The hole is created perpendicular to the surface.
• Useful for placing holes on contoured surfaces.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Creating an On Point Hole
U
Creating On Point Holes
al

You can place a hole by selecting a datum point. The datum point must be
rn

created on a surface. When you select the datum point, the system positions
the hole perpendicular to the surface referenced by the datum point, and the
te

hole is center aligned with the datum point. This method is useful for placing
holes on contoured surfaces, when you want the hole axis to be normal to
In

the surface location.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating On Point Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Hole\On_Point HOLE_ON-[Link]

Task 1: Create a hole on a datum point.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Hole from the
Engineering group.

nl
3. ClickDatum in the

O
dashboard.

se
4. Click Point from the Datum
group. U
• Select the front, right, rounded
corner surface.
al

5. Right-click and select Offset

rn

References.
6. Press CTRL and select datum
te

planes RIGHT and FRONT from

the Model Tree.
In

• Edit the offset from datum

plane RIGHT to 17.
C

• Edit the offset from datum

plane FRONT to 18.
PT

7. Click OK in the Datum Point

dialog box.
r

8. In the dashboard, click Resume

Fo

Feature .
9. Edit the hole diameter to 3.
10. Edit the hole depth to To Next
.
11. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 13

 12. Expand Hole 1 in the model tree.
13. Notice the embedded datum
point.
14. Right-click Hole 1 and select
Edit.
15. Notice that you can edit the
datum point offset dimensions.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Cosmetic Threads
Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation
of threads on a model, without actually modeling a helical
feature.

Lightweight
representation
• No geometry
created

y
• Surface
Feature

nl
– Associated

O
parameters
– Properties

se
from
standard
holes
U
• Internal or
external
al

threads Figure 1 – External Cosmetic Thread

rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2
– Internal
Cosmetic Thread Figure 3 – Cosmetic Thread Parameters
r
Fo

Creating Cosmetic threads

Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation of threads
on a model, without actually modeling a helical feature, as shown in Figure
1 and Figure 2.
Cosmetic threads generate a surface feature with a set of parameters that
define the thread, as shown in Figure 3. The parameters can be imported,
exported, or used in a drawing. Cylindrical or Conical surfaces can be
selected to create internal or external threads. Cosmetic threads use known
information about standard holes to automatically assign cosmetic thread
properties, wherever possible. You can define thread pitch and major/minor
diameter if the reference surface does not belong to a standard threaded hole.
The resulting Cosmetic thread definition is not parametrically linked
to hole definition.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Threads

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Cosmetic\Thread [Link]

Task 1: Create an external cosmetic thread.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select [Link], then
right-click and select Open.

y
nl
3. Click the Engineering group
drop-down menu and select

O
Cosmetic Thread.
4. Select the surface on which to

se
apply the cosmetic thread. U
al
rn
te
In

5. Select the Depth tab.

C

6. Select the surface from which to

PT

start the thread.

r
Fo

Module 4 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 7. Notice the thread depth defaults
to surface length.

y
nl
O
8. Select the Properties tab and
notice the default properties.

se
U
al
rn

9. Click Define Standard Thread

te

from the dashboard.

10. Select ISO from the standard
In

drop down-list, if necessary.

11. Select M2.3x45 from the thread
C

size drop-down list.

PT

12. Notice the default properties

have been updated.

13. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

• Click Close Window and return to the assembly.

Task 2: Create an internal cosmetic thread.

1. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT,
right-click, and select Open.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 17

 2. Click the Engineering group
drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Thread.
3. Select the surface on which to
apply the cosmetic thread.
• Notice the cosmetic thread
has automatically matched to
the underlying M2.3 x .45 hole.

4. Select the thread start surface.

y
nl
O
se
5. Right-click the depth drag handle
and select To Selected.
U
6. Query select the back surface.
7. Click Complete Feature .
al
rn

8. With the feature still selected,

te

right-click and select Pattern.

9. Click Complete Feature .
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Module 5

y
Advanced Drafts and Ribs

nl
O
Module Overview

se
With the draft feature, you can create tapered or angled surfaces from
existing geometry. It is common to create drafted surfaces on molded or
cast parts, however the draft feature can also be used to create this type of
U
geometry for everyday modeling tasks. It is also common to add ribs on
molded and cast parts for increased structural rigidity.
al

In this module, you learn how to utilize several advanced draft options, such
rn

as drafting intent surfaces, drafting with multiple angles, and using different
features for splits. You also learn how to create trajectory ribs.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Draft intent surfaces.
C

• Create drafts with multiple angles.

PT

• Create drafts using the extend intersect surfaces option.

• Create draft splits at sketch, at curve, and at surface.
• Create trajectory ribs.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 1

Drafting Intent Surfaces
Intent surfaces work well for drafts when referencing all surfaces
from a single feature.

• Creates robust references to “concepts.”

• Use when referencing surfaces from one feature.

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Using Intent Surfaces to Draft a Part Model
al
rn

Drafting Intent Surfaces

You can select intent references within the Draft tool. Using intent references
te

creates robust references to “concepts” rather than explicit surface id's such
as side surfaces or end surfaces. Intent surfaces work well for drafts when
In

referencing all surfaces from a single feature. For example, in Figure 1, intent
surfaces are used to draft all surfaces of the hex cut. When the sketch for the
C

hex cut is modified, the draft feature automatically updates. Had the surfaces
been selected individually, the draft feature would have failed.
PT

When geometry from multiple features must be selected, you should use
methods such as Loop surfaces and Surface and Boundary.
r
Fo

Module 5 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Drafting Intent Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Intent-Surfs DRAFT_INTENT-[Link]

Task 1: Draft a part model using intent surfaces.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Draft from the Draft

nl
types drop-down menu.
3. Right-click to query and select

O
the intent surfaces of the inner
hex cut feature.

se
U
4. Press CTRL, right-click to query,
and select the outer cylindrical
al

intent surfaces.
rn
te
In
C
PT

5. Right-click and select Draft

Hinges.
• Select datum plane TOP in the
r
Fo

model tree.
6. In the dashboard, select the
Split tab.
• Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
• Select Draft sides
dependently as the Side
option.
7. Edit the draft angle to -10.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 3

 8. In the dashboard, click Reverse
Angle .
9. Click Complete Feature .
10. Disable Plane Display .

11. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

y
• Enable only the following

nl
Sketcher Display types:

O
.
• Drag a window around the hex

se
sketch and press DELETE.
• Click Center and Point
U
and sketch a circle.
• Click One-by-One and edit
al

the diameter to 10.

rn

12. Click OK .
te

13. Notice that the draft automatically

updated without failing.
In
C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles
You can create draft features that contain multiple angles.
• Each angle has:
– Draft angle value
– Reference
– Location
♦ Ratio
• Draft Angle operations:
– Add/Delete angle

y
– Flip Angle

nl
– Make Constant Figure 1 – Angles Tab in Dashboard

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Adding Multiple

Draft Angles Figure 3 – Flipping an Angle
C

Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles

PT

You can create draft features that contain multiple angles. To create additional
angles in the draft feature you use the Angles tab in the dashboard, as shown
r

in Figure 1. In addition to its own draft angle value, you can also specify the
Fo

following two items for each draft angle:

• Reference – The selected entity on which the draft angle lies. You can
either click this collector and select a new edge reference, or you can drag
the “dot” in the graphics window onto a new reference. Any edge of the
drafted surface can be used for the Reference.
• Location – The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example,
if you want the draft angle to reside at the midpoint of the reference you
would specify a Location value of 0.5, as shown in the figures. You can
either type a different location value in the Angles tab, or you can drag the
“dot” in the graphics window to a new location.
You can right-click an angle in the Angles tab to perform the following
operations:
• Add Angle – Enables you to add additional draft angles. You can also
right-click a draft angle “dot” to add additional angles.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 5

• Delete Angle – Enables you to delete the draft angle you right-clicked. You
can also right-click a draft angle “dot” to delete that particular draft angle.
• Flip Angle – Flips the direction of the draft at the selected angle location.
You can also right-click the drag handle to flip the angle. In Figure 3, the 8
degree draft angle was flipped relative to the other angles.
• Make Constant – Deletes all draft angles except the first one.

The Reverse Pull Direction option in the dashboard flips the

pull direction for all draft angles. To flip the draft direction for a
specific draft angle, right-click its drag handle and select Flip Angle.

The Adjust angles to keep tangency option forces the resultant draft surfaces

y
to be tangent. This option is only available for a single draft angle, as drafts
with multiple angles always keep surfaces tangent.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Multi-Angles DRAFT_MULTI-[Link]

Task 1: Create a draft with multiple draft angles on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Draft from the Draft

y
types drop-down menu.

nl
• Select the right face to draft.
3. Right-click and select Draft

O
Hinges.
• Select the top surface.

se
U
al

4. In the dashboard, select the

rn

Angles tab.
• Right-click the existing angle
te

and select Add Angle twice.

In
C
PT

5. In the graphics window, click the

r

angle dots and drag them to the

Fo

outside and the center of the

surface edge.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 7

 6. From the back, edit the angles
to 15, 10, and 8.

y
nl
O
7. In the dashboard, click Reverse

se
Pull Direction .
8. Notice that all three angles have
U
flipped.
al
rn
te
In

9. In the Angles tab of the

dashboard, right-click the 8
C

angle and select Flip Angle.

PT

10. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option
The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when
resulting draft geometry encounters an edge of the model.

• Default behavior:
– Overhanging geometry created.
• Extend Intersect Surfaces cases:
– Draft extended to meet adjacent
model surface.

y
– Model surface extends into the
draft surface.

nl
– Reverts to default behavior.

O
Figure 1 – Default Draft Behavior

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Extending Intersect

Surfaces
C
PT

Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option

The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when resulting
draft geometry encounters an edge of the model. By default, the system
r

automatically creates the draft geometry so that it overhangs the edge of the
Fo

model, as shown in Figure 1.

You can use the Extend intersect surfaces option to create different resultant
geometry. When this option is selected, Creo Parametric tries to extend the
draft to meet the adjacent surface of the model. If the draft cannot extend to
the adjacent model surface, the model surface extends into the draft surface,
as shown in Figure 2. If neither of these cases are possible, the system
reverts to creating a draft surface that overhangs the edge of the model as if
the option were not selected.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces
Draft Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Extend-Intersect [Link]

Task 1: Use the Extend intersect surfaces draft option in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select Draft from the Draft

nl
types drop-down menu.
• Select the right surface of the

O
small rectangle.
3. Right-click and select Draft

se
Hinges.
• Select the top surface of the
U
small rectangle.
4. Drag the draft angle outward to
al

30 degrees.
rn

5. Click Preview Feature .

te

6. Click Resume Feature .

In
C
PT

7. In the dashboard, select the

r

Options tab.
Fo

• Select the Extend intersect

surfaces check box.
8. Click Complete Feature .
9. Notice that the model surface
has extended into the draft
surface.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
You can use a sketch to define custom split lines.

• Sketch becomes linked.

• Sketch can be unlinked.
• A new sketch can be defined.
• Sketch need not lie on draft surface.

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 - Viewing Sketch Figure 2 - Draft Split at Sketch
al

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

rn

You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to
create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split
object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You
te

can also define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface,
In

Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to
the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for
the draft in Figure 2.
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Sketch DRAFT_SPLIT-[Link]

Task 1: Create a draft split at a sketch.

1. Select Draft from the Draft

types drop-down menu.

y
• Select the large, front surface
containing the sketch.

nl
2. Right-click and select Draft

O
Hinges.
• Select the top surface of the

se
left rectangular “step.”
3. Drag the angle so the upper draft
U
portion goes into the model.
al

4. In the dashboard, select the

Split tab.
rn

• Select Split by split object as

the Split option.
te

• Select sketch SPLIT_

SKETCH.
In

• Select Draft second side

only as the Side option.
C

5. Drag the angle so the draft goes

PT

into the model.

6. Click Preview Feature .
r

7. Click Resume Feature .

Fo

8. In the dashboard, select the

Split tab.
• Select Draft first side only as
the Side option.
9. Click Preview Feature .

Module 5 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 10. Click Resume Feature .
11. In the dashboard, select the
Split tab.
• Select Draft sides
independently as the Side
option.
• Edit both draft angles to 7 so
the draft goes into the model.
12. Click Complete Feature .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 13

Creating Drafts Split at Curve
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve.

• Material at the curve remains constant.

y
nl
Figure 2 – Draft Split at
Figure 1 – The Datum Curve Datum Curve

O
Creating Drafts Split at Curve
se
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. This causes the
U
material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was
used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create
the resulting geometry in Figure 2.
al

If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate
rn

pull direction reference.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Curve DRAFT_SPLIT-[Link]

Task 1: Create a draft split at a curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft

y
types drop-down list.

nl
• Select the front surface.
3. Right-click and select Draft

O
Hinges.
• Select the curve.

4. Right-click and select Pull

se
U
Direction.
• Select datum plane TOP from
al

the model tree.

rn
te
In
C

5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

PT

6. In the dashboard, click Reverse

Angle .
7. Click Preview Feature .
r
Fo

8. Click Resume Feature .

9. In the dashboard, select the
Split tab.
• Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
• Select Draft sides
dependently as the Side
option.
10. Click Reverse Angle .

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 15

 11. Click Complete Feature .
12. Notice that this draft has removed
material from the top and bottom
of the model.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Drafts Split at Surface
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing
material at the surface to be added.

• Additional draft hinges can be

created.
– You must first split the draft
surfaces.
– Material remains the same size
at both draft hinge locations.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Draft Split at Surface

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Splitting the Draft Figure 3 – Selecting Multiple

PT

at Surface Draft Hinges

Creating Drafts Split at Surface

r
Fo

You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at
the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you
to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split
the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge
locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once
this split object was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added,
as shown in Figure 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Split-Surface DRAFT_SPLIT-[Link]

Task 1: Create a draft split at a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft

y
types drop-down list.

nl
• Select the front surface.

O
3. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
• Select an edge on the front of se
U
the top surface.
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
al

adjacent edge, right-click to

query, and select the upper
rn

Tangent chain.
te

4. Right-click and select Pull

Direction.
In

• Select datum plane TOP from

the model tree.
C

5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

r PT
Fo

6. In the dashboard, select the

Split tab.
• Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
• Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.
8. Click Reverse Angle for the
lower draft angle.

Module 5 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the dashboard, select the
References tab.
10. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
• Press CTRL and select an
edge on the front of the bottom
surface.
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the bottom
Tangent Chain.

y
• The Draft hinges collector

nl
should contain two Tangent
Chains.

O
11. Click Complete Feature .
12. In the model tree, right-click
QUILT and select Hide. se
U
13. Note that this draft has added
material to the center of the
al

model.
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 19

Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction
The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool sweeps a ruled surface
normal to a specified draft hinge.

• Differences from the

conventional Draft tool:
– Create draft sets.
– Specify a draft angle
greater than 30°.
– The Pull Direction

y
Reference Surface does
not have to be planar.

nl
• You can specify a splitting

O
surface.

Figure 1 – Creating Draft Sets

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Defining a Splitting Surface

C

Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction

PT

You can create draft on models that contains variable pull directions. The
Variable Pull Direction Draft tool is located in the Draft drop-down menu in
the Engineering group of the ribbon. It sweeps a ruled surface normal to
r

a specified draft hinge. You do not specify surfaces to be drafted with the
Fo

Variable Pull Direction Draft tool.

The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool also differs from the conventional Draft
tool in the following ways:
• You can create draft sets within the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool, similar
to the Round and Chamfer tools. In Figure 1, the left and right surfaces are
drafted in one set, and the rear surface is drafted in a second set.
• You can specify a draft angle greater than 30 degrees.
• The Pull Direction Reference Surface specified does not have to be planar.
You can specify a splitting surface with the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool.
The splitting surface causes the draft to split at the selected surface reference.
This enables you to specify a different draft angle on each side of the splitting
surface reference. In Figure 2, the draft angle above the splitting surface is
30 degrees, and the draft angle below the splitting surface is 10 degrees.

Module 5 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Variable Pull
Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Var-Pull DRAFT_VAR-[Link]

Task 1: Create a variable pull direction draft feature with two sets.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Orient to the SETS view
orientation.

nl
3. Select Variable Pull Direction

O
Draft from the Draft
drop-down menu.

se
4. Select the top U-shaped surface
as the Pull Direction Reference
U
Surface.

5. Select the References tab from

al

the dashboard.
rn

• Click in the Draft Hinges

collector.
te

• Press CTRL and select the

two upper side edges.
In

• Edit the draft angle to 14.

C
PT

6. In the References tab, click *New

r

set.
Fo

7. Select the upper rear edge.

8. In the graphics window,
right-click and select Make
variable.
9. Edit the left draft angle to 20, and
the right draft angle to 30.
10. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 21

Task 2: Create a variable pull direction draft feature with a splitting surface.

1. Orient to the SPLIT view

orientation.
2. In the model tree, right-click
SPLIT and select Unhide.
3. De-select the feature.
4. Select Variable Pull Direction
Draft from the Draft
drop-down menu.

y
5. Select the top U-shaped surface

nl
as the Pull Direction Reference
Surface.

O
6. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
7. Select the front, upper edge.
se
U
8. In the dashboard, select the
References tab.
al

• Select the Splitting Surfaces

check box.
rn

9. Select surface SPLIT.

te

10. Notice the draft splits at the

surface location.
In
C

11. Edit the upper draft angle to 21.

PT

12. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.

13. Click Complete Feature .
r
Fo

14. In the model tree, right-click

SPLIT and select Hide.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Trajectory Ribs
Quickly create a network of ribs with draft and rounds.
• Trajectory Rib Sketch:
– Self-extends to the model.
– Can self-intersect.
– Can pass through features.
– Can have multiple open loops.
• Trajectory Rib Feature:
– Can add draft.

y
– Can add rounds. Figure 1 – Original Model

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Trajectory Rib Sketch Figure 3 – Trajectory Rib Created

Creating Trajectory Ribs

te

Like the traditional Profile Rib, Trajectory Ribs are typically used to strengthen
In

parts; however, with a Trajectory Rib, you sketch the rib centerline from a top
view, instead of sketching the rib from a side view. You can select an existing
C

sketch or sketch internal to the Trajectory Rib.

PT

The system can add material above or below the sketch, but with a Trajectory
Rib the thickness is always applied symmetrically about the sketch. You can
also add draft or rounds as part of the Trajectory Rib feature.
r

The sketch used for a Trajectory Rib has special abilities:

Fo

• The rib self-extends to find solid material. Therefore, you do not have to
extend the sketch and align it to the part. If sketched beyond the model,
the rib automatically trims itself to the model boundaries.
– In the case of a model with complex wall geometry, it is best to permit
the system to self-extend the rib to the model.
• The rib sketch can intersect itself. This enables quick and easy sketching
to achieve the desired rib.
• The rib sketch can pass through existing features, such as screw boss
geometry. The system simply ignores the existing solid geometry, and
continues the rib in the next free space.
• The rib sketch can have multiple open loops, unlike sketches for most
other solid features. This enables you to sketch multiple unconnected ribs
in the same feature.
The Trajectory Rib has several options:

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 23

• You can add Draft. Draft is added such that the exposed end of the rib
maintains its width, and you can specify the angle that tapers outward
and towards the base of the model.
• You can add rounds on the exposed edges of the rib. With this option you
can round the top of the rib using a two-tangent round. The size of the
two-tangent round is controlled by the width of the rib, similar to creating
a full round. You can also create the rounds by specifying radius values
manually.
• You can add rounds on the internal edges of the rib. With this option you
can round the bottom of the rib using a radius value that is equal to the top
(exposed edges), or by specifying radius values manually.
Once a Trajectory Rib is created, there are some additional options:

y
• You can right-click the rib and select Externalize Rounds. This separates

nl
the rounds from the rib feature, and creates a round feature in the model
tree. The rounds can then be further customized.

O
• If you did not add rounds within the rib feature, the internal and exposed
edges of the rib are made available for quick selection by querying to an

se
intent edge set. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Trajectory Ribs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Rib\Trajectory_Rib TRAJECTORY_RIB.PRT

Task 1: Create rib features on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Trajectory Rib from

y
the Rib types drop-down list.

nl
3. Right-click and select Define
Internal Sketch.

O
4. Select datum plane RIB from the
model tree.
5. Click Sketch.
se
U
6. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types: .
al

7. Click Sketch View from the

rn

Setup group in the ribbon.

te

8. In the In Graphics toolbar, click

No Hidden from the Display
In

Style type drop-down menu.

9. Right-click and select
C

References.
PT

10. Select the outer circular edge on

the boss feature on the right and
click Close.
11. Right-click and select Line
r
Fo

Chain, and sketch two lines.

12. Click OK .
13. Drag the width handle to 3.
14. Click Complete Feature .
15. Click Shading .
16. Press CTRL+D.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 25

 17. With the rib still selected,
right-click and select Edit
Definition.
18. Click Add Draft from the
dashboard.
19. Select the Shape tab and edit
the angle to 2.

20. Click Add Exposed Rounds .

y
21. In the Shape tab, click Specified

nl
Value.
22. Type 1 for the radius.

O
23. Select the Placement tab and
click Edit. se
U
24. Click No Hidden .
al

25. Click Sketch View from the

rn

Setup group in the ribbon.

26. Right-click and select Line, and
te

then sketch an additional line.

27. Click OK .
In

28. Click Shading .

C

29. Press CTRL+D.

PT

30. Click Add Internal Rounds .

31. Select the Shape tab, and click
r

Same as top.
Fo

32. Click Complete Feature .

33. Notice that a single rib feature is
created in the model tree.

Module 5 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 34. With the rib still selected,
right-click and select Externalize
Rounds, then click OK.
35. Notice that a separate round
feature is created in the model
tree.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 27

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Module 6

y
Advanced Shells

nl
O
Module Overview

se
With the shell feature, you can hollow out the inside of a solid, leaving a shell
of a specified wall thickness. You can also select surfaces to be assigned a
different thickness as well as specify surfaces to be removed. You can even
U
create partial shells to exclude surfaces from being shelled.
al

In this module, you learn how to create the shell feature and utilize several
shell options, such as excluding surfaces, removing surfacing, and creating
rn

shells of multiple thicknesses.

te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Analyze shell references and thickness options.
C

• Exclude surfaces from Shell features.

• Extend shell surfaces.
PT

• Understand shell corner options.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 1

Analyzing Shell References and Thickness
Options
You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to
remove, specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip
which side of the model adds the shell thickness.

• Removed surfaces
• Non-default thickness
• Change thickness direction

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Shell Feature, No
Surfaces Removed

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Shell Feature with Figure 3 – Shell Feature Containing

One Thickness Non-Default Thicknesses
In

Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options

C

You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to remove,

specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip which side of the model
PT

adds the shell thickness.

Removing Surfaces
r
Fo

The References tab in the dashboard contains the Removed surfaces

collector. If you do not select any surfaces for removal, a “closed” shell is
created, with the whole inside of the part hollowed out, as shown in the
upper-right figure. You can select surfaces to be removed as part of the shell
operation. In the lower figures, the top surface has been removed from the
Shell feature. You can view the shell by creating a cut or cross-section.

Specifying Non-Default Thickness Surfaces

The References tab in the dashboard also contains the Non-default thickness
collector. You can select surfaces to which a different thickness dimension
is applied than the rest of the Shell feature. For each surface included in
this collector, you can specify a different individual thickness value. In the
lower-right figure, two surfaces have been assigned different non-default
thicknesses of 20mm and 30mm, while the remainder of the model is shelled
at a thickness of 10mm.

Module 6 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Inverting Shell Thickness
In the dashboard, you can flip the shell thickness by clicking Change
Thickness Direction . This causes the shell thickness to be added to the
outside of the original model, creating a void in the shape of the original
model.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell References and
Thickness Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Shell\References_Thickness REF_THICK.PRT

Task 1: Specify surfaces to remove and surfaces to make non-default

thickness.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the model tree, click Settings

nl
> Tree Filters.

O
3. Enable Suppressed Objects in
the Model Tree Items dialog box,

se
and click OK.
4. In the model tree, right-click CUT
U
and select Resume.
5. Notice that the model is shelled,
al

but that surface references have

not been removed.
rn

6. Right-click CUT and select

Suppress.
te

• Click OK.
In

7. Edit the definition of Shell 1.

C

8. Select the top surface to remove

it.
r PT
Fo

9. Right-click and select Non

Default Thickness.
10. Select the right, flat surface.
11. Drag the non-default thickness
to 20.

Module 6 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 12. In the dashboard, select the
References tab.
13. Notice that there is one reference
specified to be removed, and
one reference specified as
non-default thickness.

14. Press CTRL and select the left,

flat surface to also be non-default
thickness.

y
• In the dashboard, edit the

nl
thickness to 30.

O
15. In the dashboard, click Change
Thickness Direction
16. Click Preview Feature
.
. se
U
al
rn

17. Click Resume Feature .

te

18. Click Change Thickness

Direction .
In

19. Click Complete Feature .

C

20. Right-click Shell 1 and select

PT

Edit.
21. Spin the model and notice the
dimensions.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 5

Excluding Surfaces from Shells
You can specify surfaces to be excluded so that only certain
parts of a model are shelled.

• Select one or more surfaces.

• Surface Sets dialog box enables
further selection and exclusion.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – No Surfaces Excluded
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Selecting Surfaces Figure 3 – Surfaces Excluded

to Be Excluded from Shell
r
Fo

Excluding Surfaces from Shells

Sometimes, you do not want all surfaces of a part model to be shelled. For
example, you may not want the grips in Figure 1 to be shelled. You can
exclude surfaces from the Shell feature. Excluding surfaces enables you to
select one or more surfaces and exclude them from the Shell feature. In
Figure 2, surfaces are selected to be excluded from the shell. In Figure 3, the
shell has been completed, and the grips are not shelled.
When specifying surfaces for exclusion, you can open the Surface Sets
dialog box. The Surface Sets dialog box enables you to further add Individual
Surfaces, Seed and Boundary Surfaces, and Excluded Surfaces.

Module 6 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Excluding Surfaces from Shells

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Shell\Excluding_Surfs EXCLUDE_SURFS.PRT

Task 1: Exclude surfaces from the shell feature of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select Shell 1.
3. Notice that the grips on the cap

y
are shelled.

nl
O
se
U
al

4. Edit the definition of Shell 1.

5. Orient to the standard orientation.
rn

6. Right-click and select Exclude

Surfaces.
te

7. Press CTRL and select all five

In

surfaces from the patterned grip

near the shell dimension.
C

8. Click Preview Feature .

PT

9. Click Named Views and

select 3D.
r

10. Notice that the grip is no longer

Fo

shelled, as it has been excluded.

11. Click Resume Feature and

orient to the standard orientation.
12. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Right-click Individual
Surfaces and select Remove.
13. Select a surface on the grip
again.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 7

 14. Press SHIFT and select the
surface of the upper main round
on the cap.
15. Notice that you have initiated a
Seed and Boundary Surfaces
set.

y
16. In the Options tab, click Details.

nl
17. In the Surface Sets dialog box,
select Seed and Boundary

O
Surfaces.
• Press CTRL and select the

se
other half of the round.
• Press CTRL and query-select
the bottom, flat surface of the
U
model.
al

18. In the Surface Sets dialog box,

select Excluded Surfaces.
rn

• Press CTRL and select the

te

two outer halves of the cap.

• Click OK.
In
C
PT

19. Click Complete Feature .

r

20. Click Named Views and

Fo

select 3D.
21. Notice that all grips are now
excluded from the Shell feature.

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Extending Shell Surfaces
In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when
partially shelling a feature.

Surface extension options include:

• Extend inner surfaces
– Default option
• Extend excluded surfaces

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Shell Feature Result

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Excluded Surfaces

In

Figure 2 – Inner Surfaces Extended Extended

Extending Shell Surfaces

C
PT

In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when partially
shelling a feature. The result depends on the surfaces that will be used to
close the solid. In Figure 1, the model has been shelled. In Figure 2 and
Figure 3, the cylinder feature surfaces have been excluded from the Shell
r

feature. The two results are:

Fo

• Extend inner surfaces – Forms a cover over the inner surfaces of the
shell feature. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 2. The
inner surfaces of the shell were extended in front of the excluded cylinder
surfaces.
• Extend excluded surfaces – Forms a cover over the excluded surfaces
of the shell feature. In Figure 3, the excluded cylinder surfaces were
extended into the shell.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Extending Shell Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Shell\Extend_Options EXTEND_SURFACES.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the options available for extending surfaces of a

Shell feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select Shell 1.

y
3. Notice that the Shell feature

nl
hollows out the cylinder portion
of the model.

O
4. Right-click and select Exclude se
U
Surfaces.
al

5. Press CTRL and select the front,

back, and cylindrical surfaces of
rn

the cylinder.
te
In

6. Click Preview Feature .

C

7. Notice that the cylinder is

excluded from the Shell feature.
r PT
Fo

8. Click Resume Feature .

9. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select the Extend excluded
surfaces option.
10. Click Complete Feature .
11. Notice that the cylinder extends
into the Shell feature.

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Shell Corner Options
There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature
with an excluded surface breaks through the solid.
• Prevent shell from penetrating
solid at:
– Concave corners.
– Convex corners.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Basic Shell Feature

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Shell Prevented from

C

Penetrating Solid at Concave Figure 3 – Shell Prevented from

PT

Corners Penetrating Solid at Convex Corners

Analyzing Shell Corner Options

r

There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature with an
Fo

excluded surface breaks through the solid.

• Concave corners – Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at
concave corners.
• Convex corners – Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at
convex corners.
Figure 1 depicts a shelled block that contains a convex chamfer (at the
top) and a concave chamfer (at the bottom). In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the
chamfer surfaces have been excluded from the shell. In Figure 2, the shell is
prevented from penetrating the solid at concave corners. Consequently, the
concave chamfer no longer penetrates the solid, while the convex chamfer
still does penetrate the solid.
Conversely, in Figure 3, the shell is prevented from penetrating the solid at
convex corners. Consequently, the convex chamfer no longer penetrates the
solid, while the concave chamfer still does penetrate the solid.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell Corner Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Shell\Corner_Options CONCAVE_CONVEX.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the shell corner options of a part model.

1. Edit the definition of Shell 1.

2. Right-click and select Exclude
Surfaces.

y
3. Select the surface of the convex

nl
chamfer.

O
4. Select the Options tab.
se
U
5. Verify that the Concave corners
option is selected.
al

6. Click Preview Feature .

rn

7. Notice that the Shell feature is

cutting through.
te
In

8. Click Resume Feature .

C

9. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
PT

• Select the Convex corners

option.
10. Click Complete Feature .
r
Fo

Module 6 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 11. Press CTRL and select Chamfer
1 and Shell 1.
12. Right-click and select Suppress.
• Click OK.
13. De-select all geometry.
14. In the model tree, click Settings
> Tree Filters.
15. Enable Suppressed Objects in
the Model Tree Items dialog box,

y
and click OK.

nl
16. Press CTRL and select Chamfer
2 and Shell 2.

O
17. Right-click and select Resume.

se
18. Edit the definition of Shell 2.
19. Right-click and select Exclude
U
Surfaces.
20. Select the surface of the concave
al

chamfer.
rn
te
In

21. Select the Options tab.

22. Verify that the Convex corners
option is selected.
C

23. Click Preview Feature .

PT

24. Notice that the Shell feature is

cutting through.
r
Fo

25. Click Resume Feature .

26. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select the Concave corners
option.
27. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 13

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 6 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Module 7

y
Advanced Rounds and Chamfers

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Creo Parametric enables you to create finishing features, such as rounds
and chamfers. These features can be placed directly on design models by
selecting suitable references. You can create complex geometry by defining
U
transitions between various round and chamfer sets. You can use advanced
options to address placement ambiguity in rounds and chamfers, as well as
al

trim round and chamfer geometry.

rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create rounds through curve.
In

• Create rounds and chamfers by reference.

• Create variable radius rounds and analyze round profiles.
C

• Analyze round and chamfer creation methods.

PT

• Analyze round and chamfer references and pieces.

• Create rounds and chamfers using intent edges.
• Use round and chamfer transitions.
r
Fo

• Create autorounds.
• Create corner chamfers and other chamfer types.
• Analyze advanced chamfer dimensioning schemes.
• Create curvature continuous rounds.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 1

Analyzing Round Profile
You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a
circular arc.
• Additional profiles:
– Conic
– D1 x D2 Conic
– C2 Continuous
– D1 x D2 C2
• RHO parameter

y
– 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical

nl
– 0.5 = Parabolic

O
– > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
– √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse Figure 1 – Circular Rounds

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Curvature Continuous

Figure 2 – Conic Rounds Rounds
C

Creating Conic Rounds

PT

You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a circular arc, an
example of which is shown in Figure 1. You can define a round that uses a
conic round profile. There are two options available for conic rounds:
r

• Conic – Defines a round profile to be conic using a single distance value. A

Fo

conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled.

• D1 x D2 Conic – Defines a round profile to be conic using two distance
values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled.
Both conic round profiles maintain tangency like that of the circular arc round,
but can be used to create sharper or shallower rounds using the RHO
parameter. In Figure 2, the rounds are conic rounds.
Creating Curvature Continuous Rounds
You can also define a round that uses a curvature continuous spline as a
round profile. This option is particularly useful on models where maintaining
a curvature continuity is important across rounded surfaces. The system
calculates the round, then applies the spline profile. You use the curvature
continuous round profile with single or variable radius rounds.
There are two options for curvature continuous rounds:

Module 7 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • C2 Continuous – Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2)
using a single distance (radius) value. A conic shape factor (RHO value)
can also be controlled.
• D1xD2 C2 – Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2)
using two distance (radius) values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can
also be controlled.
In Figure 3, the rounds are curvature continuous rounds.

Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic or curvature
continuous round to create elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic rounds. Higher
RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values

y
create a more flat conic shape.

nl
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:

O
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical

se
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
U
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Profile

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Profile ROUND_PROFILE.PRT

Task 1: Create a Conic round.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Press CTRL and select Round
1 and Round 2.

y
3. Orient to the FRONT view to

nl
observe their profiles.

O
4. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.

se
5. Click Previous from the
Orientation group.
U
6. Edit the definition of Round 1.
al

7. In the dashboard, select the Sets

tab.
rn

• Edit the drop-down list from

Circular to Conic.
te

8. Drag the square conic parameter

handle left and right and observe
In

the round shape changing.

9. Edit the Conic parameter value
C

to 0.70 in the dashboard.

PT

10. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

Module 7 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Create a D1 x D2 Conic round.

1. Edit the definition of Round 2.

2. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the drop-down list from
Circular to D1 x D2 Conic.
• Edit the D1 and D2 values to 5
and 10, respectively.
• Edit the Conic parameter value

y
to 0.35.

nl
3. Click Complete Feature .

O
4. Press CTRL and select Round
1 and Round 2.
5. Orient to the FRONT view to
observe their profiles.
se
U
al
rn

Task 3: Create a C2 Continuous and D1 x D2 C2 round.

te

1. Click Previous .
In

2. Edit the definition of Round 3.

3. In the dashboard, select the Sets
C

tab.
PT

• Edit the drop-down list from

Circular to C2 Continuous.
4. Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.70 in the dashboard.
r
Fo

5. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 5

 6. Edit the definition of Round 4.
7. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the drop-down list from
Circular to D1 x D2 C2.
• Edit the D1 and D2 values to 7
and 5, respectively.
• Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.35.
8. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Round Creation Methods
You can create a round using either the rolling ball method or
normal to spine method.

• Rolling ball
– Standard round algorithm.
– Path left from “rolling” a ball
forms the round.
• Normal to spine

y
– Arc cross-section swept normal
to a spine curve.

nl
– Good for quick round direction

O
changes.

se Figure 1 – Completed Normal

to Spine Round
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Converting Failing Round from Rolling Ball to Normal to Spine

r

Analyzing Round Creation Methods

Fo

You can create a round using either the Rolling ball method or Normal to
spine method. A round created using Normal to spine is shown in Figure 1.
Rolling ball is the default round creation method used by Creo Parametric. It
uses a standard round algorithm, where the system creates round set pieces
by “rolling” a theoretical spherical ball along the geometry, following any
tangencies. The path left by the ball forms the round.
If the Rolling ball method is not successful, like in the left image of Figure 2,
then you can try the Normal to spine method. The Normal to spine method
works well for situations where the round changes direction quickly. For a
Normal to spine round, the system sweeps an arc cross-section normal to
a spine curve, where the spine curve is the edge you select to be rounded.
You can also use the Conic and D1 x D2 Conic profiles with the Normal to
spine method.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Creation Methods

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Method ROUND_METHOD.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the round creation methods in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Round from the

Round types drop-down list.

y
nl
3. Select the edge between
cylinders.

O
4. Edit the radius to 4.
5. Click Preview Feature .

se
U
6. Click Resume Feature .
al

7. Edit the radius to 5.

8. Click Preview Feature .
rn

9. Notice that the round fails.

te

10. Click Cancel in the

Troubleshooter dialog box.
In

• Click Yes.
C

11. Click Resume Feature .

PT

12. In the dashboard, select the Sets

tab.
• Edit the drop-down list from
r
Fo

Rolling ball to Normal to

spine.
13. Click Preview Feature .

Module 7 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 14. Click Resume Feature .
15. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select FRONT from the Named
Views list.
16. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the drop-down list from
Circular to Conic.
• Accept the default Rho value.

y
17. Click Complete Feature .

nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 9

Creating Rounds Through Curve
You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves.

• Select a curve or edge.

• The round radius follows the
selected reference.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Rounds Created using

se Edges as Curves
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Rounds Created using Curves

C
PT

Creating Rounds Through Curve

You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves. The round
radius follows the selected reference, with respect to the edges being
r

rounded. The rounds can also add or remove material. In Figure 1, two
Fo

different rounds were created, one on each peg. The round on the left peg
adds material, while the round on the right removes material. In Figure 2,
the edge is selected for rounding in the left image. In the middle image,
the curve is specified for the round to be created through. The right image
displays the final round.

Module 7 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds Through Curve

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Thru_Curve THRU_CURVE.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds through curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Round from the

y
Round types drop-down list.

nl
3. Select the edge of the larger

O
cylinder on the right.
4. In the dashboard, select the Sets

se
tab.
• Click Through curve and
U
select the bottom edge of the
smaller cylinder.
al

5. Click Complete Feature .

rn

6. Notice the round is removing

material.
te
In
C
PT

7. Click Round .
8. Select the bottom edge of the
r

small cylinder on the left.

Fo

9. In the dashboard, select the Sets

tab.
• Click Through curve and
select the top edge of the
larger cylinder.
• Press SHIFT and select the
other larger cylinder edge.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 11

 10. Click Complete Feature .
11. Notice that the round is adding
material.

12. Orient to the Standard

y
Orientation.

nl
13. Click Round .

O
14. Select the top, right edge.
15. Right-click and select Through

se
curve.
• Select the spline.
U
al

16. Click Complete Feature .

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

17. Click Round .

18. Select the concave edge.
19. Right-click and select Through
curve.
• Select the spline.

Module 7 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 20. Right-click and select Add set.
21. Select the top, right edge.
22. Right-click and select Through
curve.
• Select the spline.

y
nl
23. Click Complete Feature .

O
se
U
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 13

Creating Variable Radius Rounds
You can create a round with multiple radius values.

• Each radius has:

– Location
♦ Ratio
♦ Reference
– Radius
♦ Value
♦ Reference

y
nl
• Radius operations
– Add/Delete radius

O
– Make constant/variable Figure 1 – Variable Radius Round

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Location
In

Differences Figure 3 – Radius Value Differences

C

Creating Variable Radius Rounds

PT

By default, when you create a round, Creo Parametric creates a constant

round, where a single radius is applied. However, you can also create a
variable round. A variable round is one that has multiple radius values as
r

shown in Figure 1.
Fo

You can convert a constant radius to a variable radius and vice versa. To
convert a constant radius to a variable radius, you right-click in the graphics
window or Radius table in the Sets tab and select Make variable. Conversely,
you convert a variable radius to a constant radius by right-clicking in the
graphics window or Radius table in the Sets tab and selecting Make constant.
Each variable round must have the following two items defined:
• Location – Defines where the variable round occurs in the part model. You
can define each variable round location in either of the following ways:
– Ratio – The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example,
if you want the variable round to reside at the midpoint of the Reference
edge, specify a Ratio value of 0.5. You can either type a Ratio value in
the Sets tab, or you can drag the location handle in the graphics window
to a new location. In Figure 2, the left radius has a ratio of 0.85 defined.
That is, it is 0.85, or 85% of the way along the highlighted reference.

Module 7 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 – Reference – Enables you to select a specific reference location for the
variable round to occur. In Figure 2, the right radius location is defined
at a datum point.
• Radius – Defines the round radius value at the defined location. You can
define each round radius value in either of the following ways:
– Value – Enables you to type the desired round value as a numerical
value. The round radius value displays in the Radius table. In Figure 3,
the upper radius has a value of 18, while the lower radius value is 8.
– Reference – Enables you to specify the radius by using a reference.
You can right-click a radius in the Radius table of the Sets tab to perform the
following operations:

y
• Add radius – Enables you to add additional radii. You can also right-click a

nl
radius handle to add additional radii.
• Delete – Enables you to delete the radius you right-clicked. You can also

O
right-click a radius handle in the graphics window to delete that particular
radius.

se
• Make constant – Deletes all radii except the first one.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Variable Radius Rounds

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Rounds\Variable VARIABLE_RAD.PRT

Task 1: Edit an existing round to make it variable.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Edit the definition of Round 1.

y
nl
3. Right-click and select Make
variable.

O
4. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab. se
U
• Notice that there are two radii.
al

5. In the graphics window, drag the

round location handles to the far
rn

left and right of the highlighted

edge.
te

6. In the Sets tab, notice that

the Location values for the left
In

and right radii are 1 and 0,

respectively.
C

7. In the Sets tab, edit the Radius at

PT

the 1 Location (radius #2) to 18.

• Edit the Location Ratio Value
from 1 to 0.9.
r

• Edit the distance Value from

Fo

Ratio to Reference.
• Select the left vertex of the
highlighted reference.

8. Edit the radius at the 0 location

from 10 to 8.
9. Edit the Location Ratio Value
from 0 to 0.20.

Module 7 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 10. In the Sets tab, right-click in the
table and select Add radius.
• Edit the distance Value from
Ratio to Reference.
• Select datum point on the right
side of the model.
• Edit the radius value to 12.

11. In the graphics window,

right-click the last radius'
handle and select Add radius.

y
• Drag the new point around to

nl
the back of the large edge.

O
12. In the Sets tab, edit the Location se
U
Ratio Value to 0.5.
• Edit the Radius value from 12
al

to 8.
rn
te
In
C

13. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 17

Auto Round
The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series
of rounds quickly and easily.

Auto Round Tool

• Create complex rounds quickly
and easily.
• Created as a series of rounds in
an auto round feature.
• Can convert to a group of standard

y
round features.

nl
Robust Rounding

O
• Intelligent order of round creation.
• Updates to features previously Figure 1 – Model With Rounds

se
inserted. U Applied
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – An Auto Round Feature Figure 3 – Auto Round Player

Auto Round
r

The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series of rounds
Fo

quickly and easily. Rounds that would take an experienced modeler 30

minutes or more (due to experimenting with round order and transitions) can
be created in seconds with the Auto Round tool as shown in Figure 1.

To create an Auto Round, select Auto Round from the Round types
drop-down list in the ribbon. Several individual rounds are created as round
sub-features within an auto round feature, as shown in Figure 2.
The following describes the technical aspects of the Auto Round tool, which
lead to robust rounding of a model:
• The Auto Round tool creates rounds in an intelligent order as necessary to
set up tangency for subsequent rounds.
– The tool does not simply select edges and then round the selected
edges.
• Round transitions are created as necessary by the Auto Round tool.

Module 7 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 • The Auto Round Player dialog box, shown in Figure 3, appears during
round calculation. You can stop regeneration and rewind or play back the
different round features being created by the Auto Round tool, if desired.
• You can insert features before the auto round in the model tree, and the
auto round will then round those features.
• The Auto Round tool is designed to avoid feature failures. Sometimes
model geometry changes, and some of the rounds cannot be created. In
this case, the rounds are excluded and the Round tool only rounds what
is possible.
The following are options within the Auto Round tool:
• You can round concave edges, convex edges, or both.

y
– You can assign different round radii to concave and convex edges.

nl
• You can round all solid edges, or select a series of edges to exclude from
rounding. You can also round only a selection of edges.

O
• Instead of an auto round feature with round sub-features, you can create a
group of standard round features.

se
– You can also right-click an existing auto round feature and convert it
to a group.
U
– A group of round features can be ungrouped, resulting in a series of
standard round features that can be edited or deleted individually.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Auto Round

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Auto_round AUTO_ROUND.PRT

Task 1: Utilize an auto round to create rounds on a complex model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
click Auto Round from the

y
Round types drop-down menu.

nl
• Edit the convex radius value to
1.0, if necessary.

O
• Select Same for the Concave
radius value, if necessary.
• Select the Scope tab and
observe the options. se
U
• Click Complete Feature .
al

• The auto round will take a few

moments to generate.
rn

3. Select the auto round from the

te

model tree, right-click, and select

Edit Definition.
In

• Select the Exclude tab.

• Press CTRL and select four
C

edges to exclude.
PT

4. Click Complete Feature .

r

• The auto round will take a few

Fo

moments to generate.

Module 7 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 5. Drag the Insert Indicator
directly before the auto round
feature.
• Select Sketch 1, then
right-click and select Unhide.
• With the sketch still selected,
click Extrude from the
Shapes group.
• Edit the depth to 15.
• Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
6. Right-click the Insert Indicator

O
and click Cancel.
• Click Yes.

se
• Notice that the auto round has
encompassed the inserted
feature.
U
al
rn

7. Select Auto Round1 from the

model tree.
te

• Right-click and select Convert

to Group.
In

• Click OK.
• Expand the local group (Group
C

LOCAL_GROUP).
PT

• Right-click the local group and

select Ungroup.
• Notice that the auto round has
been converted to a series of
r
Fo

standard Round features.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 21

Creating Rounds by Reference
You can use a reference to define a round's size.

• Reference types:
– Point
– Vertex
– Edge
• Geometry updates for changes
made to reference location.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Selecting References

O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Completed Geometry Figure 3 – Updated Geometry

te

Creating Rounds by Reference

In

By default, when you create a round you must specify its radius. However,
you can use a reference that defines the radius instead, as shown in Figure
C

1. You can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system
updates the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference
PT

location. Figure 2 displays the resulting round geometry for the selected
references. In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion was decreased, and the
datum point position used by the upper round has been moved. Notice that
r

the resulting round geometry updated accordingly.

Fo

Module 7 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Reference

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\By_Ref RAD_BY_REF.PRT

Task 1: Redefine round radii from a value to a reference.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Edit the definition of Round 1.

y
nl
3. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.

O
• Notice that the Radius is 5.
• Edit the distance drop-down

se
list from Value to Reference.
• Select the bottom-right, front
U
vertex.
al

4. Click Complete Feature .

rn
te
In

5. Edit the definition of Round 2.

C

6. In the dashboard, select the Sets

PT

tab.
• Notice that the Radius is 4.
• Edit the distance drop-down
r
Fo

list from Value to Reference.

• Select datum point on the top
front edge of the model.

7. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 23

 8. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Edit.
• Edit the height from 12 to 8.
9. In the model tree, select datum
point PNT0, then right-click and
select Edit.
• Edit the point value from 0.7
to 0.4.

10. Click Regenerate .

y
11. Notice that the feature geometry

nl
updates.

O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Round References and Pieces
You can manipulate round geometry based on how references
are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
• References
– Manipulate which edges are
rounded.
♦ Surface loop from to
♦ One-by-one
• Pieces

y
– Select a piece to remove it. Figure 1 – Creating a Round with

nl
– Trim or extend geometry. Surface Loop From To

O
se
U
al

Figure 2 – Removing Round Piece and Trimming the Round

rn

Analyzing Round References Selection

By default, if you select an edge to be rounded, and that selected edge has
te

adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting round automatically propagates

around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges
In

are ultimately rounded by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from
to option or using the One-by-one selection option. These options enable
C

you prevent the round from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you
to select only the edges you want to receive the round. In Figure 1, the
PT

edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The resulting geometry
does not round the top three edges, even though they are tangent. When
Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started, you can even
r

select edges that are not tangent.

Fo

Analyzing Round Pieces

The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the round.
Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions:
• Select a piece of the round from the model to remove it.
• Trim the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward
so that less geometry is covered.
• Extend the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece outward
so that more geometry is covered.
If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop round, simply remove a round
piece from the round first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming
or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes
the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so
that they were not rounded, either.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 25

To access the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed,
you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or
removed a piece of the round, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited.
If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece
drop-down list back to Included.
If you need to terminate a round at a location other than at a round
piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round References and Pieces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Ref_Pieces REFS_PIECES.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds using different references and pieces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 2.
• Select the front, left arc edge.

y
• Press SHIFT, and query-select

nl
the bottom Surface loop from
to.

O
3. From the Engineering group,
se
U
select Round from the
Round types drop-down list.
al

4. Edit the radius to 1 and click

Complete Feature .
rn

5. Notice that the round did not

follow the tangent chain at the
te

top.
In
C

6. Click Round .
PT

7. Select an inner concave edge.

8. Notice that the entire tangent
chain will be rounded.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 27

 9. In the dashboard, select the
Pieces tab.
• Select Piece 1.
• Select the bottom rounded arc
to exclude it.
• Drag both handles up to
exclude the small rounded
corners.
10. Click Complete Feature .

y
11. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

nl
Standard Orientation.

O
12. Click Round .
13. Select the right front large arc.

se
Notice the tangent chain.
14. Press SHIFT and select the left
U
front large arc One-by-one.
15. Click Complete Feature .
al
rn

16. Click Round .

te

17. Select the rear-right concave

edge of the rectangular feature.
In

18. Press SHIFT, and query-select

the bottom Surface loop from to.
C
PT

19. Right-click and select Clear.

20. Select the rear-top concave edge
of the rectangular feature.
r

21. In the dashboard, select the

Fo

Pieces tab.
• Select Piece 1.
• Drag both handles down
across the non-tangent
corners.

Module 7 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 22. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 29

Using Intent Edges for Rounds
You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent
surfaces.

• Reference selection is quicker.

• Resulting rounds are more robust.
• References are tied to features,
not edge references.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Selecting Intent Edges

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Moving the Post Feature

PT

Using Intent Edges for Rounds

You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using
r

intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also
Fo

more robust, preventing rounds from failing when model changes are made,
since the references for the rounds are tied to the features in the design
model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the round is being
created by specifying the intent edges.
In Figure 2, the post feature is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap.
Though the resulting round geometry differs, the round is still successful.
Even when the post is updated from five sides to four, the round is still
successful.
The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming
from a block:
• The parallel outside edges of the extrude.
• The end edges of the extrude.
• The edges where the extrude meets the block.

Module 7 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important – only that an
extruded feature is present.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Using Intent Edges for Rounds

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Intent_Edges [Link]

Task 1: Use intent edges when creating rounds.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Round from the

y
Round types drop-down menu.

nl
3. Cursor over one of the vertical

O
side edges and right-click to
query-select the vertical side
intent edges.
• Edit the radius value to 10.
se
U
4. Right-click and select Add set.
• Cursor over one of the top
al

edges and right-click to

query-select the top intent
rn

edges.
• Edit the radius value to 5.
te

5. Click Complete Feature .

In

6. Click Round .
C

7. Cursor over one of the vertical

PT

side edges of the post and

right-click to query-select the
vertical side intent edges.
r

• Edit the radius value to 6.

Fo

8. Click Complete Feature .

9. Click Round .
10. Right-click to query and select
the intent intersection edges of
the post.
11. Click Complete Feature .

Module 7 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 12. Right-click POST and select
Edit.
13. Edit the 50 dimension to 100,
click Regenerate , and
select anywhere on the screen.
14. The intent edges are between
the post and base, so the round
feature ignores the bump but
does not fail.

y
15. Right-click POST and select

nl
Edit.
16. Edit the 100 dimension you

O
just changed to 150, click
Regenerate , and select
anywhere on the screen.
17. The round feature is still se
U
successful, even with only half
the post intersecting.
al

18. Right-click Extrude 3 and select

rn

Edit.
te

19. Edit the offset from 150 to 141

and the width from 38 to 18.
In

20. Click Regenerate and select

anywhere on the screen.
C

21. Edit the definition of POST.

PT

22. Right-click and select Edit

Internal Sketch.
r

23. Enable only the following

Fo

Sketcher Display types:

.
24. Zoom in on the sketch and
delete the five lines, keeping the
construction circle.
25. Sketch a rectangle with a width
of 40, ensuring that the corners
snap to the construction circle.
26. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 33

 27. Click Complete Feature .
28. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
29. The rounds are still successful.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Using Round Transitions
Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles
overlapping or discontinuous round pieces.
• Transition mode:
– Displays available transitions.
– Enables you to change
transition type for each round.
• Numerous transition types
available.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing Round

se
Transitions
U
Figure 2 – Intersect Transition Type
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Corner Sphere Transition Figure 4 – Round Only 1

Type Transition Type
r

Using Round Transitions

Fo

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or

discontinuous round pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that are
selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases,
you can use the default transitions. However, sometimes you need to modify
the existing transitions to achieve the preferred round geometry.

To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode from
the dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the
Round tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode in the
dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets.

Round Transition Types

When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available
round transitions, as shown Figure 1. When you select an available

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 35

transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition in
the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains a list of valid
transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the
geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently
selected transition. The following is a list of round transition types (note that
not all transition types listed are available for a given context):
• Default – Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best
fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default
appears in parentheses.
• Intersect – Extends two or more overlapping round pieces toward each
other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary. Intersect transitions only
apply to two or more overlapping round pieces.

y
• Corner Sphere – Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping

nl
round pieces with a spherical corner. By default, the sphere has the same
radius as the largest overlapping round piece. However, you can modify

O
the radius of the sphere as well as the transition distance along each
edge, enabling you to blend it into the smaller existing radii using fillet
surfaces. Corner Sphere transitions apply only to geometry where three
round pieces overlap at a corner.
se
• Corner Sweep – Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping
U
round pieces. Round geometry is created as a sweep that wraps around
the round piece with the largest radius. The resulting geometry looks as if
al

the round piece with the largest radius was created first, and the remaining
two pieces were created subsequently. Corner Sweep transitions only
rn

apply to three round pieces that overlap each other at a corner.

• Patch – Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four
te

round pieces overlap. You can add an additional side to a three-sided

Patch transition by selecting an optional surface on which to create a fillet
In

that contains a radius. This fillet becomes the fourth side of the resulting
patch and is tangent. Patch transitions apply only to geometry where three
C

or four round pieces overlap at a corner.

• Round Only – Creates a transition using compounded round geometry.
PT

Each round piece has a different radius value.

• Blend – Creates a fillet surface between the round pieces using an edge
reference. All tangent round geometry stops at sharp edges.
r
Fo

• Continue – Extends the round geometry into two round pieces. All tangent
round geometry does not stop at sharp edges, unlike the Blend transition.
The resulting geometry looks as if the round was placed first, and then
geometry was cut away. Neighboring surfaces are extended to meet round
geometry where applicable.
• Stop – Terminates the round using one of three different stop cases. Creo
Parametric configures the geometry for each of the stop cases based on
the geometrical context.
• Stop at Reference – Terminates round geometry at the datum point or
datum plane that you specify.
• Intersect at Surface – Helps to maintain a linear parting line. This option is
particularly useful on models that have a split draft that forms a parting line.
You can define the “driving” side for the round by selecting Side 1 or Side
2 for the transition. You can define the transition length for the round by
dragging the handle or specifying a value.

Module 7 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using Round Transitions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Transitions ROUND_TRANSITIONS.PRT

Task 1: Specify different round transitions in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Round from the

y
Round types drop-down list.

nl
3. Cursor over the top-right edge

O
and right-click to query-select
the end Intent edges.

se
4. Press CTRL, cursor over the
top-left edge, and right-click to
query-select the other end Intent
U
edges.
5. Edit the radius value to 1.
al
rn

6. Right-click and select Add set.

7. Cursor over one of the horizontal
te

side edges and right-click to

query-select the side intent
In

edges.
8. Edit the radius value to 3.
C
r PT
Fo

9. Click Preview Feature .

10. Click Resume Feature .
11. In the dashboard, click
Transition Mode .
12. Select the top, front-right corner
transition.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 37

 13. In the dashboard, edit the
transition type to Intersect.
14. Click Preview Feature .

15. Click Resume Feature .

16. In the dashboard, edit the

y
transition type to Corner

nl
Sphere.
• Edit L2 and L3 to 3.

O
17. Click Preview Feature .

se
U
al

18. Click Resume Feature .

rn

19. In the dashboard, edit the

transition type to Patch.
te

• Click in the Optional surface

collector and select the right
In

side surface.
20. Click Preview Feature .
C
PT

21. Click Resume Feature .

22. In the dashboard, edit the
transition type to Round Only 1.
r

23. Click Preview Feature .

Fo

24. Click Resume Feature .

25. Select the upper, front-middle
transition.
26. In the dashboard, notice
the transition type Default
(Continue).
27. Click Preview Feature .

Module 7 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 28. Click Resume Feature .
29. In the dashboard, edit the
transition type to Blend.
30. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 39

Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types
You can also create chamfers by selecting two surfaces or a
surface and an edge.

• Selecting a surface and

edge:
– You must select the
surface first.
• Selecting two surfaces:
– Chamfers can engulf

y
geometry.

nl
– Chamfers can span
gaps. Figure 1 – Chamfer Created by Selecting

O
Two Surfaces

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Chamfer Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types

C

You can create chamfers by selecting two surfaces. The system creates the
PT

chamfer between the two surfaces, and therefore has the ability to span gaps
or engulf existing geometry. In addition, chamfers created by selecting two
surfaces can also provide more robust chamfer geometry in cases where
r

chamfers created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.

Fo

You can also create chamfers by first selecting a surface and then selecting
an edge. The chamfer must pass through the selected edge unless the
distance between the selected surface and edge becomes too large or too
small. At that point the chamfer breaks away from the edge, but still passes
through the selected surface.
In the figures, the geometry selected is highlighted on the left, and the
resulting chamfers are shown on the right.

Module 7 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Chamfer\Chamfer_Types CHAMFER_TYPES.PRT

Task 1: Create chamfers by selecting two surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Edge Chamfer from

y
the Chamfer types drop-down

nl
list.

O
3. Press CTRL and select the two
surfaces.

se
4. Edit the D value to 10.
U
al

5. Click Complete Feature .

rn
te
In
C
PT

6. Click Edge Chamfer .

7. Press CTRL and select the two
r

surfaces.
Fo

8. Edit the D value to 9.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 41

 9. Click Complete Feature .

Task 2: Create chamfers by selecting a surface and edge.

y
nl
1. Click Edge Chamfer .

O
2. Press CTRL and select the top
surface and the edge.

se
3. Edit the O value to 12. U
4. Click Complete Feature .
al
rn
te
In
C

5. Click Edge Chamfer .

PT

6. Press CTRL and select the main

surface and the edge.
7. Edit the O value to 13.
r
Fo

Module 7 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 8. Click Complete Feature .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 43

Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning
Schemes
There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to
capture desired design intent.
• Basic dimensioning schemes
include:
– DxD
– D1 x D2
– Angle x D

y
– 45 x D

nl
• More advanced dimensioning
schemes include:

O
– OxO Figure 1 – O x O and D x D

se
– O1 x O2 Chamfer for 90 Degree Corner
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – D x D Chamfer on Figure 3 – O x O Chamfer on

PT

Drafted Corner Drafted Corner

Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

r

There are several ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design

Fo

intent. The following are the more basic dimensioning schemes:

• D x D – Creates a chamfer that is at a distance (D) from the edge along
each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default.
• D1 x D2 – Creates a chamfer at a distance (D1) from the selected edge
along one surface and a distance (D2) from the selected edge along the
other surface.
• Angle x D – Creates a chamfer at a distance (D) from the selected edge
along one adjacent surface at a specified angle (Angle) to that surface.
• 45 x D – Creates a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both
surfaces and a distance (D) from the edge along each surface.
These schemes are available using the Offset Surface creation method only
if the following conditions are met: for Edge chamfers, all members of the
edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes (for example,
the ends of a cylinder).

Module 7 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 The following dimensioning scheme options are more advanced:
• O x O – Creates a chamfer that is at an offset distance (O) from the edge
along each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default only when D
x D is not available.
• O1 x O2 – Creates a chamfer at an offset distance (O1) from the selected
edge along one surface and an offset distance (O2) from the selected
edge along the other surface.
Initially, it appears that the resulting geometry for a D x D and O x O chamfer
is the same, assuming D = O. For chamfers where the geometry adjacent to
the chamfered edge is at 90 degrees, the geometry is the same, as shown in
Figure 1. However, when the geometry adjacent to the chamfered edge is not
90 degrees, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, the difference in geometry

y
between an O x O and a D x D chamfer is readily seen. The difference is in

nl
how the two chamfers are defined. Both D x D and O x O chamfers are
similar in that the two adjacent surfaces are offset, and there is a resulting

O
intersection. However, for an O x O chamfer, two perpendicular lines are
drawn from the intersection to the adjacent surfaces.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 45

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Chamfer
Dimensioning Schemes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Chamfer\Adv_Chamfer_Schemes [Link]

Task 1: Experiment with the different schemes of a chamfer.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1.

nl
3. In the dashboard, notice that the
chamfer scheme is DxD, and the

O
D value is 20.
• Select the Sets tab.

se
• Notice that the chamfer
creation type is specified
U
as Offset Surfaces in the
drop-down list.
al

4. Click Complete Feature .

rn

5. Orient to the FRONT view.

te

6. Notice that the chamfer lines up

with the dashed sketch lines.
In
C
PT

7. Right-click Sketch 1 and select

Edit.
r
Fo

8. Notice that the offsets for both

DxD and OxO are 20. This is
because of the 90 degree draft
corner.

Module 7 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 9. Select on the screen to de-select
the sketch, then right-click Draft
2 and select Edit.
10. Edit the draft from 0 to 10 and
click Regenerate .
11. Notice that the chamfer follows
the DxD sketch. The white lines
are offset parallel to the top and
right surfaces by 20, creating the
intersection.

y
nl
12. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1.
13. In the dashboard, edit the

O
chamfer type from DxD to O X O.
• Edit the O value to 20.
14. Click Complete Feature
15. Notice that the chamfer now
.
se
U
follows the construction lines for
OxO, and that the construction
al

lines are perpendicular to the top

and right model surfaces.
rn

16. Right-click Sketch 1 and select

te

Edit.
17. Notice that the top and right
In

surfaces are still offset by 20

to create the intersection of the
C

white lines. However, the OxO

lines are projected normal to the
PT

surfaces from that intersection.

r
Fo

18. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1.

19. In the dashboard, edit the
chamfer type from OxO to O1 x
O2.
• Edit the O1 value to 15 and
the O2 value to 25.
20. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 47

 21. Right-click Sketch 1 and select
Edit.
22. Edit the top and right sketch
dimensions to 15 and 25,
respectively.

23. Click Regenerate .

24. Notice the construction lines for
the O1xO2 sketch (OxO in the
figure).

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods
You can define the chamfer distance either with offset surfaces
or with tangent distances.

• Offset Surfaces
– Default method
– Adjacent surfaces are offset
– Perpendiculars dropped from
offset surfaces intersection to
adjacent surfaces

y
– Connect the intersections of

nl
the neighboring surfaces and
perpendiculars

O
• Tangent Distance
– Tangent lines extended from
adjacent surfaces
– Connect the points of tangency se
Figure 1 – Part Model, No Chamfer
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Tangent Distance

Figure 2 – Offset Surfaces Chamfer Chamfer
r
Fo

Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

Creo Parametric uses creation methods to create the chamfer geometry.
Different creation methods result in different chamfer geometry. You can
use the following creation methods:
• Offset Surfaces – Determines the chamfer distance by offsetting the
neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. Creo Parametric selects this
method by default. In Figure 1, the two surfaces were offset by 30. At the
intersection, two lines were extended perpendicular to each surface. When
the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 2, it connects the two
intersections of the surfaces and perpendicular lines.
• Tangent Distance – Determines the chamfer distance with vectors that
are tangent to the neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. In Figure
1, two lines were extended tangent from the two surfaces. Each line is of
length 30 from the point of tangency to the other line intersection. When

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 49

 the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 3, it connects the
two points of tangency.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Chamfer\Chamfer_Method CHAMFER_METHOD.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the chamfer creation methods in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.

y
3. Right-click Sketch 1 and select

nl
Edit.

O
4. Notice that the surface offset
distance and tangent line lengths
are both 30.

se
U
5. Orient to the Standard
al

Orientation.
6. From the Engineering group,
rn

select Edge Chamfer from

the Chamfer types drop-down
te

list.
In

7. Select the upper-right edge.

8. Edit the O value to 30.
C

9. In the dashboard, select the Sets

PT

tab.
10. Notice that the chamfer distance
is set at Offset Surfaces.
r

11. Click Complete Feature .

Fo

12. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
13. Notice that the chamfer is at the
Offset construction lines' points
of intersection with the surfaces.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 51

 14. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1.
15. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the distance drop-down
list from Offset Surfaces to
Tangent Distance.
• Edit the D value to 30.

y
16. Click Complete Feature .

nl
17. Notice the chamfer is at the

O
Tangent construction lines'
points of tangency.

se
U
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Corner Chamfers
A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part,
creating a beveled surface between the three original surfaces
common to the corner.

• Requirements:
– Corner must be convex.
– Edges leading to the corner
must be linear.
• Specify the offset values for each

y
edge:

nl
– Drag handles.

O
– Type values on the model.
– Type values in the dashboard.

se
U Figure 1 – Original Model
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Chamfer on 90 Figure 3 – Chamfer on Non

PT

Degree Corner 90 Degree Corner

r

Creating Corner Chamfers

Fo

A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part, creating a

beveled surface between the three original surfaces common to the corner.
You can create corner chamfers using Corner Chamfer , which is a
different tool than Edge Chamfer . The following two requirements apply
when creating a corner chamfer:
• The corner, and each edge leading to corner, must be convex.
• The edges leading to the corner must be linear.
Once you select a corner to be chamfered, you must then specify the offset
values on each edge from the corner. You can specify values either by
dragging the individual handles on the model or by typing values on the
model or in the dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 53

PROCEDURE - Creating Corner Chamfers
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Chamfer\Corner CORNER_CHAMFER.PRT

Task 1: Create a corner chamfer on a 90 degree corner.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Corner Chamfer from
the Chamfer types drop-down

y
menu.

nl
3. Select the vertex.

O
4. Drag the handles and type the se
U
values as necessary.
5. Click Complete Feature .
al
rn
te

Task 2: Create a corner chamfer on a non 90 degree corner.

In
C

1. Select Corner Chamfer from

the Chamfer types drop-down
PT

menu.
2. Select the vertex.
r
Fo

3. Drag the handles and type the

values as necessary.
4. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Chamfers by Reference
You can use a reference to define a chamfer's size.

• Reference types:
– Point
– Vertex
– Edge
• Geometry updates for changes
made to reference location.

y
Figure 1 – Selecting References

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Completed Geometry Figure 3 – Updated Geometry

te

Creating Chamfers by Reference

In

By default, when you create a chamfer, you must specify its distance value.
However, you can use a reference that defines the chamfer size instead. You
can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system updates
C

the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference location.
Figure 1 displays two chamfers. One was created through a vertex, the other
PT

through a datum point.

Figure 2 displays the resulting chamfer geometry for the selected references.
r

In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion has been decreased, and the datum
Fo

point position used by the upper chamfer has been moved. Notice that the
resulting chamfer geometry updated accordingly.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 55

Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces
You can manipulate chamfer geometry based on how references
are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
• References
– Manipulate which edges are
chamfered.
♦ Surface loop from to
♦ One-by-one
• Pieces

y
– Select a piece to remove it.
Figure 1 – Creating a Chamfer

nl
– Trim or extend geometry. with Surface Loop From To

O
se
U
al

Figure 2 – Removing Chamfer Piece and Trimming the Chamfer

rn

Analyzing Chamfer References Selection

te

By default, if you select an edge to be chamfered, and that selected edge has
In

adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting chamfer automatically propagates

around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges are
ultimately chamfered by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from
C

to or One-by-one selection options. These options enable you prevent the

PT

chamfer from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you to select only
the edges you want to receive the chamfer.
In Figure 1, the edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The
r

resulting geometry does not chamfer the top three edges, even though they
Fo

are tangent. When Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started,
you can even select edges that are not tangent.
Analyzing Chamfer Pieces
The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the
chamfer. Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions:
• Select a piece of the chamfer from the model to remove it.
• Trim the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward
so that less geometry is covered.
• Extend the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece
outward so that more geometry is covered.
If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop chamfer, simply remove a chamfer
piece from the chamfer first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming
or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes

Module 7 | Page 56 © 2011 PTC

 the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so
that they were not chamfered, either.
To specify the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed,
you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or
removed a piece of the chamfer, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited.
If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece
drop-down list back to Included.
If you need to terminate a chamfer at a location other than at a
chamfer piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 57

Using Intent Edges for Chamfers
You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent
surfaces.

• Reference selection is quicker.

• Resulting chamfers are more
robust.
• References are tied to features,
not edge references.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Selecting Intent Edges
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Moving the Post Feature

Fo

Using Intent Edges for Chamfers

You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using
intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also
more robust, preventing chamfers from failing when model changes are
made, since the references for the chamfers are tied to the features in the
design model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the chamfer is
being created by specifying the intent edges. In Figure 2, the post feature
is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap. Though the resulting
chamfer geometry differs, the chamfer is still successful. Even when the post
is updated from five sides to four, the chamfer is still successful.
The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming
from a block:
• The parallel outside edges of the extrude.

Module 7 | Page 58 © 2011 PTC

 • The end edges of the extrude.
• The edges where the extrude meets the block.
For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important – only that an
extruded feature is present.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 59

Using Chamfer Transitions
Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles
overlapping or discontinuous chamfer pieces.
• Transition mode:
– Displays available transitions.
– Enables you to change transition
type for each chamfer.
• Numerous transition types available.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing Chamfer
Transitions

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Intersect Chamfer Figure 3 – Corner Plane Chamfer

PT

Transition Type Transition Type

Using Chamfer Transitions

r

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or

Fo

discontinuous chamfer pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that

are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases,
you can use the default transitions. Sometimes, however, you need to modify
the existing transitions to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry.

To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode in the
dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the Chamfer
tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode in the
dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets.
Chamfer Transition Types
When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available
chamfer transitions, as shown in Figure 1. When you select an available
transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition
in the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains valid

Module 7 | Page 60 © 2011 PTC

 transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the
geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently
selected transition. The following is a list of chamfer transition types (note
that not all transition types listed are available for a given context):
• Default – Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best
fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default
appears in parenthesis.
• Intersect – Extends two or more overlapping chamfer pieces toward each
other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary.
• Patch – Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four
chamfer pieces overlap. Optionally, you can specify a surface on which to
place a fillet, and specify the fillet radius to be used.

y
• Corner Plane – Chamfers the corner transition formed by overlapping three

nl
chamfer pieces with a plane.

O
• Stop at Reference – Terminates chamfer geometry at the selected datum
point or datum plane. You must specify the reference to be used.
• Blend – Creates a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an
edge reference.
se
• Continue – Extends chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces.
U
• Stop Case 1 – Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Creo
Parametric.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 61

PROCEDURE - Using Chamfer Transitions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Chamfer\Chamfer_Transitions CHAMFER_TRANS.PRT

Task 1: Specify different chamfer transitions in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Edge Chamfer from

y
the Chamfer types drop-down

nl
list.

O
3. Press CTRL and select the front
three edges.

se
4. Edit the D value to 2.

5. Right-click and select Add set.

U
6. Press CTRL and select the two
parallel edges.
al

7. Edit the D value to 2, if

rn

necessary.
te
In

8. In the dashboard, click

C

Transition Mode .
PT

9. Select the upper, three-way

corner transition.
10. In the dashboard, notice that
r

the default transition type is

Fo

Intersect.

11. Select the lower, three-way

corner transition.
12. In the dashboard, notice that
the default transition type is
Corner Plane. This corner has a
different geometry case than the
previously selected corner.
13. Click Preview Feature .

Module 7 | Page 62 © 2011 PTC

 14. Click Resume Feature .
15. Select the upper three-way
transition and edit its type to
Corner Plane.
16. Click Complete Feature .

17. Click Edge Chamfer .

18. Select the upper-right edge.

y
19. Edit the D value to 2, if

nl
necessary.

O
se
20. Right-click and select Show
transitions. U
21. Notice that there are no corner
transitions.
al

22. Right-click and select Back to

sets.
rn

23. Drag the D value to 4.

te

24. In the dashboard, click

In

Transition Mode .
25. Select the corner transition and
edit its type to Patch in the
C

dashboard.
PT

26. Click Preview Feature .

r
Fo

27. Click Resume Feature .

28. Click in the Optional surface
collector and select the top
surface.
29. Edit the Radius to 2 in the
dashboard.
30. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 63

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 64 © 2011 PTC

 Module 8

y
Relations and Parameters

nl
O
Module Overview

se
You can incorporate your design intent into models by using mathematical
relations, which enable you to incorporate additional design intent. You can
also add additional data to your models using model parameters.
U
In this module, you learn how to create relations and parameters in design
al

models.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand the theory behind relations.
In

• Understand the various relation types.

• Understand basic and advanced relation operators and functions.
C

• Understand exact relations.

PT

• Create parameters and relations.

• Create relations for patterns.
• Create section relations.
r
Fo

• Use the EvalGraph function.

• Create simultaneous equations.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 1

Understanding Relation Theory
Relations are user-defined equations written between
dimensions and/or parameters.
• Uses:
– Control effects of
modifications
– Define dimension values
based on other dimensions
– Set min./max. constraints
– Conditional relationships

y
between dimensions

nl
• Relation syntax:

O
– Symbolic dimension name Figure 1 – Viewing Dimension
– Parameter name Symbolic Names

se
• Naming dimensions:
– d1 versus HEIGHT
U
• Equation types:
– Equality
al

– Comparison
rn

• Modifying relation-driven
dimensions.
te

• Order of operations. Figure 2 – Section of Relations

In

Dialog Box

Understanding Relation Theory

C

Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or

PT

parameters. Relations let you capture design intent by defining relationships

within sketches, features, parts, or assembly components. Relations can
be simple assignments, equations, or complex, conditional, branching
statements. The relation equations themselves are simply stored in the
r

model.
Fo

Relation Uses
You can use relations in the following ways:
• To control the effects of modifications on models.
• To define values for dimensions based on other dimensions.
• To set minimum or maximum constraints for dimension values.
• To describe conditional relationships between dimensions.
Relation Syntax
You compose a relation using the symbolic dimension name, as shown in
Figure 1, or parameter name. An example of a relation is, d1=d2+d3. The
dimension values switch to their symbolic names when using the Relations
dialog box, a portion of which is shown in Figure 2.

Module 8 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 You can also click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch
Symbols or view a dimension's properties and view the contents of the
Name field.

Naming Dimensions
You can edit the properties for a dimension, and give it a meaningful name.
For example, instead of d1 and d2, you could edit the dimension names
to WIDTH and HEIGHT. These names can then be used in the relation. If
a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the
relation.

Equation Types

y
The following two types of equations are:

nl
• Equality – Equates a parameter on the left side of the equation with an

O
expression on the right side. This type of relation is used for assigning
values to dimensions and parameters. For example:

se
– Simple assignments: d3=25, d3=HOLE_DIA, or d5=d2/3
– More complex assignment: d5=LENGTH * (SQRT (d7 / 3 + d4) )
U
• Comparison – Compares an expression on the left side of the equation with
an expression on the right side. This type of relation is commonly used as
al

a constraint or in conditional statements for logical branching. For example:

– Simple constraint: d6>30
rn

– More complex constraint: (d1+d2)>(d3+2.5)

– Conditional statement: IF(d0+3)>=10, d3=30
te

Modifying Dimensions Driven by Relations

In

If a dimension is driven by a relation, the dimension cannot be modified

directly. You can edit the relation that is driving it, or remove that dimension
C

from the relation. For example, if you type the relation d0=d1+d2, you cannot
PT

modify d0 directly. You must modify d1 or d2, or edit the relation to change
the value of d0. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically
reflected in the relation.
r

Order of Operations
Fo

Relations are not evaluated until the model is regenerated. During a

regeneration, relations are evaluated in the following order:
1. At the beginning of a regeneration, the system solves model relations in
the order in which they were typed in.
2. In an assembly, the assembly relations are calculated first. Then the
system calculates all sub-assembly relations in order of component
placement. This means that all sub-assembly relations are calculated
before any features or components begin regeneration.
3. The system starts regenerating features in the order of creation. If a
feature is attached to feature relations, these relations are solved before
regenerating that feature.
4. If you specified any relations as Post Regeneration, the system solves
these relations after the regeneration is complete.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 3

Understanding Relation Types
There are numerous types of relations that can be created within
a Creo Parametric model.

• Types include:
– Section
– Feature
– Part
– Assembly

y
– Inherited

nl
– Pattern
– Skeleton

O
Figure 1 – Sketcher Dimensions
– Component

se
• Specify a feature and model
in a relation
• Rules
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Feature Dimensions

In

Understanding Relation Types

C

There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo
PT

Parametric model. The types of relations that can be created include:

• Section relations – Relations created in Sketcher to control geometry of
complex sections. The relation is calculated with the sketch. In Figure
r

1, the Sketcher dimensions displayed can be used in the creation of a

Fo

Section relation.
• Feature relations – Relations added to a selected feature. During a part
regeneration, these relations are resolved after part relations, but before
the regeneration of the feature to which they apply. You can use feature
relations to change feature geometry after part relations are applied and
some features have been regenerated. In Figure 2, the feature dimensions
displayed can be used in the creation of a Feature relation.
• Part relations – Relations added on a part level. During a part regeneration,
these relations can be calculated before or after the part features are
regenerated. Part relations are typically the most common type of relation
created between model features. The feature dimensions displayed in
Figure 2 can be used in the creation of a Part relation.
• Assembly relations – You can write relations to control geometry between
components, either by using session ID or component ID.

Module 8 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 – Using session ID – If you refer to a parameter that belongs to another
model, the parameter must include the Session ID of the referenced
model. The format for assembly relations is as follows:
♦ parameter_in_driven_model:session_id = parameter_in_driving_
model:session_id
You can determine the session ID from the Relations dialog box by
clicking Show > Session ID or by selecting the desired object type,
whether Assembly, Part, or Skeleton, and then selecting a component.
The name and session ID display in the message window.
– Using component ID – When creating a relation in Assembly mode,
you may need to use a component's internal ID. Every component in
an assembly has a unique component ID, even if two components have

y
the same component name and the same session ID. Use the following

nl
syntax when referencing a component ID:
♦ d#:cid_(component ID #), or d2:CID(2), for example.

O
You can determine the component internal ID by clicking Component
from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon and then

se
selecting a component and clicking Apply. The name and component ID
display in the message window.
U
• Inherited relations – Access relations from an inheritance feature from
Part and Assembly modes.
al

• Pattern relations – Access relations specific to a pattern in the Part or

Assembly mode.
rn

• Skeleton relations – Access relations for a skeleton model in Assembly

mode.
te

• Component relations – Access relations for an assembly component.

In

Specifying a Feature and Model in a Relation

C

You can write relations that use the parameters of a feature. Within a feature
relation, you can identify a feature parameter attached to that feature by the
PT

parameter name. For example: d2 = parameter_name.

However, if you write a relation in the feature’s parent model (part or
assembly) or in another feature, you must use one of the following formats to
r

reference that feature:

Fo

• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#, where # is the feature ID (obtained by clicking

Feature from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon)
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N, where N is the feature Name
In Assembly mode, you can access a user parameter in a feature of another
model by adding the session ID:
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#:session_id
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N:session_id

Rules for Creating Relations in Parts

The following rules apply to creating or modifying relations in parts:
• Driven variables can be as follows:
– Dimensions in the part, for example, d#.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 5

 – User parameters in the part, for example, parameter_name.
– User parameters in features, for example, parameter_name:fid_N or
parameter_name:fid_feature_name.
• Driving variables can be the same as the driven variables. For example,
d2 = d2 +d3.
• In addition, you can use Reference dimensions from the part (rd#), or
Analysis feature measurements in the following format:
– measurement_name:fid_N
– measurement_name:fid_feature_name

Rules for Creating Relations in Features

y
The rules for creating relations in features are as follows:

nl
• Feature relations are saved with the feature, and stay with it regardless of

O
the model in which the feature is used.
• Feature relations are evaluated after part relations and they are solved

se
when the feature to which they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a
relation performs geometry evaluation (such as the distance between two
points), it can provide different results depending on whether it is used as
U
a feature relation or as a part relation. Note that you can modify existing
model parameters by name from the feature level.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Understanding Basic Relation Operators and
Functions
You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and
operators when writing a relation.

• Commenting
– Use /*
• Symbols
– d#, for example

y
• Predefined variables

nl
– PI, for example
• Arithmetic

O
– +, –, /, *, ^, ( )
• Assignment
– Equal sign “=”
se
U
• Mathematical functions
– sin (), cos (), tan (), for example
al

• Mass properties Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box

rn

Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions

te

You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators
when writing a relation.
In

Commenting
C

It is a best practice to use comments in your relations. Comments can help

you remember why you added the relation. They also benefit others who use
PT

your models. Every comment line must begin with a forward slash and an
asterisk, and then the relation follows on the next line. For example:
/* Width is equal to 2*height
r
Fo

d1=2*d2
The comment should precede the relation to which it applies. This way,
when relations are sorted, the comment moves with the relation and remains
above it.

Symbols
The various dimension types use a symbolic code followed by an index
number:
• Dimensions – The following are the different dimension syntaxes:
– d# – Dimensions in Part or Assembly mode.
– d#:# – Dimensions in a component in Assembly mode. The session ID
of the assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– rd# – Reference dimensions in a part or top-level assembly.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 7

 – rd#:# – Reference dimensions in Assembly mode. The session ID of
assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– ad# – Associative (Driven) dimensions in Part, Assembly, or Drawing
mode.
• Sketcher – These dimension symbols are used in Sketcher relations:
– sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
– rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
– kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. A dimension created between
existing geometry (not between section entities) is given this symbol.
• Patterns – Displayed as p#, where # is the number of instances in the
pattern. Direction patterns in two directions have two p#'s. Note that if you

y
edit the instance number to a non-integer value, the system truncates it.
For example, 2.90 becomes 2 pattern instances.

nl
• Tolerances – Parameters associated with tolerance formats. You must

O
enable tolerances to view these symbols:
– tpm# – Tolerance in plus/minus symmetrical format; # is the dimension

se
number.
– tp# – Positive tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
U
– tm# – Negative tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension
number.
al

Predefined Variables
rn

The following predefined variables are available:

te

PI = 3.141592654 G = 9.8 m/sec2 C1 = 1

In

C2 = 2 C3 = 3 C4 = 4
C

Arithmetic Symbols
PT

The following arithmetic symbols are available:

r

+ = Addition – = Subtraction / = Division

Fo

* = Multiplication ^ = Exponentiation ( ) = Parenthesis for

grouping, d0 = (d1–d2)*d3

If you are using negative dimensions, and you want to capture the true
signed value in your relation, precede the symbol with a dollar sign (for
example, $d20 or $depth). You must do this regardless of the setting for the
show_dim_sign configuration option.

Assignment
The assignment symbol “=” sets one item equal to another item.

Mathematical Functions
The following mathematical functions are available:

Module 8 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 cos () = Cosine tan () = Tangent sin () = Sine

sqrt () = Square root asin () = Arc sine acos () = Arc cosine

atan () = Arc tangent sinh () = Hyperbolic cosh () = Hyperbolic

sine cosine

tanh () = Hyperbolic log () = Base 10 ln () = Natural logarithm

tangent logarithm

exp () = e to an abs () = Absolute

expoential degree value

y
nl
ceil () = Smallest integer not less than the real value

O
floor () = Largest integer not greater than the real value

Mass Properties
se
U
You can calculate mass properties for a given model in a relation. You must
set a density value and calculate the mass properties before using these
al

functions. Functions include:

rn

mp_mass (path) mp_volume (path)

te

mp_surf_area (path) mp_cg_x (path1, coord_sys, path2)

In

mp_cg_y (path1, coord_sys, path2) mp_cg_z (path1, coord_sys, path2)

C

Where:
PT

• path = the path to the desired component if in an assembly. If the path

is the current model, type (" "). The format is either assy_name.asm :
part_name.prt or assy_id : part_id : session_id.
r

• path1 = the path format to the component for which the value is to be
Fo

calculated.
• coord_sys = the reference coordinate system name.
• path2 = the path format to the component that contains the coord_sys.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 9

Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and
Functions
You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and
operators when writing a relation.

• Commenting
– Use /*
• Symbols
– d#, for example

y
• Predefined variables

nl
– PI, for example
• Arithmetic

O
– +, –, /, *, ^, ( )
• Assignment
– Equal sign “=”
se
U
• Mathematical functions
– sin (), cos (), tan (), for example
al

• Mass properties Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box

rn

Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions

te

You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators
when writing a relation.
In

Commenting
C

It is a best practice to use comments in your relations. Comments can help

you remember why you added the relation. They also benefit others who use
PT

your models. Every comment line must begin with a forward slash and an
asterisk, and then the relation follows on the next line. For example:
/* Width is equal to 2*height
r
Fo

d1=2*d2
The comment should precede the relation to which it applies. This way,
when relations are sorted, the comment moves with the relation and remains
above it.

Symbols
The various dimension types use a symbolic code followed by an index
number:
• Dimensions – The following are the different dimension syntaxes:
– d# – Dimensions in Part or Assembly mode.
– d#:# – Dimensions in a component in Assembly mode. The session ID
of the assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– rd# – Reference dimensions in a part or top-level assembly.

Module 8 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 – rd#:# – Reference dimensions in Assembly mode. The session ID of
assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– ad# – Associative (Driven) dimensions in Part, Assembly, or Drawing
mode.
• Sketcher – These dimension symbols are used in Sketcher relations:
– sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
– rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
– kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. A dimension created between
existing geometry (not between section entities) is given this symbol.
• Patterns – Displayed as p#, where # is the number of instances in the
pattern. Direction patterns in two directions have two p#'s. Note that if you

y
edit the instance number to a non-integer value, the system truncates it.
For example, 2.90 becomes 2 pattern instances.

nl
• Tolerances – Parameters associated with tolerance formats. You must

O
enable tolerances to view these symbols:
– tpm# – Tolerance in plus/minus symmetrical format; # is the dimension

se
number.
– tp# – Positive tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
U
– tm# – Negative tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension
number.
al

Predefined Variables
rn

The following predefined variables are available:

te

PI = 3.141592654 G = 9.8 m/sec2 C1 = 1

In

C2 = 2 C3 = 3 C4 = 4
C

Arithmetic Symbols
PT

The following arithmetic symbols are available:

r

+ = Addition – = Subtraction / = Division

Fo

* = Multiplication ^ = Exponentiation ( ) = Parenthesis for

grouping, d0 = (d1–d2)*d3

If you are using negative dimensions, and you want to capture the true
signed value in your relation, precede the symbol with a dollar sign (for
example, $d20 or $depth). You must do this regardless of the setting for the
show_dim_sign configuration option.

Assignment
The assignment symbol “=” sets one item equal to another item.

Mathematical Functions
The following mathematical functions are available:

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 11

 cos () = Cosine tan () = Tangent sin () = Sine

sqrt () = Square root asin () = Arc sine acos () = Arc cosine

atan () = Arc tangent sinh () = Hyperbolic cosh () = Hyperbolic

sine cosine

tanh () = Hyperbolic log () = Base 10 ln () = Natural logarithm

tangent logarithm

exp () = e to an abs () = Absolute

expoential degree value

y
nl
ceil () = Smallest integer not less than the real value

O
floor () = Largest integer not greater than the real value

Mass Properties
se
U
You can calculate mass properties for a given model in a relation. You must
set a density value and calculate the mass properties before using these
al

functions. Functions include:

rn

mp_mass (path) mp_volume (path)

te

mp_surf_area (path) mp_cg_x (path1, coord_sys, path2)

In

mp_cg_y (path1, coord_sys, path2) mp_cg_z (path1, coord_sys, path2)

C

Where:
PT

• path = the path to the desired component if in an assembly. If the path

is the current model, type (" "). The format is either assy_name.asm :
part_name.prt or assy_id : part_id : session_id.
r

• path1 = the path format to the component for which the value is to be
Fo

calculated.
• coord_sys = the reference coordinate system name.
• path2 = the path format to the component that contains the coord_sys.

Module 8 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 Exact Relation
Exact relations prevent rounding errors.

• Uses exact value for repeating decimals.

• No rounding/truncation.
• Uses parenthesis.
• Example: OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH.

y
nl
O
se
U
al

Figure 1 – Exact Relation Result Figure 2 – Relations Dialog Box

rn

Exact Relation
te

In earlier versions of the software, the system would round, or truncate,

In

repeating decimals, making exact modeling difficult. Now, you can use exact
values in relations; the repeating decimal is not rounded or truncated, and
is carried out to a maximum of 14 decimal places. This is particularly useful
C

when you pattern or space features using a fraction that results in a repeating
decimal, such as 1/3, 1/6, and 1/7.
PT

• The syntax notation to use this option is = (x/y).

In the example in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the hole offset from the left edge
r

of the model is desired to be exactly 1/7 of the total length. In this case,
Fo

the syntax would be:

• OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 13

Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric
information to a model.
• Parameter types:
– Integer
– Real Number
– String
– Yes/No
• Parameter categories:

y
– Local

nl
– External
– User-defined

O
– System

se
• Display parameters in the
model tree.
U
• Create parameter rules. Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box

Creating Parameters
al

Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a

rn

model. Example uses for parameters include: capturing non-geometry types

of information such as COST or VENDOR, using a numeric parameter to
te

drive dimension values through relations, and defining a parameter value

based on other dimension or parameter values. Parameters can also be
In

used with family tables to define different information for each instance,
drawings to report information in tables or formats, and data management
tools, such as Windchill.
C

Parameter Types
PT

You can create the following types of parameters:

• Integer – A whole number numerical value, for example, 1, 3, 100, and 267.
r

• Real Number – Any numerical value, for example, 1.25, 25, 75, and PI.
Fo

• String – A series of alphanumeric values (numbers or letters), for example,

STEEL, JOHN SMITH, and PTC.
• Yes/No – A parameter whose value is either YES or NO.
You can create parameters associated with the following object types:

• Assembly • Skeleton • Component

• Part • Feature • Inherited

• Quilt • Surface • Edge

• Curve • Composite Curve • Annotation Element

• Material

Module 8 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Parameter Categories
The following categories of parameters are available:
• Local parameters – Parameters that are created in the current model. You
can edit local parameters in the model.
• External parameters – Parameters created outside the current model and
used to control some aspects of the model. External parameters cannot
be modified in the model. For example, you can add parameters in Layout
mode to define certain part dimensions. When you open that part, these
part dimensions are controlled from Layout mode and are read-only in the
part. Similarly, you can create parameters in the PDM system and apply
them to the part.

y
• User-defined parameters – Additional information that you can attach to

nl
geometry. You can add user-defined parameters to an assembly, part,
feature, or entity. For example, you can create a COST parameter for each

O
part in the assembly. Then, you can include the COST parameter in your
Bill of Materials to calculate the total cost of the assembly.

se
• System parameters – Parameters defined by the system, for example, the
Mass Properties parameter. These parameters are generally read-only.
You can use them in relations, but you cannot control their value.
U
Creating Multiple Parameters
al

You can create several parameters at once for multiple objects. To do this,
rn

press CTRL and select multiple features or components from the model tree.
Then, right-click and select Edit Parameters and use the Parameters dialog
box to create or edit parameters for all of the selected objects.
te

Displaying and Creating Parameter Values in the Model Tree

In

You can display parameter values in the model tree as a column by using the
C

Model Tree Columns dialog box to add the columns. This enables you to add
columns for Feature parameters in a part model and Component parameters
PT

in an assembly model. Once the column is added, you can click an empty
cell in the column to add the parameter to that feature or component.
r

Parameter Naming Rules

Fo

Consider the following rules for naming user parameters:

• User parameter names must begin with a letter if they are to be used in
relations.
• You cannot use d#, kd#, rd#, tm#, tp#, or tpm# as user parameter names
because they are reserved for use with dimensions.
• User parameter names cannot contain non-alphanumeric characters such
as !, @, #, and $.
• You cannot change the name of a user parameter once it has been created.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Parameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Parameters [Link]

Task 1: Create parameters in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select

y
Parameters .

nl
3. In the Parameters dialog box,

O
notice the default parameters
created by the model template.

se
4. Drag the column widths as
necessary to resize them
and notice that the existing
U
parameters are of String Type.
al

5. Select the Value field for the

DESCRIPTION parameter.
rn

• Type Hex Socket Screw.

te

6. Select the Value field for the

MODELED_BY parameter.
In

• Type your first initial and last

name.
C

7. In the Parameters dialog box,

PT

click New Parameter .

• Edit the Name to COST.
• Edit the Type to Real Number
r

and type 0.075 as the Value.

Fo

8. Click New Parameter and

edit the Name to LOT_QTY.
• Edit the Type to Integer.
• Type 100 as the Value.

Module 8 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click New Parameter and
edit the Name to VENDOR.
• Edit the Type to String and
type FASTENERS_123 as the
Value.
10. Click New Parameter and
edit the Name to PURCHASED.
• Edit the Type to Yes No.
• Edit the Value to YES and click
OK.

y
nl
11. Click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select

O
Parameters .
12. In the Parameters dialog box,
edit the Look In from Part to
Feature. se
U
• Select feature HEX.
13. Click New Parameter
al

and edit the Name to

rn

TOOL_CLEARANCE.
• Edit the Type to String and
te

type .002 – .005 as the Value.

• Click OK.
In

14. Click the Model Intent group

drop-down menu and select
C

Parameters .
PT

15. In the Parameters dialog box,

edit the Look In from Part to
Surface.
r
Fo

• Select the large cylindrical

surface of the bolt head.

16. Click New Parameter and

edit the Name to KNURLING.
• Edit the Type to Yes No and
type YES as the Value.
• Click OK.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 17

 17. In the model tree, click Settings
and select Tree Columns.
18. In the Model Tree Columns
dialog box, edit the Type to Feat
Params.
• Type TOOL_CLEARANCE as
the Name and press ENTER.
• Click OK.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Understanding Advanced Parameter Options
The Parameters dialog box enables you to perform additional,
more advanced, operations to parameters.

• Operations include:
– Set units
– Designate
– Set access
♦ Full

y
♦ Limited

nl
♦ Locked
– Source

O
– Description
– Restricted
– Reordering parameters
se
Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box
U
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options
al

The following advanced parameter options are available within the

Parameters dialog box:
rn

• Units – The Unit column defines the units for a parameter from the available
list of units. You can only define units for parameters of Real Number type
te

and only while creating a parameter.

In

• Designate – You can designate selected system and user parameters for
use as attributes in Pro/INTRALINK or another PDM system.
• Access – Defines access to the parameter as follows:
C

– Full – Parameters with full access are user-defined parameters. You can
PT

modify these parameters from any application.

– Limited – You can set full access parameters to limited access. You
cannot modify parameters with Limited access by a relation. Limited
r

access parameters are modified only through Family Tables and

Fo

Program.
– Locked – Parameters with locked access are parameters that can be
locked either by a user, or by an external application such as a Data
Management System, Analysis features, Relations, or Program. You
can modify parameters locked by an external application only from
within an external application. You cannot modify user-defined locked
parameters from within any external application.
• Source – Indicates where the parameter was created or from where it is
driven.
• Description – Provides a description for the parameter.
• Restricted – Indicates a restricted value parameter whose properties are
defined by an external file.
• Reordering parameters – You can reorder parameters within the
Parameters dialog box using the up and down arrows on the right side of

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 19

 the dialog box. The order is preserved when exiting the Parameters dialog
box and when saving the model.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols
and write relations. It also contains various relation tools.

• View dimension symbols:

– Switch Dimensions
• Write relation using relation
tools.
• Examples:

y
– Equality

nl
– Constraint
– Logical

O
• Specify regeneration position.
• Use parameters/create

se
parameters in relations. U
al

Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box

rn

Creating Relations
te

You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write
relations. It also contains various relation tools.
In

Viewing Dimension Symbols

C

You can view dimension symbols from the Relations dialog box. The
PT

dimension symbols display by default as you select features while in the

Relations dialog box. You can also click Switch Dimensions to switch
between dimension symbols and values.
r
Fo

From the part model, you can view dimension symbols by editing a feature,
which displays its dimensions. You can then click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select Switch Symbols . You can select a
dimension, right-click and select Properties, and then view the symbol in the
Name field of the Dimension Text tab.

Writing Relations
You should begin every relation with a comment line (a line starting with
/*). You can type the complete relation, or select dimension symbols in
the graphics window to insert them into the relation. You can type in math
operators and parenthesis directly, or use the icons. The following are
examples of relations:

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 21

 Equality d3 = 2.5*d2 d1 = DEPTH d3 = sin(d1+1) +
d2

Constraints d3 >= 10 d2 != 100 d1 < (d2*d3) -1

Logical IF d1 == 6 d1 = d1 + 10 IF MATL ==
"STEEL"
d2 = 15 ENDIF IF d1 > 350
d2 = 10
d1 = 5
ENDIF
ENDIF

y
Editing dimensions such that a constraint is violated, simply creates

nl
a warning message, which you can override.

O
Relation Tools

se
The following tools are available within the Relations dialog box:
U
• Provide Value – Enables you to type a dimension symbol, parameter,
or a portion of a relation to compute the result.
al

• Display Dimension – Type a dimension symbol or name to highlight

it on the model.
rn

• Select Units – Enables you to select a unit to insert. You can also set
te

relations to take units into consideration when computing.

In

• Insert Function – Display a complete list of functions for relations.

• Insert Parameter – Select a parameter to insert into the relation.

C

• Sort Relations – The sort function sorts relations in order of

PT

precedence, based on how they are evaluated by the system. If one relation
depends on the value of another relation, it is reordered accordingly.
Sorting relations helps you detect undesired circular relations. Relations
r

with comment lines can also be sorted. The comment line is attached to the
Fo

relation below it, and moves with that relation during a sorting. If multiple
comment lines precede a relation, they are all attached to that relation.
For example, if you type the relations d0=d1+3*d2 and d2=d3+d4, then
when you sort them, the system reorders them based on the order in which
they are evaluated. Since the first relation needs the value from the second
relation, the order is reversed when sorted.

• Verify Relations – Computes the relations and verifies they are valid.

Regeneration Position
You can specify the regeneration position as either Initial, where relations are
calculated before the first feature, or Post Regeneration, where relations are
calculated after the last feature. Initial is the default option.

Module 8 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Using Parameters in Relations
You can access a parameter from a relation, or create a parameter as the
result of a relation. For example, you can create a real number parameter
named LENGTH, equal to 15. You can then add a relation of d5=LENGTH.
When you regenerate the model, the d5 dimension updates to new values as
the LENGTH parameter is updated. Note that you can type string values for
parameters by enclosing them within quotation marks in relations.
You can expand the Relations dialog box to display the Parameters dialog
box.

Creating Parameters in Relations

y
You can create or edit a parameter directly from a relation. For example,

nl
you can type LENGTH = d5. If the parameter LENGTH did exist previously,
the system would modify its value. If the parameter LENGTH did not exist

O
previously, the system would create it as a Real Number parameter.

se
Best Practices
Sort relations and verify them often to avoid errors, especially when writing
U
multi-line relations. Test the relation by modifying dimensions and parameters
on the model to ensure it works as expected.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Creating Relations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Relations [Link]

Task 1: Create relations in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click HEX
and select Edit.

y
3. Click the Model Intent group

nl
drop-down menu and select

O
Switch Symbols .
4. Notice the dimension symbols

se
are generic in name.
U
5. Select d1, then right-click and
select Properties.
al

6. In the Dimension Properties

rn

dialog box, edit the Name from

d1 to HEX_SIZE.
te

• Click OK.
7. Repeat the procedure to edit
In

the name of dimension d2 to

HEX_DEPTH.
C

8. Click the Model Intent group

PT

drop-down menu and select

Relations .
r

9. Select BOLT_HEAD and

Fo

BOLT_SHAFT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type
the following comment and press
ENTER:
• /* Adjust HEAD size based
on BOLT diameter
11. Type the following logical
relations, pressing ENTER after
each line:
• IF BOLT_DIA == 8
• HEAD_DIA = 14
• HEAD_THK = 7
• ENDIF

Module 8 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 12. Type the comment:
• /* Adjust HEX size relative to
HEAD size
13. Type the relations, pressing
ENTER after each line:
• HEX_SIZE = HEAD_DIA / 2
• HEX_DEPTH = HEAD_THK /
1.5

14. Type the comment:

y
• /* Create a parameter value

nl
15. Type the relation:

O
• OVERALL_LENGTH
= HEAD_THK +
BOLT_LENGTH
16. Type the comment:
• /* Constrain the overall se
U
model length
al

17. Type the relation:

• OVERALL_LENGTH <= 40
rn
te

18. Click Verify Relations and click OK.

In

19. Expand the Local Parameters

pane and notice the
OVERALL_LENGTH parameter
C

and its value of 21. Click OK.

PT

20. Right-click BOLT_SHAFT and select Edit.

r

21. Edit the BOLT_DIA to 8.

Fo

22. Edit the bolt length from 15 to 25 and click Regenerate .

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 25

 23. Edit the bolt length from 25 to 35
and click Regenerate .
24. Notice the warning message.
25. Click No in the Confirmation
dialog box to stop regeneration.
26. Click Close in the Information
Window.
27. Select the BOLT_LENGTH check
box from the menu manager and

y
click Done Sel > Done/Return.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Relations for Patterns
You can use relations to control pattern increments and
quantities.

• Pattern increments: d#
• Pattern quantities: p#
• Relations with linear patterns
– Control linear pattern
spacing:

y
♦ d1 = 100 / p1

nl
– Control the quantity:
♦ p1 = 100 / d1

O
• Relations with angular
patterns

se
– Control angular pattern
spacing:
Figure 1 – Controlling Linear Spacing
U
♦ d1 = 360 / p1
– Control the quantity:
al

♦ p1 = 360 / d1
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Controlling Angular Spacing

PT

Creating Relations for Patterns

r

You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities. Pattern
Fo

increments display like a standard dimension with symbol d#. Pattern

quantities display with symbol p#.
If you have a pattern in two directions, you will see p# displayed
twice.

Using Relations with Linear Patterns

You can use relations with various linear patterns, including Direction and
Dimension patterns. For example, given spacing dimension d1 and pattern
quantity p1, you could:
• Control the linear pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example
d1 = 100 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given linear pattern spacing, for example
p1 = 100 / d1.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 27

In Figure 1, a relation has been created that controls the linear spacing based
on the pattern quantity. When the number of pattern members is decreased,
they remain equally spaced due to the relation.

Using Relations with Rotational Patterns

You can also use relations with rotational patterns, including Axis and
Dimension patterns. For example, given angle d1 and pattern quantity p1,
you could:
• Control the angular pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example
d1 = 360 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given angular pattern spacing, for example

y
p1 = 360 / d1.

nl
In Figure 2, a relation has been created that controls the quantity of pattern
members based on the angular spacing value. In the left image of Figure 2,

O
the relation has not yet been created. In the middle image, the relation has
been applied and the quantity has increased based on the spacing value to

se
maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees. In the right image, the spacing
value has been increased. To maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees, the
quantity has been automatically reduced.
U
When using a Dimension pattern, it is necessary to use these types
al

of relations to maintain equal pattern spacing around a given angle.

However with the Axis pattern, you can use the Set Angular Extent
rn

option to achieve the same result without a relation.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Relations for Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Relation_Patterns RELATION_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Create relations to control the spacing of features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and
select Edit.

y
• Select the 5 EXTRUDES

nl
dimension, then right-click and
select Properties.

O
• Edit the Name to VERT_QTY
and click OK.
• Repeat the process to edit the
10 spacing dimension name to
se
U
SPACING.
3. De-select all geometry.
al

4. Click the Model Intent group

rn

drop-down list and select

Relations .
te

5. Type the comment and press

In

ENTER:
• /* Adjust spacing and offset
C

based on vertical pattern

quantity and length
PT

6. Select the front, left, oval extrude,

and select the base protrusion.
7. Notice that the other dimensions
r

have already been renamed.

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 29

 8. Type the following relations,
pressing ENTER after each line:
• OFFSET = LENGTH /
(VERT_QTY+1)
• SPACING = OFFSET
9. Click OK.

10. Click Regenerate and

notice that the pattern spacing is
equal to the spacing from both
ends.

y
nl
O
11. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and
select Edit.

se
• Edit the quantity from 5
EXTRUDES to 4 and click
U
Regenerate .
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Section Relations
Section Relations are relations typically created in Sketcher
mode involving dimensions of the current section.
• Symbolic section dimension
symbols:
– sd# – Sketcher dimension
– rsd# – Reference Sketcher
dimension
– kd# – Known Sketcher
dimension

y
nl
• Advantages of Section relations:
– Real time dimension updates.

O
– Relation is regenerated with the
feature in which it resides.

se Figure 1 – Showing Symbolic

Sketcher Dimensions
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Showing Numeric Figure 3 – Showing Updated

Sketcher Dimensions Sketcher Dimensions
r
Fo

Creating Section Relations

Section Relations (also referred to as Sketcher relations) are relations
typically created in Sketcher mode and involve dimensions of the current
section. However, you can also create a section relation from the part level
by selecting the Section option in the Relations dialog box, and then selecting
a feature.
When writing relations between section dimensions, you must use the
symbolic section dimension symbols:
• sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
• rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
• kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. This symbol is given to a dimension
created between existing geometry (not between section entities). The top
and right dimensions in Figure 1 are known dimensions in the Sketch.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 31

Advantages of Writing Section Relations
The advantages of writing a section relation as opposed to a part relation are:
• The relation is active in Sketcher mode, so you can change Sketcher
dimensions and view the relations take effect. In Figure 2 and Figure 3,
a relation was written that centered the cut feature in the middle of the
main base protrusion. When the relation was applied, the driven rectangle
dimensions automatically updated in real time.
• The relation is regenerated along with the feature in which it resides.

Tips for Writing Section Relations

Keep the following in mind when writing relations within Sketched sections:

y
nl
• Relations that define dimensions other than section dimensions are best
defined at the feature or part level.

O
• You cannot reference a parameter in another feature as a driving variable.
For example, if dia is a dimension in another feature with fid_20, the system

se
does not accept the following section relationship: sd3 = dia:fid_20
• However, you can establish the same relationship at the feature level
U
or model level by using the model-level equivalent (d#) of the section
dimension (sd#). Alternatively, you can create an intermediate user
parameter in the parent model, and then reference it from the section.
al

• If you try to assign a relation outside of the section to a parameter that is

rn

already driven by another relation in the section, the system issues an error
message upon regeneration. The same applies if you try to assign relations
te

to a parameter in a section that is already being driven by a relation outside

the section. Remove one of the relations and regenerate again.
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Section Relations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Section_Relations SECTION_REL.PRT

Task 1: Create section relations in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Orient to the FRONT view.
3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

y
Edit.

nl
• Notice the dimensions, and
notice that there are no overall

O
width or height dimensions to
use in a relation.

se
U
4. Edit the definition of Extrude 2.
al

5. Right-click and select Edit

rn

Internal Sketch.
6. Enable only the following
te

Sketcher Display types: .

In

7. Review the dimension scheme.

C
PT

8. In the ribbon, select the Model

r

tab, then click the Model Intent

Fo

group drop-down menu and

select Relations .
9. In the Relations dialog box, type
the comment:
• /* Change width based on
height
10. Type the relation:
• sd1 = 2.25 * sd7
11. Click OK to update the
dimensions.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 33

 12. Edit the height from 0.5 to 1.
13. Notice that the dimensions
update in Sketcher because of
the relation.
If this relation was written
as a part relation, you
would not be able to view
the dimension update in
Sketcher.

y
nl
14. In the ribbon, select the Sketch
tab, then click Normal and

O
dimension the overall height and
width of the model.

se
Dimensioning existing
geometry to existing
U
geometry creates a known
dimension (kd#).
al
rn

15. In the ribbon, select the Model

tab, then click the Model Intent
te

group drop-down menu and

In

select Relations .
16. In the Relations dialog box, type
C

the comment:
• /* Center sketch on model
PT

17. Type the relations:

• sd12 = kd13 / 2
r

• sd10 = kd14 / 2
Fo

18. Click OK to update the

dimensions.
19. In the ribbon, select the Sketch
tab, then click OK .
20. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Using the Evalgraph Function
The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph
features to drive dimensions through relations.

• Relation syntax:
– y = evalgraph(“graph_name”, x)
♦ graph_name = name of
graph feature.
♦ x = value along X-axis of
graph for which the y value

y
is returned.

nl
• x can be the value specified by a
dimension.

O
Figure 1 – Graph Feature
Controlling Feature Height

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Feature with Width

PT

Figure 2 – Feature with Width of 8 of 12.5

Using the Evalgraph Function

r
Fo

The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to
drive dimensions through relations. The dimensions can be section, part, or
assembly dimensions. The syntax for using Evalgraph in a relation is:
• evalgraph("graph_name", x)
where:
• graph_name – The name of a graph feature.
• x – The value along the X-axis of the graph for which the y value is returned.
A relation was written that uses the graph feature shown in Figure 1. The
relation controls the feature height using feature width based on the graph.
In Figure 2, the feature width is 8; using the graph in Figure 1, you can
determine that the associated height is 4.
In Figure 3, the feature width is 12.5; using the graph in Figure 1, you can
determine that the associated height is slightly more than 2 (it is 2.33).

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 35

For variable section sweep features, you can also specify the trajectory
parameter “trajpar” in the function.
The following is an example of using Evalgraph in a relation:
• d1 = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , d2)
In this case, you control dimension d1 throughout the relation. When d2 is
modified on the model, the system evaluates this value as the x-value using
the specified graph, and returns with the corresponding y-value for d1.
You can also involve Evalgraph in more complex relations, for example:
• d1 = 1.5* EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1", d2+d3*sin(d4) )

y
A graph feature is usually evaluated for its defined X-axis values.

nl
When it is evaluated beyond the defined range, the Y-axis values
are extrapolated. The system calculates the extrapolated y value for

O
values of x that are less than the initial value by extending a tangent
line back from the initial point. Similarly, the system calculates the
extrapolated y value for values of x that are greater than the final

se
value, by extending a tangent line out from the final point.
U
When you create a section relation of a graph feature, for example,
sd1=evalgraph("CONIC", trajapar*5), this relation becomes
al

a feature relation. Feature relations are evaluated after part

relations and are solved when the feature to which they belong is
rn

regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs geometry evaluation

(for example, the distance between two points), it can provide
te

different results if used as a section relation as opposed to being

used as a part relation.
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using the Evalgraph Function

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Evalgraph [Link]

Task 1: Use the Evalgraph function in a relation to control a feature's

height.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

y
Edit.

nl
• Edit the 2 dimension name to
WIDTH.

O
• Edit the 10 dimension name to
HEIGHT.

se
U
al

3. Edit the definition of GRAPH1,

click Done from the menu
rn

manager, and press ENTER to

accept the default name.
te

4. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
In

.
C

5. Notice that the graph is an x-y

function.
PT

6. Click OK .

7. Click the Model Intent group

r

drop-down menu and select

Fo

Relations .
8. Type the comment /* Control
HEIGHT by changing WIDTH,
based on GRAPH1 and press
ENTER.
9. Select the feature and select
dimension HEIGHT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type
=EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" ,
WIDTH) and click OK.

11. Click Regenerate .

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 37

 12. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit.
13. Notice that the height dimension
updated for the current width.
14. Double-click the 6.67 height
dimension to edit it.
15. Notice the message in the
message window.
16. Edit the 2 width dimension to 8

y
and click Regenerate .

nl
17. Edit the definition of GRAPH1,
click Done from the menu

O
manager, and press ENTER to
accept the default name.
18. Click Line Chain and sketch
a new diagonal line on the end. se
U
19. Click Normal and create the
horizontal and vertical endpoint
al

dimensions, editing as shown.

rn

20. Click OK .
te

21. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

Edit.
In

22. Edit the 8 width dimension to

12.5 and click Regenerate .
C

23. Notice that the height has

PT

updated for the new width based

on the graph.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 Using Simultaneous Equations
Simultaneous equations are relations in which several variables
or dimensions must be solved simultaneously.

• Procedure:
– Define known values.
– Place SOLVE on a line.
– Type simultaneous
equations.
– Type FOR and variables to

y
be computed.

nl
• Rules:
– Must declare variables used

O
in beginning of equation.
– System returns only one
result, even if more than one
is possible. se
Figure 1 – Relation and Variable
Definition
U
– You can intermix
simultaneous equations with
al

single variable relations.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Figure 2 – Solution with

Depth of 16 Figure 3 – Solution with Depth of 10

Using Simultaneous Equations

In some cases, it may not be possible or convenient to arrange the desired
relation so that only the driven dimension is on the left side of the equation.
In such cases, the relation can be set up so that the system can solve a
set of simultaneous equations for the desired variables. Simultaneous
equations are relations in which several variables or dimensions must be
solved simultaneously.

Setting Up Simultaneous Equations

To set up a set of equations to be solved, use the following procedure:

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 39

• Define the known values.
• Place SOLVE on a line of the relation.
• Type the equations to be solved simultaneously.
• Type FOR and then indicate the variables to be computed, separated with
commas.

Rules for Creating Simultaneous Equations

Consider these rules for creating simultaneous equations:
• You must declare variables used in simultaneous equations in the
beginning of the equations.
• When solving the simultaneous equation, the system returns only one

y
set of results, even if more than one solution for the system of equations

nl
is possible.
• You can intermix simultaneous equations with single variable relations.

O
Simultaneous Equation Examples

se
For example, you have a box with dimension defined by the parameters
WIDTH, HEIGHT, and DEPTH, and you want to specify the following
U
conditions:
al

• The volume remains constant at 320.

• The width is twice the height.
rn

• The length is variable.

te

You can type the following simultaneous equations:

SOLVE
In

LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT = 320
C

WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
PT

FOR HEIGHT WIDTH ...or... FOR HEIGHT,WIDTH

All lines between the SOLVE and FOR statements become part of the
simultaneous equations. The FOR line lists the variables to be solved (note
r

that there are two possible variations). Any variables that appear in the
Fo

simultaneous equations, but do not appear in the FOR list, are interpreted
as constants.
Alternatively, you can set the same conditions by typing the following
simultaneous equations:
VOLUME = 320
SOLVE
VOLUME=LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT
WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH
Figure 2 and Figure 3 display variations of the model where the DEPTH
was edited to different values.

Module 8 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using Simultaneous Equations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Simultaneous_Eq [Link]

Task 1: Use simultaneous equations in a relation.

In this example, the volume of a rectangular solid is to remain

constant. The width is to be twice the height. The depth value
must be variable. The system should solve the necessary

y
equations and return the dimensions for height and width.

nl
O
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

se
Edit.
3. Notice the 16 depth dimension,
U
20 height dimension, and 40
width dimension.
al
rn

4. Edit the 16 dimension name to

DEPTH.
te

5. Edit the 20 dimension name to

In

HEIGHT.
6. Edit the 40 dimension name to
C

WIDTH.
PT

7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations
r

.
Fo

8. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment /* solve simultaneous

equations for height and width and press ENTER.
• Select the feature to display the dimensions, if necessary.
• Type volume = 320 and press ENTER.
• Type SOLVE and press ENTER.
• Type volume =, select dimension HEIGHT, and click x.
• Select dimension WIDTH and click x.
• Select dimension DEPTH and press ENTER.
• Type width = 2*height and press ENTER.
• Type FOR height, width.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 41

 9. Click OK.

10. Click Regenerate and

notice the geometry update.

y
nl
O
se
U
11. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit.
al

12. Notice that the 16 depth

rn

dimension stayed the same.

13. Notice the new 3.16 height
te

dimension.
14. Notice the new 6.32 width
In

dimension, which is twice the

height.
C

15. Double-click the 3.16 height

PT

dimension and try to edit it.

16. Notice the message in the
message window.
r
Fo

Module 8 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 17. Edit the depth from 16 to 10 and
click Regenerate .
18. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit.
19. Notice the 10 depth dimension,
the 4 height dimension, and the
8 width dimension.
20. Notice that the width is still twice
the height.

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 43

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Module 9

y
Advanced Blends

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Beyond creating Parallel Blends, you can create Rotational and General
Blends to create advanced geometry efficiently. These blend types enable
you to create more advanced geometry, and have additional control over the
U
blend sections and resulting blend shape.
al

In this module, you learn how to create Rotational Blends and General
Blends, as well as change their attributes.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Create rotational and general blend surfaces and analyze their attributes.
• Define rotational and general blend surface tangency.
C

• Select sections for rotational and general blends.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 1

Understanding Rotational and General Blend
Theory
In addition to creating a parallel blend feature, you can also
create a rotational blend or a general blend.

• Blend options:
– Rotational Blend
– General Blend
• Blend types:

y
– Protrusion

nl
♦ Thin Protrusion
Figure 1 – Rotational Blend

O
– Cut
♦ Thin Cut Example

se
– Surface
• 2-D Section
U
– Sketched
– Selected
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – General Blend Example

C

Figure 3 – Using a Blend Vertex

PT

Figure 4 – Blending to a
r

Point Section
Fo

Understanding Rotational and General Blend Theory

In addition to creating a parallel blend feature, the following two blend options
are also available:
• Rotational Blend – Enables you to rotate sections around the Y-axis of a
Sketcher coordinate system.
• General Blend – Enables you to translate sections along the Z-axis of a
Sketcher coordinate system, as well as rotate the sections about the X, Y,
and Z-axes.

Blend Types
The following blend types are available:

Module 9 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Protrusion – Enables you to create a blend feature that adds geometry.
You can also create a Thin Protrusion.
• Cut – Enables you to create a blend feature that cuts away geometry. You
can also create a Thin Cut.
• Surface – Enables you to create a blend surface.
Once defined, you cannot toggle a protrusion to a cut, a cut to a surface,
and so on. Because these features are defined using the menu manager,
their blend type cannot be modified.

Defining the 2-D Sections

y
You can create the 2-D section to be used in the blend feature using either

nl
method:

O
• Sketched section – Enables you to sketch geometry for the section. The
following are important characteristics of a sketched section in a rotational

se
or general blend:
– Sketches are positioned relative to a Sketcher coordinate system,
which is required for each section.
U
– Each section is sketched in a separate Sketcher window. This provides
an advantage over parallel blends, which are all sketched in the same
al

window, especially for blends that contain numerous sections.

rn

– You can add or remove sections.

– You can insert new sections between existing sections.
te

– The sections can utilize blend vertices, as shown in Figure 3.

In

– Sections can be a single Sketcher point, along with the coordinate

system, as shown in Figure 4. When a single point is created for a
section and the smooth blend attribute is used, you must specify the
C

Cap Type that is to be used. The following two options are available:
PT

♦ Sharp Cap – Blends to the Sketcher point with lines straight to the
point.
♦ Smooth Cap – Blends to the Sketcher point with lines tangent at the
r

point.
Fo

• Selected section – Enables you to select from existing geometry curves

or edges.
When defining sections for either rotational or general blends, the first section
displays an arrow to denote the start point, just like a parallel blend. However,
all subsequent section start points are denoted with a small circle, as shown
in the upper-left vertex of Figure 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 3

Creating a Rotational Blend Protrusion or Cut
A rotational blend rotates sections about the Y-axis of a Sketcher
coordinate system.

• Section requirements:
– Rotation angle.
♦ 120° maximum
– Sketched coordinate
system.

y
• System lines up
coordinate systems.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing the Rotational
Blend Sections

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Sketched Section

In

Creating a Rotational Blend Protrusion or Cut

C

A rotational blend rotates sections about the Y-axis of a Sketcher coordinate

PT

system. As each new section is created, you must specify its rotation angle.
The rotation angle is defined with respect to the previously created section,
and has a maximum value of 120 degrees per section. When editing the
resultant blend protrusion or cut, the angle value is displayed with the suffix of
r

the axis it rotates about. In Figure 1, the middle section is rotated 90 degrees
Fo

about the Y-axis, so the value is displayed as “90Y”; the left section is rotated
60 degrees from the middle section, so its angle value is displayed as “60Y.”
Each section must contain a sketched coordinate system. You typically
sketch the section a distance away from the coordinate system. In Figure 2,
the section was offset from the coordinate system a distance of 5 in the X
direction. Creo Parametric then lines up the coordinate systems to place the
sections, and rotates them the specified angle value in the Y-axis.

Module 9 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Rotational Blend Protrusion
or Cut

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Rotational_Solid ROTATIONAL_BLEND_SOLID.PRT

Task 1: Create a rotational blend protrusion in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes drop-down menu and select Blend
> Protrusion.

nl
3. In the menu manager, click Rotational > Regular Sec > Sketch Sec

O
> Done.
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Open > Done.

se
5. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch plane and click Okay.
6. In the menu manager, click Top and select datum plane TOP.
U
7. Enable only the following
al

Sketcher Display types:

rn

.
8. In the ribbon, click Sketch View
te

from the Setup group.

In

9. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group and
C

place a coordinate system at the

reference intersection.
PT

10. Click Corner Rectangle

from the Sketching group and
sketch the rectangle.
r
Fo

11. Click One-by-One and edit the

dimensions as shown.
12. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
13. Click OK .

14. Type 90 as the y_axis angle for section 2 and press ENTER.
15. Notice the new Sketcher window.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 5

 16. Click Coordinate System
from the Sketching group and
click to place a coordinate
system.

17. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and create a
vertical and horizontal centerline.
18. Click Corner Rectangle
from the Sketching group and
sketch the rectangle.

y
nl
19. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.

O
20. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select

se
Start Point.
21. Click OK .
U
22. Click Yes to add another section.
al

23. Type 60 as the y_axis angle for section 3 and press ENTER.
rn

24. Click Coordinate System

te

from the Sketching group and

click to place a coordinate
In

system.

25. Click Centerline from the

C

Sketching group and create a

PT

vertical and horizontal centerline.

26. Click Corner Rectangle
from the Sketching group and
sketch the rectangle.
r
Fo

27. Click One-by-One and edit the

dimensions as shown.
28. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
29. Click OK .

Module 9 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 30. Click No to stop sketching
sections.
31. Click OK in the Protrusion dialog
box.
32. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

33. In the model tree, right-click

Protrusion id and select Edit.
34. Notice the locations of the three

y
sections.

nl
O
se
This completes the procedure. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 7

Analyzing Rotational Blend Attributes
You can edit the attributes for a rotational blend protrusion or
cut to achieve different geometry results.
• Shape attributes:
– Straight
– Smooth
• Type attributes:
– Open
– Closed

y
nl
Figure 1 – Straight, Open
Blend Attributes

O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Smooth, Closed

In

Blend Attributes
C

Analyzing Rotational Blend Attributes

PT

When the sections of a rotational blend are rotated about the Y-axis, you can
edit the following attributes to achieve different geometry results.
r

Shape Attributes
Fo

You can define how the different blend sections are connected. The following
two methods are available:
• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 1. This is the default option.
• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in Figure 2.

Type Attributes
You can define the type of rotational blend protrusion or cut that is created.
The following two types are available:
• Open – The first and last section of the blend are not connected, as shown
in Figure 1.

Module 9 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 • Closed – The last section of the blend is connected to the first section,
as shown in Figure 2.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Attributes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Rotational-Attributes_Solid
527B%/(1'B62/,'[Link]

Task 1: Edit the attributes of a rotational blend protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Protrusion

y
id 68.

nl
3. In the Protrusion dialog box,
select Attributes and click

O
Define.
4. In the menu manager, click

se
Straight > Open > Done.
5. In the Protrusion dialog box, click
U
Preview.
al

6. In the Protrusion dialog box,

select Attributes and click
rn

Define.
7. In the menu manager, click
te

Smooth > Closed > Done.

In

8. In the Protrusion dialog box, click

OK.
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 9 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a General Blend Protrusion or Cut
A general blend rotates sections about the X, Y, and Z-axes of a
Sketcher coordinate system and translates sections along the
Z-axis.

• Section requirements:
– Translation distance
along Z-axis.
– Rotation angles about
X, Y, and Z-axes.

y
♦ 120° maximum

nl
– Sketched coordinate
system.

O
• System lines up
coordinate systems:
– Typically sketched at
center of section. se
Figure 1 – Viewing the General
Blend Sections
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Sketched Section

C
PT

Creating a General Blend Protrusion or Cut

A general blend translates sections along the Z-axis of a Sketcher coordinate
system. The distance between each section can be different. The blend
r

also rotates sections about the X, Y, and Z-axes of the Sketcher coordinate
Fo

system. As each new section is created, you must specify its X, Y, and Z
rotation angles. The rotation angles are defined with respect to the previously
created section, and each angle has a maximum value of 120 degrees per
axis per section. When editing the resultant blend protrusion or cut, the
angle values are displayed with the suffix of the axes they rotate about. For
example, in Figure 1, the right section is rotated 0 degrees about the X-axis,
20 degrees about the Y-axis, and 10 degrees about the Z-axis. Therefore,
the values displayed are ”0X,” 20Y,” and “10Z.”
Each section must contain a sketched coordinate system. You typically
sketch the section with the coordinate system located at the center. In Figure
2, the section was sketched symmetrical about the centerline that passes
vertically through the sketched coordinate system. Creo Parametric then
lines up the coordinate systems to place the sections, rotates them in the X,
Y, and Z-axes, and translates them along the Z-axis.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Creating a General Blend Protrusion or
Cut

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\General_Solid GENERAL_BLEND_SOLID.PRT

Task 1: Create a general blend protrusion in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Click the Shapes drop-down menu and select Blend > Protrusion
from the main menu.

nl
3. In the menu manager, click General > Regular Sec > Sketch Sec

O
> Done.
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Done.

se
5. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch plane and click Flip >
Okay.
U
6. In the menu manager, click Top and select datum plane TOP.
al

7. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
rn

.
te

8. In the ribbon, click Sketch View

from the Setup group.
In

9. Click Coordinate System

C

from the Sketching group and

place the coordinate system.
PT

10. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and sketch a
r

vertical centerline.
Fo

11. Click Corner Rectangle

from the Sketching group and
sketch a rectangle symmetric
about the centerline.
12. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
13. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
14. Click OK .

Module 9 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 15. Type -20 as the x_axis angle, 0
as the y_axis angle, and 0 as the
z_axis angle for section 2.
16. Notice the new Sketcher window.
17. Click Coordinate System
from the Sketching group and
click to place a coordinate
system.

18. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and sketch

y
both a vertical and horizontal

nl
centerline.

O
19. Click Corner Rectangle from
the Sketching group and sketch
a rectangle that is symmetric
about the vertical centerline by
se
U
starting at the lower left.
20. Click One-by-One and edit the
al

dimensions as shown.
rn

21. Click OK .
te

22. Click Yes to continue.

In

23. Type 0 as the x_axis angle, 20

as the y_axis angle, and -10 as
C

the z_axis angle for section 3.

PT

24. Notice the new Sketcher window.

25. Click Coordinate System
from the Sketching group and
r

click to place a coordinate

Fo

system.

26. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and create
both a vertical and horizontal
centerline.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 13

 27. Click Corner Rectangle from
the Sketching group and sketch
a rectangle that is symmetric
about the vertical centerline by
starting at the lower left.
28. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
29. Click OK .

30. Click No to stop sketching

y
sections.

nl
31. Type 10 for the section 2 depth
and 7 for the section 3 depth.

O
32. Click OK in the Protrusion dialog
box.
33. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select Standard Orientation se
U
from the Orientation drop-down
menu.
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing General Blend Attributes
You can edit the attributes for a general blend protrusion or cut
to achieve different geometry results.

• Shape attributes:
– Straight
– Smooth

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Straight Blend
Attribute Figure 2 – Smooth Blend Attribute
al
rn

Analyzing General Blend Attributes

When the sections of a general blend are connected, you can edit the
te

following attributes to achieve different geometry results.

In

Shape Attributes
C

You can define how the different blend sections are connected. The following
PT

two methods are available:

• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 1. The edges of the sections form ruled surfaces. This is the
r

default option.
Fo

• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as

shown in Figure 2. The edges of the sections form splined surfaces.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Analyzing General Blend Attributes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\General-Attributes_Solid GEN_BLEND_SOLID_ATTRIB.PRT

Task 1: Edit the attributes of a general blend protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Protrusion

y
id 67.

nl
3. In the Protrusion dialog box,
select Attributes and click

O
Define.
4. In the menu manager, click

se
Straight > Done.
5. In the Protrusion dialog box, click
U
Preview.
al
rn
te

6. In the Protrusion dialog box,

select Attributes and click
In

Define.
7. In the menu manager, click
C

Smooth > Done.

PT

8. In the Protrusion dialog box, click

OK.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 Defining Rotational and General Blend Tangency
The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the
surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of another feature.

• For smooth blends only.

• Can specify tangency for the first
and/or last blend sections.
• You must specify a tangent surface
for each section segment.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Specifying Adjacent
Tangent Surface

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Blends Before Tangency Figure 3 – Blends After Tangency

r

Defining Rotational and General Blend Tangency

Fo

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the
blend feature and the surfaces of another feature. You can define tangency
only for blends created using the Smooth blend attribute.
You can define tangency for the first and/or last section of a blend. When
defining tangency, each segment of the section highlights. You must then
select the adjacent surface, as shown in Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Defining Rotational and General Blend
Tangency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Tangency_Solid ROT-GEN_BLEND-TAN_SLD.PRT

Task 1: Define tangency at one end of a rotational blend protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of
ROT_BLEND.

nl
3. In the Protrusion dialog box,

O
select Tangency and click
Define.

se
4. In the Confirmation dialog box,
click Yes to define tangency at
the first end.
U
5. Right-click to query and select
al

the bottom, adjacent surface to

the edge entity.
rn
te
In

6. Select the right, adjacent surface

C

to the edge entity.

r PT
Fo

7. Select the top, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.

Module 9 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 8. Right-click to query and select
the left, adjacent surface to the
edge entity.

9. In the Confirmation dialog box,

click No for tangency at the other
end.

y
10. In the Protrusion dialog box, click

nl
OK.

O
Task 2:
se
Define tangency at one end of a general blend protrusion.
U
1. Edit the definition of GEN_BLEND.
al

2. In the Protrusion dialog box, select Tangency and click Define.

rn

3. In the Confirmation dialog box, click Yes to define tangency at the

first end.
te

4. Right-click to query and select

the bottom, adjacent surface to
In

the edge entity.

C
r PT

5. Select the right, adjacent surface

Fo

to the edge entity.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 19

 6. Select the top, adjacent surface
to the edge entity.

7. Right-click to query and select

the left, adjacent surface to the

y
edge entity.

nl
O
8. In the Confirmation dialog box, se
U
click No for tangency at the other
end.
al

9. In the Protrusion dialog box, click

rn

OK.
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 Selecting Sections for Rotational and General
Blends
In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry
for the sections of rotational and general blend protrusion or
cut features.

• Sketcher coordinate system is not

required.
• Pick Curve options:

y
– Curve/Edge

nl
– Loop
– Chain

O
• Blend Vertex

se
• Start Point
• Section Info
U
• Delete
• Undo/Redo
al
rn

Figure 1 – Completed Blend

Feature
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Selecting a Loop

r
Fo

of Entities

Selecting Sections for Rotational and General Blends

In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry for the
sections of rotational and general blend protrusion or cut features. Unlike
sketching the geometry for a section, a Sketcher coordinate system is not
required.
Selecting geometry for blend sections is similar to using the Project
functionality because it enables you to pick geometry from existing curves or
edges using the following options:
• Curve/Edge – Enables you to select geometry edges one at a time.
• Loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges or entities. You can select a
surface or face and the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 21

 more than one loop exists, you must select the desired one. In Figure 2,
loop is being selected as geometry for the section.
• Chain – Enables you to select entities from a chain of edges or entities.
When two edges from the same surface or face are selected, you must
specify which chain of geometry you wish to be created.
Additional options available when selecting geometry for blend sections
include:
• Blend Vertex – Enables you to specify a blend vertex to add blend vertices
where needed.
• Start Point – Enables you to change the start point location in the section.
• Sec Info – Enables you to get information for selected entities. Options

y
include:

nl
– Entity – Get information about an entity.
– Intersection Point – Get information about the intersection of two entities.

O
– Tangent Point – Get information about an entity at the point of tangency.

se
– References – Get reference information about the section.
– Angle – Measures the angle between selected entities.
U
– Distance – Measures the distance between two parallel lines, two points,
or a point and line.
al

– Curvature Display – Displays curvature of splines in the section.

• Delete – Enables you to delete selected entities from the section.
rn

• Undo/Redo – Enables you to undo or redo Sketcher commands.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Selecting Sections for Rotational and
General Blends

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Select-Section_Solid SEL-SEC_BLEND_SOLID.PRT

Task 1: Create a general blend protrusion by selecting the blend sections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes drop-down menu. In the Shapes
drop-down menu, select Blend > Protrusion.

nl
3. In the menu manager, click General > Regular Sec > Select Sec

O
> Done.
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Done.

5. In the menu manager, click Pick

Curve > Sel Loop. se
U
6. Select the front surface of the
al

large “U” shape.

7. Notice the start point is at the
rn

upper-left vertex.
te

8. Click Done/Return > Done from

In

the menu manager.

9. In the menu manager, click Pick
C

Curve > Sel Loop.

10. Right-click to query and select
PT

the rear surface of the small “U”

shape.
11. Notice the start point is at the
r
Fo

upper-left vertex.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 23

 12. Click Done/Return > Done from
the menu manager.
13. Click No to stop selecting
sections.
14. In the Protrusion dialog box, click
Preview.
15. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
16. Notice that the resulting blend
protrusion is non-tangent.

y
nl
O
se
17. In the Protrusion dialog box,
select Tangency and click
Define.
U
18. Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box to specify tangency at
al

the first end.

rn

19. Select the twelve surfaces

adjacent to the corresponding
te

highlighted edges on the large

“U” protrusion.
In

20. Click Yes in the Confirmation

dialog box to define tangency at
C

the other end.

PT

21. Select the twelve surfaces

adjacent to the corresponding
highlighted edges on the small
“U” protrusion.
r
Fo

Module 9 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 22. Click OK in the Protrusion dialog
box.

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 25

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 Module 10

y
Sweeps with Variable Sections

nl
O
Module Overview

se
A sweep with a variable section is one of the most powerful features in Creo
Parametric, considering the variety and complexity of geometry it can be
used to create. A sweep utilizes a single section, which can be constant
U
or variable, and that is swept along one or more trajectories. The section
can vary its shape and orientation as it is pulled in different directions along
al

different trajectories. In addition, section dimensions can be varied along the

length of the sweep by using relations and a datum graph if desired.
rn

In this module, you learn how to use sweeps with variable sections to create
te

solid geometry, as well as how to use the many options that control the
section orientation and tangency.
In

Objectives
C

After completing this module, you will be able to:

PT

• Understand the theory behind sweeps with variable sections.

• Create sweeps using a constant section.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to trajectory section
r

plane control.
Fo

• Create sweeps with variable sections using constant normal direction

section plane control.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to projection section
plane control.
• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a sweep with a variable section.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using multiple trajectories.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using tangent trajectories.
• Analyze the different options and rules for a sweep with a variable section.
• Use trajpar and evalgraph in the creation of sweeps with variable sections.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 1

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections
Theory
A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that
can change shape and orientation along the feature.

• Create a solid or a surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Section

y
♦ Constant or variable.

nl
♦ Sits on an x-y-z frame.

O
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or more.

se
♦ Section attached to Origin Figure 1 – Creating a Sweep
trajectory. with a Variable Section
U
♦ Section sweeps along Origin
trajectory length.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Completed Feature

r
Fo

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change
shape and orientation along the feature. With the Variable Section Sweep
feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You add or remove
material while sweeping a section along one or more selected trajectories, by
controlling the section’s orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a
sweep using a constant section or a variable section.

The main components of the sweep tool are the section and trajectories. The
sketched section sits on an x-y-z frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory
and moves along its length to create geometry. The Origin trajectory is the
first selected trajectory. The Origin trajectory, along with the other trajectories
and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or an axis of the
coordinate system, define the orientation of the section along the sweep. In

Module 10 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Figure 1 and Figure 2, the curved datum curve is the Origin trajectory that the
rectangular section sweeps along.

The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin
trajectory and carries with itself the section to be swept. Axes of the
coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other references.
The frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it
is being moved along the origin trajectory. The frame is oriented by additional
constraints and references. The system places the sketched section in a
specified orientation with respect to these references and attaches it to a
frame that moves along the origin trajectory and sweeps the section.

y
nl
Best Practices

O
A good way to understand sweeps with variable sections is to think of yourself
on a roller coaster holding a picture frame. The Origin trajectory is the track

se
of the roller coaster. The frame you are holding is the frame referred to in this
topic. While you ride the roller coaster, you are moving along on the track, but
you can point and reorient the frame to a different direction while doing so.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 3

Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section
A sweep with a constant section does not change its shape as it
is swept along the trajectories.
• The orientation of the frame can
change.
• Merge ends:
– Constant sections only.
– Must be a solid surface at the
ends.

y
• Sketch placement point:

nl
– Specify a different point on
Origin trajectory.

O
– Does not affect the start point
of sweep.
Figure 1 – Constant Section Sketch

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Constant Section Figure 3 – Constant Section

without Ends Merged with Ends Merged
PT

Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section

r
Fo

When a sketched section sweeps along the Origin trajectory, the section
geometry can vary and change shape based on how the sketch is
constrained, dimensioned, and so on. The references to which the sketch is
constrained can even change the shape of the section. The section shape
can be variable because the sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory
and updates its shape accordingly.
You can, however, create a sweep that uses a constant section. A sweep
with a constant section does not change its shape as it is being swept along
the trajectories. Only the orientation of the frame on which the section lies
changes. If the Origin trajectory contains entities that are non-tangent, you
must use a constant section. Figure 1 displays a sweep with a constant
section along an origin trajectory with non-tangent entities.
When creating a sweep protrusion or cut, you can decide whether to merge
the ends of the sweep using the Merge ends option. The Merge ends option

Module 10 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 merges the ends of the sweep. There must be a solid surface at the ends
of the sweep to perform a merge. Figure 2 displays the sweep without the
merged ends option selected. Notice how the sweep feature does not fully
join to the surfaces of the solid walls. Figure 3 displays the sweep with the
merged ends option selected. Notice that the sweep feature extends to fully
intersect the inside surfaces of the solid walls.

You can also specify a different Sketch placement point. The Sketch
placement point option enables you to specify the point on the Origin
trajectory at which you want to sketch the section. The start point of the
sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default
location where you sketch the section if the Sketch placement point is empty.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps using a Constant
Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Constant-Section_Solid CONSTANT_SECTION.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using a constant

section.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
nl
2. Start the Sweep from the
Shapes group.

O
3. Select the curve.

se
U
4. Click Create Section .
al
rn

5. Click Create Section then

click Sketch View .
te

6. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
In

.
C

7. Click Center and Point and

PT

sketch a circle at the references

intersection.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the
r

circle diameter to 2.
Fo

9. Click OK .
10. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
11. Click Preview Feature .
12. Notice that the ends are not
merged with the existing
geometry.

Module 10 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 13. Click Resume Feature .
14. Select the Options tab.
15. Select the Merge ends check
box.
16. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 7

Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory
The moving frame of a sweep is always normal to a specified
trajectory when the Normal To Trajectory option is specified.
• Normal To Trajectory:
– Frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory by default.
– Frame can be normal to any
additional trajectory.
♦ Select N check box for that
trajectory.

y
nl
• X direction reference at start:
– Sets initial X-orientation of

O
frame.
Figure 1 – Section Normal to

se
U Origin Trajectory
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Section Normal to Figure 3 – Section Normal to Origin

Chain 1 Trajectory Trajectory, Different X Direction
r
Fo

Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

When the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, the moving
frame is always normal to the specified trajectory. By default, the frame is
created normal to the Origin trajectory, but it can be normal to any additional
trajectory. To switch the trajectory the frame is normal to, simply select the
N check box in the dashboard for that trajectory. In Figure 1, the frame is
normal to the Origin trajectory. In the Figure 2, the frame is normal to the
Chain 1 trajectory, and the geometry changes as a result.

Specifying the X Direction Reference at Start

Specifying the X direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of the
frame on which the sketch is created. The reference specifies the positive X

Module 10 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 for the sketch view. Specifying the X direction reference at start is similar to
specifying the Sketch Orientation Reference for a Sketch Orientation direction
that is always set to Right. In Figure 1, the X direction reference is the right
model surface highlighted in orange. In Figure 3, the X direction reference
has been changed to the right chamfer surface. As a result, the frame has
rotated slightly to face the new reference and the sketched geometry has as
well. Note that if you do not assign an X direction reference at start, the
system assigns a default direction.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Normal-Trajectory_Solid NORM_TRAJ.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to trajectory.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the Sweep from the
Shapes group.

y
nl
3. Select the left curve as the origin
trajectory.

O
4. Notice that the highlighted
trajectory with a yellow arrow

se
indicates the start.
U
5. Click Create Section then
al

click Sketch View .

6. Notice the default sketch
rn

orientation.
te

7. Click Cancel and click Yes

to quit Sketcher.
In

8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

Standard Orientation.
C

9. Select the References tab from

PT

the Sweep tab in the ribbon.

• Click in the X direction
reference at start collector
r

and select the right side of the

Fo

model.
10. Click Create Section then
click Sketch View .
11. Notice both the orientation and
the crosshairs at the sweep
origin.

Module 10 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 12. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
13. Click Corner Rectangle and
sketch the rectangle so that it is
symmetrical about the horizontal
reference and offset more to
the right side of the vertical
reference.
14. Click One-by-One and edit the

y
overall width to 40, the height to

nl
25, and the offset 15 to the left
side.

O
15. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.
16. Notice the sweep shape.
se
U
17. Select the References tab, press
CTRL, and select the curve on
al

the right as a second trajectory.

• Select the N check box to set
rn

Chain 1 to normal.
te
In

18. Click Create Section , then

C

click Sketch View and

PT

notice that the Sketch is the

same except that the Sketch
plane is reoriented.
r
Fo

19. Click Cancel , click Yes,

and orient to the Standard
Orientation.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 11

 20. Select the References tab and
select the N check box to set
Origin back to normal.
• Click in the X direction
reference at start collector
and select the right side
chamfer surface.
21. Notice the sweep shape and
click Complete Feature .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal
Direction
When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is
used, the Z-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction.

• The section becomes

parallel to the specified
reference.
• Geometry updates if the

y
reference is modified.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Origin
U
Trajectory
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Constant
Normal Direction Set to Figure 3 – Constant Normal Direction
Datum Plane Reference Modified
r
Fo

Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal Direction

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the
Z-axis, or section normal, of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction. This means the section becomes parallel to the specified reference.
The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references.

In Figure 1, the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, so the

geometry and sketch plane are normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2,
the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control has been specified, and
the datum plane has been specified as the reference. Consequently, the
Z-axis of the frame has become normal to the datum plane, and the geometry
has updated. In Figure 3, the datum plane angle has been flipped, and the
variable section sweep geometry has updated as well.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal
Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Contant-Normal-Direction_Solid CONSTANT_NORMAL.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using constant normal

direction section plane control.

y
1. Enable only the following Datum

nl
Display types: .

O
2. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.

se
3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
U
al
rn

4. Click Create Section , then

te

click Sketch View and

In

notice the sketch orientation.

5. Click OK and orient to the
C

Standard Orientation.
r PT

6. Select the References tab from

Fo

the Sweep tab of the ribbon.

• Edit the Section plane control
to Constant Normal Direction
and select datum plane
NORM.
7. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
8. Notice that the geometry has
updated.

Module 10 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click Create Section , then
click Sketch View and notice
the new sketch orientation.
10. Click OK .
11. Click Complete Feature
and orient to the Standard
Orientation.

12. Select datum plane NORM, then

y
right-click and select Edit.

nl
• Edit the angle value to -35 and
click Regenerate .

O
13. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

se
14. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
U
15. Notice that the geometry has
updated.
al

16. Click Complete Feature .

rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 15

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal
to Projection
When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used,
there are two levels of control provided for the moving frame.

• The Y-axis of the moving frame is

parallel to a specified direction.
• The Z-axis is tangent to the
projection of the origin trajectory
along the specified direction.

y
• You must specify the direction.

nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Normal to Projection
Diagram
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Y-Axis of Moving Frame

Figure 3 – Z-Axis Tangent to
Fo

Parallel to Direction Reference

Projection of Origin Trajectory

Creating Sweeps Normal to Projection

As illustrated in Figure 1, when the Normal to Projection Section plane control
is used, the Y-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction,
and the Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory along the
specified direction. The direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete references.

In Figure 2, the Direction reference specified is datum plane DTM1. The

Y-axis of the frame is parallel to the datum plane normal. If the datum plane
were rotated, the Y-axis of the frame would also rotate to remain parallel to
the datum plane normal. The resulting geometry would rotate as well.

Module 10 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 In Figure 3, the Direction reference is still datum plane DTM1. In this
particular view, the projection of the Origin trajectory onto this datum plane
is directly on top of the Origin trajectory. Notice that the Z-axis of the frame
remains tangent to this projection along the entire sweep length.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections
Normal to Projection
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Normal-Projection_Solid NORM_PROJ.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to projection.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. In the model tree, select

nl
ORIGIN_TRAJ to view it.

O
3. Right-click PROJECT_SAMPLE
and select Unhide.

Curve PROJECT_SAMPLE
se
U
is shown in the plane for
visual reference only.
al

4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

rn

5. Select the References tab from

the Sweep tab in the ribbon.
te

• Notice the available options.

In

• Edit the Section plane control

drop-down list to Normal To
Projection and select datum
C

plane DTM1.
PT

6. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
7. Notice the sweep curves in this
r

view.
Fo

8. Orient to the RIGHT view

orientation.
9. Notice that the sweep's Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the
origin trajectory in this view.

Module 10 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 10. Click Create Section , then
click Sketch View and
notice the sketch orientation.
11. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.

y
nl
O
12. Select the References tab and
click Flip to flip the direction.

se
13. Click Create Section , then
click Sketch View and
U
notice the sketch orientation.
al
rn
te
In

14. Click OK and orient to the

Standard Orientation.
C

15. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 19

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in
Sweeps
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation
around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep.

• Automatic:
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction.
• Normal To Surface:
– Y-axis of section plane normal to

y
surface on which Origin trajectory

nl
lies.

O
• X-Trajectory:
– X-axis of section plane “points” to
specified X-Trajectory

se
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control

r
Fo

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the
sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep. There are three types of
Horizontal and Vertical control:

• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.

Creo/PARAMETRIC calculates the direction of the x-vector such that
the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the sweep. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis
direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have
a straight segment at the start. In Figure 1, the X direction referenced at
start is the right surface of the base feature. Consequently, the X-axis of
the frame faces this X direction reference at start along the entire sweep.

Module 10 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 • Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section plane is normal to the
surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when
the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on a surface, one-sided edge
of a surface, two-sided edge of a surface or solid edge, a curve created
though an intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. The Next
option enables you to move to the next normal surface. In Figure 2, the
Next option is toggled to display the different possible solutions. In the
upper-left image of Figure 2, the normal surface is the back surface, while
in the upper-right image the right surface is the normal surface.
• X-Trajectory – The X-axis of the section plane passes through the
intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along
the sweep. In Figure 3, the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as
X-Trajectory. The X-axis of the section plane passes through the specified

y
X-Trajectory, where the Chain 1 trajectory is the X-Trajectory, along the

nl
entire sweep. Notice that the geometry twists according to the Chain
1 trajectory.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in Sweeps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Horizontal-Vertical-Control_Solid HORIZ_VERT.PRT

Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a variable section

sweep protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

nl
3. Select the References tab and

O
view the current settings.
4. Notice the two trajectories

se
selected.
U
al
rn

5. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
te
In
C
r PT

6. Orient to the RIGHT view

Fo

orientation.
7. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

Module 10 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 8. In the References tab, right-click
the X direction reference at start
and select Remove.

y
nl
9. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical
control to Normal To Surface.

O
10. Click Next four times to view the
possibilities.

se
U
al
rn

11. In the References tab, select the

te

X check box for Chain 1.

12. Click Complete Feature .
In
C
r PT
Fo

13. Select START from the model

tree, press CTRL, and select
END.
14. Notice that the X-direction of the
Sketch follows the X-trajectory to
reorient the sketch.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 23

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing
Multiple Trajectories
You can create sweeps with variable sections using multiple
trajectories.

• Each additional trajectory creates

a reference point in Sketcher.
• Reference points move along the
trajectories.
• Different geometry effects

y
are possible depending on

nl
dimensioning scheme.

O
se
Figure 1 – Section Dimensioned
to One Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Section Dimensioned to

Two Trajectories
PT

Figure 3 – Section Dimensioned

r

and Constrained Differently

Fo

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple

Trajectories
You can create sweeps using multiple trajectories. Each additional trajectory
defined creates a reference point in Sketcher for the section. The reference
points move along each of the trajectories as the sweep is created. If the
sketch is constrained or dimensioned to these trajectory reference points,
the section gets stretched or pulled by these trajectories to change its
shape. Depending on exactly how the section is constrained or dimensioned
to the reference points, different geometry effects are possible from the
same section and trajectory. In Figure 1, the section is constrained and
dimensioned only to one of the two trajectories and results in the geometry
shown. In Figure 2, the section is constrained and dimensioned to both

Module 10 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 trajectories. The right line of the rectangle is dimensioned along the X-axis to
the additional trajectory reference. The resulting geometry is pulled only in
the X-axis by the additional trajectory. In Figure 3, the midpoint of the right
rectangle line is constrained to the additional trajectory reference. Hence the
resulting geometry is pulled in both the X and Y axes.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections
Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Multiple-Trajectory_Solid MULT_TRAJ.PRT

Task 1: Create variable section sweeps using multiple trajectories.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

nl
3. Notice that there are two trajectories selected.

O
4. Click Create Section then click Sketch View .

se
5. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types: U
.
6. Click Normal and dimension
al

the right line to the additional

trajectory point. Type 5 as the
rn

value and press ENTER.

te

7. Click OK and orient to the

In

RIGHT view. Notice that the

additional trajectory does not pull
the Sketch to the right.
C

8. Orient to the FRONT view

PT

orientation and notice that the

additional trajectory does pull the
Sketch.
r
Fo

9. Click Create Section then

click Sketch View .
10. Press CTRL, select the right
side midpoint and the additional
trajectory point, then right-click
and select Coincident.
11. Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box to delete the
5.00 dimension.

Module 10 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click OK and orient to the
RIGHT view. Notice that the
additional trajectory pulls the
Sketch to the right.
13. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation and notice that the
additional trajectory also pulls
the Sketch.

y
14. Click Create Section then

nl
click Sketch View .

O
15. Select the top line's Horizontal
constraint and delete it.
16. Select the new weak dimension,
right-click and select Strong, se
U
then press ENTER.
al

17. Click OK and orient to the

Standard Orientation.
rn

18. Notice that only the right side

is affected by the additional
te

trajectory.
In

19. Click Complete Feature .

20. Right-click Sweep 1 and select
C

Suppress.
• Click OK.
PT

21. Right-click TRAJ_1 and select

r

Hide.
Fo

22. Press CTRL, select TRAJ_2 and

TRAJ_3, and then right-click and
select Unhide.
23. De-select all geometry.
24. Start the Sweep and select
the middle curve as the Origin.
25. Press CTRL and select the left
and right curves.

26. Click Create Section then

click Sketch View .

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 27

 27. Click Corner Rectangle
and sketch a rectangle using the
reference points as three of four
vertices.

28. Click OK and orient to the

y
Standard Orientation.

nl
29. Click Complete Feature .

O
se
U
This completes the procedure.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using
Tangent Trajectories
You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories.
• Enable tangency for a trajectory:
– Select the T check box.
– Use the Tangency tab.
• Centerline appears in Sketcher
for each tangent trajectory.
• Available options:

y
– None

nl
– Side 1/Side 2
Figure 1 – References and

O
– Selected Tangency Tabs

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Viewing Tangent Figure 3 – Resultant Tangent

C

Centerlines Geometry
PT

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent

r

Trajectories
Fo

You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories, which is useful when

you want the surfaces of the variable section sweep to be tangent with
existing geometry. You can specify a trajectory to be tangent either by
selecting the T check box in the References tab, or by using the Tangency
tab as shown in Figure 1.
For each tangent trajectory specified, a centerline appears in Sketcher. This
centerline pivots as necessary on the trajectory to maintain the tangency.
Therefore, any geometry constrained to the centerline remains tangent as
well along the sweep. In Figure 2, there is a tangent centerline at each
tangent trajectory. The resulting completed geometry is shown in Figure 3.
You can specify a tangent trajectory to be tangent to a surface or to the
surfaces of solid geometry. If you specify a solid geometry edge as the
tangent trajectory, the system enables you to specify to which of the adjacent

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 29

surfaces the resulting geometry will be tangent. The following tangent options
are available in the dashboard's Tangency tab:

• None – Removes the tangency from the trajectory.

• Side 1 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on
side 1 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within
the Tangency tab.
• Side 2 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on
side 2 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within
the Tangency tab.
• Selected – Enables you to manually specify surfaces for the tangent
centerlines in the sweep section.

y
In the References tab, there are two different T check boxes for each tangent

nl
trajectory. Toggling the selected check box switches the tangency from Side
1 to Side 2, and vice versa. De-selecting the T check box in the References

O
tab is the same as selecting None from the References drop-down list in
the Tangency tab.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections
using Tangent Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Tangent-Trajectory_Solid TANGENT_TRAJ.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion with tangent

trajectories.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

nl
3. Notice the Origin trajectory and

O
two additional trajectories.
4. Click Complete Feature .

se
U
al

5. Start the Sweep .

rn

6. Select the curve as the Origin.

te

7. Press CTRL and select the

upper-right and upper-left
In

surface edges.
C

You are selecting edges, not

curves, so that you can set
PT

up tangency to the adjacent

surfaces.
r

8. Select the References tab.

Fo

• Select the left T check box for

both Chain 1 and Chain 2.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 31

 9. Select the Tangency tab and
select Chain 1.
• Notice that it is set to be
tangent to TOP_SURF.
• Edit the References drop-down
list to Default 2, which should
specify RIGHT_SURF as the
tangent surface.
• Select Chain 2 and ensure
that it is set to be tangent to
LEFT_SURF.

y
nl
O
10. Select the References tab.

se
• Notice that the T check marks
have updated.
U
• Edit the Section plane control
drop-down list to Constant
al

Normal Direction, close the

References tab, and select
rn

datum plane FRONT.

te
In

11. Click Create Section .

C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click Conic and sketch the
conic, tangent to both the left
and right edges.
13. Click One-by-One and edit
RHO to 0.35.
14. Click OK .

y
nl
O
15. Click Complete Feature .

se
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 33

Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections
Trajectory Options and Rules
A variable section sweep has several trajectory options and
rules.

• Trajectory options:
– Flip trajectory direction
– Trajectory handles:
♦ Dragging

y
♦ Extend To

nl
♦ Trim At

O
• Rules:
– Tangency

se
– Trajectory requirements
Figure 1 – Trajectory Start
U
Point on Left
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Trajectory Start Figure 3 – Trajectory Both

Fo

Point on Right Trimmed and Extended

Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options

The following trajectory options are available when creating a variable section
sweep:

• Flip trajectory direction – You can click the arrow on the trajectory to flip
the sweep to the opposite end. The section is sketched at the indicated
start point on the trajectory. In Figure 1, the start point is located on the left
end of the trajectory. Consequently, the section is sketched from the left
side. Conversely, in Figure 2, the start point is located on the right end of
the trajectory, resulting in the section being sketched from the right side.

Module 10 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 • Trajectory handles – You can perform several operations on the trajectory
handles to cause different resultant geometry. The following three options
are available:
– Dragging – You can drag the trajectory end handles to shorten or
lengthen the trajectory. When you shorten the trajectory, the T value at
the end becomes a negative value; if you lengthen the trajectory, the T
value at the end becomes positive.
– Extend To – Extends the sweep along the current trajectory to a
selected reference. In Figure 3, the right endpoint of the trajectory has
been extended to datum plane OFFSET.
– Trim At – Trims the trajectory at a selected reference location. In Figure
3, the left endpoint of the trajectory has been trimmed at datum point

y
PNT0.

nl
To “reset” the trajectory to the original curve length, you can simply
re-select the curve.

O
se
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Rules
U
The following are rules regarding tangency for variable section sweeps:
al

• When using the Variable section option, all entities within the trajectory
rn

must be tangent.
• You can use the Constant section option for non-tangent trajectories.
te

• When using the Normal To Projection Section plane control, the projection
of entities on the reference must be tangent as viewed in the reference
In

direction.
The following are rules regarding trajectory requirements for variable section
C

sweeps:
PT

• An X-Trajectory cannot intersect the origin trajectory, except at the

endpoints.
r

• All trajectories must intersect the moving frame of the sweep, at least for
Fo

the desired length of the sweep.

• When using trajectories of different lengths, the shortest trajectory sets the
length of the sweep.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections
Trajectory Options and Rules

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Options-Rules_Solid OPTIONS_RULES.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the various trajectory options and rules for a
variable section sweep.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Start the Sweep .

O
3. Select the center curve as the
Origin.
4. Notice that the start point is on
the left. se
U
5. Click the arrow to flip the start
al

point to the right.

rn

6. Right-click and select Sketch.

7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
te

Standard Orientation.
8. Notice the crosshairs on the
In

right.
C
PT

9. Click Center and Point and

sketch a circle with center at the
crosshairs.
r

10. Click One-by-One and edit the

Fo

diameter to 40.
11. Click OK .

12. In the graphics window, click the

arrow to flip the start point to the
left.
13. Right-click and select Sketch.
14. Press CTRL+D to orient to
the Standard Orientation and
notice that the Sketch and
crosshairs are now on the left.
15. Click OK .

Module 10 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 16. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
17. Drag the left handle to -15.

18. Right-click the left handle and

select Trim At.

y
19. Select datum point PNT0.

nl
O
20. Right-click the right handle and
se
U
select Extend To.
21. Select datum plane OFFSET.
al
rn
te

22. Re-select the center curve as the

In

Origin.
23. Notice that it returns to the
C

default length.
PT

24. Press CTRL and select the upper

curve.
25. Select the References tab and
r

select the N check box for Chain

Fo

1.
26. Notice that the section is normal
to this Chain 1 trajectory.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 37

 27. Press CTRL and select the lower
curve as an additional trajectory.
28. Notice that the sweep is limited
to the shorted trajectory.
29. Click Complete Feature .
30. Click Plane Display and
Point Display to disable
their display.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 Using Trajpar with Solid Features
“Trajpar” stands for trajectory parameter.

• Value ranges from 0 to 1.

• Used in Sketcher relations.
• Make dimensions increase/
decrease along a length according
to a formula.
Figure 1 – Variable Section
Sweep, No Relations

y
nl
O
Figure 2 – Using Trajpar to se Figure 3 – Using Trajpar for
U
Vary Slope a Sine Wave
al

Using Trajpar with Solid Features

rn

“Trajpar” stands for trajectory parameter. Its value ranges from 0 to 1 and can
be used with variable section sweeps, helical sweeps, and composite curves.
te

In the context of a sweep, trajpar is a percentage along the sweep. At the

start point of the sweep, its value is 0. At the midpoint of the sweep, its value
In

is 0.5, and at the end of the sweep its value is 1. You can reference the
trajpar variable in section relations for a variable section sweep to control
C

section dimensions along the sweep length. For example, you can make
dimensions increase or decrease along the length according to a formula.
PT

Dimensions can even be driven to zero.

Figure 1 displays a “standard” variable section sweep feature that contains
no relations. The section is constant along the entire sweep length.
r
Fo

Figure 2 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher

relation for slope using trajpar in the following equation:
• sd3 = trajpar * 20 + 10, where sd3 is the section's width
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the section's width varies from 0 to 20,
plus 10 (therefore, varies from 10 to 30) along the sweep length.
Figure 3 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher
relation for a sine wave using trajpar in the following equation:
• sd3 = 20 + (5 * sin(trajpar * 360 * 4)), where sd3 is the section's width.
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the sine wave starts at 0 and has a
magnitude of 5 with four cycles, plus 20.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar with Solid Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Using_Trajpar [Link]

Task 1: Use trajpar to vary the section of a variable section sweep

protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the sweep section does

y
not vary.

nl
3. There are currently no relations
in this model.

O
4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
5. Right-click and select Sketch.
6. Select the Tools tab, then click se
U
Relations from the Model
Intent group.
al

• Notice that dimensions display

rn

in an sd# syntax.
• Identify the length dimension
te

number as sd3.
• Type /* Relation for Slope
In

and press ENTER.

• Type sd3=trajpar*20+10.
C

The length dimension

PT

varies from 0–20, plus 10

(therefore, 10–30).
r
Fo

7. Click OK in the Relations dialog

box, then select the Sketch tab
and click OK .

8. Click Variable Section if

necessary, then click Complete
Feature .
9. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

Module 10 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Use trajpar to make a sine wave section for a variable section
sweep protrusion.

1. Click the Model Intent

drop-down menu and select
Relations .
2. In the Relations dialog box, edit
the Look In drop-down menu
from Part to Section.
• Select the sweep feature.

y
• Comment out the previous

nl
relation by preceding the
equation with /*.

O
• Create a new line and type /*
Relation for Sine wave and

se
press ENTER.
• Type sd3=20+(5*sin(trajpar*
U
360*4)).

3. Click OK in the Relations dialog

al

box and click Regenerate .

rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 41

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid
Features
The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
graph, given the graph name and an x-value.

• EVALGRAPH returns Y-value.

• Trajpar provides the X-value.
• Syntax example:
– sd# = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1",

y
trajpar*360)/10

nl
O
Figure 1 – Sketched Section
Swept Along Trajectory

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Before and After using

Trajpar with EVALGRAPH Figure 3 – Datum Graph
C

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features

PT

In addition to the trajpar variable, you can also use the EVALGRAPH function
in a relation. The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
r

graph, given the graph name and an X-value. You can combine usage of the
Fo

EVALGRAPH function with the trajpar percentage variable to effectively move

along the X-axis of the graph, and return the associated Y values. In Figure
1, a section is swept along a circular trajectory to produce the result in the
left image of Figure 2. The section height location is then governed by a
relation that uses trajpar and the graph in Figure 3 to produce the result in
the right image of Figure 2.
The following syntax should be used in a relation when you want to use the
EVALGRAPH function:
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("graphname", trajpar*width_of_graph)*vert_scale
where the variables are defined as follows:
• sd# – The Sketcher dimension you wish to vary based on the graph.
• “graphname” – The name of the graph feature as it displays in the model
tree.

Module 10 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 • width_of_graph – The total X-distance in the graph feature. In Figure 3, the
width of the graph is 360, as the feature is being swept 360 degrees.
• vert_scale – An additional scaling factor that can be applied to increase the
Y-value of the graph feature.
The following are examples of relations created using trajpar with
EVALGRAPH:
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar * 100) / 2
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width
of the graph is 100 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the
graph is such that it halves the resultant value.
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar *360) / 10

y
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width

nl
of the graph is 360 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the
graph is such that it divides the resultant value by 10.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 43

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with
Solid Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Using_Trajpar_Graphs TRAJPAR_GRAPH.PRT

Task 1: Use datum graphs and trajpar to modify the geometry of a variable
section sweep cut.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of GRAPH1

nl
and click Done from the menu
manager.

O
3. Press ENTER to accept the
name for the feature.
4. Observe the sketch.
se
U
5. Click OK .
al

6. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

7. Notice the section is swept along
rn

a single trajectory.
8. Right-click and select Sketch.
te

9. Notice that the section is

In

controlled by three dimensions

only.
C
PT

10. Select the 4 dimension, then right-click and select Modify.

11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog box, drag the Sensitivity handle all
r

the way to the right.

Fo

• Drag the dimension from approximately 4 to 12.

• This range is what the trajpar relation will be doing.
• Click Quit Modification .

Module 10 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 12. Select the Tools tab then click
Relations from the Model
Intent group.
• Notice that the height
dimension number is sd7.
• Type /* Adjust the height
dimension for the section
based on GRAPH1 and press
ENTER.
• Type sd7 = EVALGRAPH (

y
"GRAPH1" , trajpar * 360 ) /
10.

nl
13. Click OK in the Relations dialog

O
box and notice that the Sketch
updates.
14. Also notice the message in the
message window. se
U
al
rn
te

15. Select the Sketch tab, then click

In

OK .
C

16. Click Variable Section if

necessary, then click Complete
PT

Feature .
17. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
r

18. Notice that the relation has

Fo

driven surfaces to zero.

19. Edit the definition of GRAPH1

and click Done from the menu
manager.
20. Press ENTER to accept the
name for the feature.
21. Modify the vertical dimensions to
40 and 120 as shown.
22. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 45

 23. Notice that the geometry has
updated.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 Module 11

y
Helical Sweeps

nl
O
Module Overview

se
The helical sweep feature enables you to create geometry by sweeping a
section along a helix, which is based on a pitch value. These sweeps are
commonly used to create solid springs or threads. However, they can also be
U
used to create helical swept surfaces, which may be used as construction or
reference geometry for other surfaces, or be used in the creation of datum
al

curves.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand the theory behind helical sweeps.
In

• Create helical sweeps for springs.

• Create helical sweeps for threads.
C

• Analyze the profile and pitch variations available for helical sweeps.
PT

• Utilize variable sections in helical sweeps.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 1

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory
Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other
helical geometry.

• Can be protrusions, cuts, or

surfaces.
• Helical sweep components:
– Sketch profile
– Sketch section
– Pitch values

y
nl
• Helical sweep options:
– Pitch points

O
– Section orientation
– Variable section Figure 1 – Threads Cut Into
– Helix direction
se a Part Model
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Helical Surface

PT

Figure 2 – Spring Geometry

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory

r
Fo

Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical

geometry. The dashboard interface enables helical sweeps to be created by
adding or removing material, or as surfaces. In Figure 1, the threads were
created by removing material, in Figure 2, the spring was created by adding
material, and in Figure 3, the helical geometry was created with surfaces.

Components of a Helical Sweep

The helical sweep feature uses each of the following components to generate
a helical shape:
• Sketch profile – Defines the shape and diameter of the helix. For example,
the sketched profile for a typical spring is a straight line parallel to the
center axis.
• Sketch section – Defines the shape to be swept along the helix. For
example, the section for a typical spring is a circular section.

Module 11 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Pitch values – The distance between the spring coils. The pitch value can
also be defined by a relation, for example, the profile length divided by
the number of coils.

Helical Sweep Options

The following options are available in the dashboard when defining a helical
sweep feature:

• Pitch points – Adding a single pitch value causes the pitch to remain
constant along the entire sweep profile, whereas adding multiple pitch
values enables you to define a graph that specifies the pitch values at
specific points.

y
nl
• Section orientation – Defines how
the cross-section is oriented as

O
it sweeps along the trajectory.
For Normal to trajectory, the
cross-section is oriented normal

se
to the trajectory, as shown in
the upper image of Figure 4.
U
For Through axis of revolution,
the cross-section lies in a plane
that passes through the axis of
al

revolution, as shown in the lower

rn

image of Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Cross-section Angle
te

• Variable section – Defines the behavior of the cross-section as it travels

In

along the trajectory of the sweep. Vary section enables the cross-section
to change size and shape, based on its position along the sweep
trajectory.
C
PT

• Helix direction – Defines which direction the trajectory is wrapped about

the helix. For Use Right Handed, the trajectory is defined using the
right-hand rule, and for Use Left Handed the trajectory is defined using
the left-hand rule.
r
Fo

Using Trajpar with a Helical Sweep

Helical Sweeps, like variable section sweeps, can utilize the trajpar
parameter. Trajpar can reference a datum graph using the EVALGRAPH
function if desired. Trajpar can also be used in section relations to control
dimensions as the section is swept along the helix. For example, trajpar
enables you to vary the spring section size along the swept helix length, or it
enables you to taper the end of a worm gear helix to blend into the shaft.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 3

Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs
You can create springs using helical sweep features.

• Spring characteristics:
– Typically normal to the
trajectory.
– Typically a round or rectangular
section.
• Tips:
– Create hooked ends or

y
extensions using an additional

nl
sweep.

O
– Use a relation to control pitch
based on length.

se
Figure 1 – Spring Profile
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Completed Right and

PT

Figure 2 – Spring Section Left Hand Springs

Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

r
Fo

You can create springs using helical sweep features. Typically, the helical
sweep feature maintains the following characteristics for solid spring models:
• The section is usually normal to the trajectory.
• The sketched section is usually round or rectangular in shape.
Figure 3 depicts two completed springs, one right-handed, the other
left-handed. Consider these tips for further enhancing the spring:
• You can create an additional sweep feature from the ends of the spring to
create hooked ends or extensions.
• You can write a relation to control the spring's pitch based on its length,
while maintaining an equal number of coils. This enables both natural,
as well as stretched or compressed, versions of the spring by simply
modifying its length.

Module 11 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Springs CREATE NEW

Task 1: Create a spring.

1. Click New , select Part, edit the Name to SPRING, and click OK.
2. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

y
3. From the Shapes group, select Helical Sweep from the Sweep

nl
types drop-down list.
4. Select the References tab.

O
5. Click Define to create the Helix sweep profile.

se
6. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree, as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch.
U
• Disable Plane Display .
al

7. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

rn

8. Click Sketch View from the Setup group in the ribbon.

te

9. Click Centerline from the

In

Sketching group and sketch

a centerline on the vertical
reference.
C

• Click One-by-One .
PT

• Right-click and select Axis of

Revolution.
10. Click Line Chain and sketch
r

a vertical line to the left of

Fo

the centerline, starting on the

horizontal reference.
• Click One-by-One .
11. Edit the revolved diameter to 4.
• Notice that the system
created the revolved diameter
automatically.
12. Edit the height to 10.
13. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 5

 14. Click Create Section from
the dashboard.
15. Click Center and Point from
the Sketching group and sketch
a circle as shown.
16. Click One-by-One and edit the
diameter to 1.

17. Click OK .

y
18. Select the Pitch tab.

nl
19. Edit the Pitch value from 1.00 to
2.00.

O
20. Click Left Handed from the

se
dashboard.
21. Click OK .
U
al

Task 2: Create a relation to control the spring pitch.

rn
te

1. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and

select Edit.
In

2. Right-click again and enable

Display Sketch Dimensions.
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 3. In the ribbon, select the Tools
tab.
4. Click Relations from the
Model Intent group.
5. Select pitch dimension d2.
6. In the Relations dialog box, type
=.
7. Select length dimension d1.
8. Type /6, where 6 is the desired

y
number of coils.

nl
9. The final equation should read
d2=d1/6.

O
10. Click OK from the Relations
dialog box and press CTRL+G.

11. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and

select Edit. se
U
12. Right-click again and enable
al

Display Sketch Dimensions.

13. Select the upper endpoint of the
rn

profile and drag to approximately

12.00, then to approximately
te

8.00.
14. Click in the background of the
In

graphics window to regenerate

the model.
C

15. Notice the new compressed

PT

spring shape, with the same

number of coils.

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 7

Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads
You can create threads using helical sweep features.

• Create protrusions or cuts.

– Protrusions add material to the
model.
– Cuts remove material the from
model.
• Usually use the Through axis of
revolution option.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Completed Threads

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Viewing the Sketched Figure 3 – Viewing the Sketched

Profile Section
C
PT

Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

You can create threads using helical sweep features. You can create threads
r

as both protrusions and cuts. Protrusions are created for adding material to
Fo

the model, while cuts are created to remove material from the model. You
typically use the Through axis of revolution option when using helical sweeps
to create threads.

Best Practices
Typically, you do not create threads for fasteners, threaded holes, and so on,
because the threads would be for purely cosmetic purposes. You typically
create helical sweeps for major helical model geometry that needs to be
visualized, or in cases where clearances are close and must be measured or
where tolerances are of importance.

Module 11 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Threads [Link]

Task 1: Create a helical sweep cut.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Helical Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down list in

y
the Shapes group.

nl
3. Click Left Handed and Remove Material from the dashboard.

O
4. Select the References tab.
• Select Through axis of revolution, if necessary.

se
• Click Define to define the Helix sweep profile.
5. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane.
U
• Click Sketch.
al

6. Enable only the following

rn

Sketcher Display types:

.
te

7. Click Sketch View from the

In

Setup group in the ribbon.

8. Click References .
C

• Select the left and right edges,

PT

and the top silhouette edge.

• Click Close.
r

9. Click Centerline from the

Fo

Sketching group and sketch

a centerline on the center
horizontal reference.
• Click One-by-One .
• Right-click and select Axis of
Revolution.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 9

 10. Click Line Chain and sketch
a horizontal line from left to right,
on top of the horizontal silhouette
edge reference, overhanging at
both ends.
11. Click Normal and dimension
each overhanging end to the
closest vertical edge, editing
each dimension to 3.
12. Click OK .

y
13. Edit the Pitch value to 20.

nl
14. Click Create Section .

O
15. Click Sketch View .
16. Click Palette and drag the
thread sketch into the graphics se
U
window, then click Close from
the dialog box.
al

• Drag the rotation handle to

rotate the sketch 180 degrees.
rn

• Right-click the location handle

and drag it to the midpoint of
te

the left, vertical line.

In

• Locate the sketch at the

intersection of the bottom
horizontal and left vertical
C

references.
PT

• Edit the Scale to 1 and click

Accept Changes .
17. Click OK .
r
Fo

18. Click Complete Feature .

19. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

Module 11 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Copy the helical sweep to make two sets of threads.

1. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the

model tree, click Copy and
then click Paste Special
from the Paste types drop-down
list.
2. In the Paste Special dialog box,
select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies

y
check box, and click OK.

nl
3. In the dashboard, click Rotate

O
.
• Select the axis running through

se
the part.
• Edit the rotation angle to 180.
U
• Click Complete Feature .
al

This completes the procedure.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 11

Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch
Variations
You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and
you can control the profile shape.

• Controlling pitch values along

length:
– Added via Pitch tab in
dashboard
♦ First added value is the

y
endpoint pitch.

nl
♦ Additional points are added

O
along length.
– Locate pitch value drag
handles using:

se
Figure 1 – Constant Profile, Constant
♦ By value
and Variable Pitch
U
♦ By Ratio
♦ By Reference
al

• Controlling profile shape:

– Profile must be tangent to use
rn

Normal to trajectory option.

te

– Example shapes:
♦ Straight line = Cylinder
In

♦ Angled line = Cone

C

Figure 2 – Variable Profile, Constant

PT

and Variable Pitch

Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

r
Fo

You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and you can
control the profile shape. Both of these options are valuable when you want
to create a nontraditional spring.

Controlling Pitch Values Along the Profile Length

You control the pitch along the profile by adding pitch points at the locations
you want the pitch to be different. The first value added is the endpoint
pitch. If no others are specified, then the pitch is constant as shown in the
left image of Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Additional pitch points are added along the sweep axis either through the
Pitch tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking and selecting Add Pitch Point.
When a point is added, a drag handle is available for it. The location of each
point can be defined by the following options:
• By value – Distance along sweep axis measured from the start point.

Module 11 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 • By reference – Point can snap to a datum point, datum plane, geometry
reference, and so on.
• By ratio – Measured as a length ratio along sweep axis.
As you specify the pitch at the various points, the system displays them on the
sweep axis so that you can view the pitch specified at each point. In the right
image of Figure 1 and Figure 2, the pitch begins at a value of 1, increases to
4, and then decreases back to 1. This is in contrast to the left image of Figure
1 and Figure 2, where the pitch is a constant value of 1 along the entire profile.

Controlling Profile Shape

You can control the profile shape based on how you sketch it. The following

y
are examples of the resulting spring shape for a given sketched section:

nl
• Straight line – Creates a cylindrical shaped spring, as shown in Figure 1.
• Angled line – Creates a cone-shaped spring.

O
• Multiple lines/arcs – Enables you to create a custom profile. For example,
in Figure 2 the profile was created with three vertical lines and two diagonal

se
lines connecting them. The resulting spring bows out in the center. You
can even use splines and conics.
U
To use the Normal to trajectory option, the profile entities must be tangent to
each other.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and
Pitch Variations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Profile-Pitch_Solid PROFILE-PITCH_SOLID.PRT

Task 1: Edit the shape of a spring by modifying its profile and pitch.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the model tree, expand Helical
Sweep 1.

O
3. Select Sketch 1, then right-click
and select Edit.

se
• Notice the profile sketch
consists of multiple line
U
segments.
• Notice the vertical centerline
al

and datum points on the

sweep axis (the centerline).
rn

4. Drag or edit the center dimension

te

to 6.
• Click in the background to
In

regenerate the model.

• Notice the changed profile of
C

the spring.
r PT
Fo

5. Click Undo from the Quick

Access toolbar.

Module 11 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 6. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, then right-click and select
Edit Definition.
7. Select the Pitch tab.
• Edit the existing pitch point to 1.00 and press ENTER.
• Click Add Pitch to create a pitch value at the end point, edit it to 1
and press ENTER.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the first datum
point from the bottom.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the second
datum point from the bottom.

y
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the third datum

nl
point from the bottom.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the fourth datum

O
point from the bottom.

se
8. Edit the pitch values as shown.
Press ENTER after typing each
U
value.
al
rn
te

9. Click Complete Feature .

In
C
r PT
Fo

10. Select Sketch 1, right-click,

select Edit and edit the center
dimension to 6.
• Click in the background to
regenerate the model.
11. Select the Sketch 1 feature in
the model tree, then right-click
and select Hide.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 15

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps
You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along
the length of the sweep.

• Along Trajectory options include:

– Keep constant section
– Vary section
• Constrain the section to other
geometry with Vary section.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Viewing the Original
Constant Section Helical Sweep

O
se
U
al

Figure 3 – Viewing the Variable

rn

Figure 2 – Redefining the Section Section Helical Sweep

te

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

In

You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of
the sweep. This is accomplished by selecting the desired Along Trajectory
C

option in the dashboard. Along Trajectory can be set to either of the following:
PT

• Keep Constant Section

• Vary Section
By setting the Vary Section option, you are able to constrain the section to
r

other geometry, as long as the system can regenerate the section along
Fo

the entire helical path. For example, a surface that followed the range of
the helical sweep can be utilized as a reference, whereas a datum plane
referenced in the sketch plane is not valid.

Module 11 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical
Sweeps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Variable-Section_Solid HELICAL_VAR-[Link]

Task 1: Redefine a helical sweep to use the Vary Section option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Notice the constant section in

nl
the helical sweep feature.

O
3. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Unhide. se
U
• Edit the definition of Extrude 1
al

and notice it is a surface.

• Click Complete Feature .
rn
te

4. In the model tree, right-click

Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit
In

Definition.
5. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select FRONT from the Named
C

Views drop-down list.

PT

6. Notice the current sweep profile

raises the center of the circular
section.
r
Fo

7. In the dashboard, click Create

Section .
8. Click Tangent from the
Constrain group in the ribbon,
and constrain the circle to be
tangent to the cylindrical surface.
• Click Delete from the Resolve
Sketch dialog box to delete the
dimension.
9. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 17

 10. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select Vary Section.
11. Click Complete Feature .
12. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Hide.
13. Notice that the current sweep
profile still raises the center of the
circular section, but the section
is constrained to the cylinder,

y
resulting in a smaller diameter.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Module 12

y
Swept Blends

nl
O
Module Overview

se
The swept blend feature utilizes multiple sections placed along a main
trajectory. The system creates geometry by blending between the sections
while sweeping along the trajectory path. The sections can vary in shape and
U
size along the swept blend. An additional trajectory can also be used to orient
the sections along the main trajectory.
al

In this module, you learn how to use the swept blend to create solid geometry.
rn

You also learn about the many options provided to control the orientation
and tangency of the sections.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand the theory behind swept blends.
C

• Create swept blends by selecting sections.

PT

• Create swept blends by sketching sections.

• Analyze the section options for a swept blend.
• Analyze swept blend section plane control.
r
Fo

• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.

• Analyze swept blend tangency.
• Analyze swept blend options.
• Analyze swept blend rules.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 1

Understanding Swept Blend Theory
A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend
multiple sections along a main trajectory.

• Create a solid or surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or two
– Sections

y
♦ Two sections minimum

nl
♦ Each must have same

O
number of entities
♦ Select or sketch sections Figure 1 – Swept Blend Feature

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Trajectories Highlighted Figure 3 – Sections Highlighted

te

in Green in Green
In

Understanding Swept Blend Theory

A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple
C

sections along a main trajectory. With the Swept Blend feature, you can
PT

create a solid or surface feature. You can add or remove material, and the
sections can be open or closed.

Trajectory Information
r
Fo

A swept blend can have two trajectories: an Origin trajectory (required) and
a Secondary trajectory (optional). The swept blend in the figures uses both
an Origin trajectory and a Secondary trajectory. To define a trajectory of the
swept blend, you can select a sketched curve, a chain of datum curves, or
edges. Each selected trajectory has end handles that you can dynamically
drag if you want the feature to not follow the entire trajectory. You can specify
a length from the end of the trajectory, or you can use the Trim At and Extend
To options. Plus, you can use SHIFT to snap the trajectory endpoint onto
other existing geometry.

Section Information
Each Swept Blend feature must have at least two sections, and additional
sections may be added between these two sections. While the sections may
change shape, they must each contain the same number of entities. The one
exception to this rule is that you can blend sections to a point. You can also

Module 12 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 add blend vertices to sections that need additional entities to equal those of
other sections. Each blend vertex counts as one entity.
You can sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices
or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you specify
the direction of the sketch plane (the Z-axis) and the horizontal and vertical
direction to that plane (the X or Y axis).
You can use the Selected Sections option to select existing sketches, or edge
and curve references and use them as sections for a swept blend.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 3

Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections
You can select existing sketches to become sections for a swept
blend feature.

• Insert
– Enables you to select the next
section
– Section inserted after currently
selected section
– # entities in section displayed

y
nl
• Remove
– Removes currently selected

O
section
• Details
– Enables advanced selection
se
Figure 1 – Selecting Sections
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Inserting a Section Figure 3 – Start Point Moved

Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

C
PT

After selecting an Origin trajectory, you can select existing sketches or edge
and curve references to become sections for the swept blend protrusion or
cut.
r

Options for selecting sections include:

Fo

• Insert – Used to insert the next section after the currently selected section.
If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert. In
Figure 1, two sections are selected, one at the trajectory start and another
at the trajectory end. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a new section was inserted.
Selected sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The
system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use
the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you
can blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three
arcs. In the figures, a circle is blended into a rectangle.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
• Details – Opens the Chain dialog box for advanced selection tools for
selecting series of chains for sections.

Module 12 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Manipulating Selected Sections
The start point is displayed on the selected section. The system lines up the
start points from each section. A twisting effect occurs if the start points for
each of the sections are not in same relative position, as shown in Figure 2.
You can select and drag the start points to a different vertex to remove or
change the twisting effect, as shown in Figure 3.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Selecting
Sections
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Select_Sections SELECT_SECTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by selecting sections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select SEC_1.

y
3. Notice that the feature is a

nl
rectangle.

O
4. Edit the definition of SEC_2.
5. Enable only the following se
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al

6. Notice that this section is a circle

rn

divided into four entities.

7. Click OK .
te

8. Edit the definition of SEC_3.

In

9. Notice that this section consists

of four arcs.
C

10. Click OK .
PT

11. De-select all geometry.

12. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
r
Fo

13. Click Swept Blend from the

Shapes group in the ribbon.
14. Click Solid from the
dashboard, if necessary.
15. Select the trajectory.

16. In the dashboard, select the

Sections tab.
• Select the Selected Sections
option.
17. Select the right circle as Section
1.

Module 12 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 18. In the Sections tab, click Insert
and select the rectangle as
Section 2.

19. In the graphics window, select

the Section 1 tag, right-click,
and select Insert Section.
20. Notice that a new section is

y
inserted, making Section 2 now
Section 3.

nl
21. Select the left circle as Section 2.

O
22. Notice the twisting effect in the
geometry.

23. Drag the start point up to the

next entity endpoint to remove se
U
the twisting effect.
al
rn

24. Click Complete Feature .

te
In
C
PT

25. In the model tree, right-click

SEC_1 and select Edit.
r

26. Edit the angle from 0 to –20

Fo

and click Regenerate in the

Operations group in the ribbon.
27. Spin the model, and notice that
the sections do not have to be all
the same angle.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 7

Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections
You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature
if desired.

• Select trajectory
– You can flip the trajectory
direction.
• Select section location
– Default locations

y
– Optional locations

nl
• Sketch the section

O
– Start point
• Manage Sketched Sections Figure 1 – Sketching Sections

se
– # entities in section
displayed
U
– Insert
– Remove
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Changed Section Location

In

Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

C

You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired.
PT

Use the following procedure to create swept blend protrusions or cuts by

sketching the sections.

Selecting the Trajectory

r
Fo

First, you must select the Origin trajectory. The direction of the sweep along
the trajectory is displayed with an arrow. You can flip the direction of the
arrow, which reverses the direction of the swept blend.

Selecting the Section Location

Next, you can select where to place a section along the trajectory. The
default locations are the trajectory start and trajectory end, both denoted
by a green “X” symbol, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Optionally, you
can also select vertices or datum points as the location to place a section.
In Figure 1, Section 2 is placed at the vertex of the arc and line. When
you select the location of the section, it is specified in the Section Location
collector. To relocate a section after sketching it with this option, select the
section, activate the Section Location collector, and select a different chain

Module 12 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 end, vertex, or datum point as the section location. In Figure 2, the section
location for Section 2 has been relocated to the right trajectory endpoint.
You cannot locate a section at a sharp corner of a trajectory,
because the system is not able to determine the orientation of the
section at that point.

Sketching the Sections

Once the location for a section is specified, you can sketch that section.
When sketching the section in Sketcher, a start point appears on the first
entity sketched. The system lines up the start points from each section when
they are swept along the trajectory. A twisting effect occurs if the start points

y
are not in the same relative position. You can change the location of the

nl
start point within Sketcher by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and
selecting Start Point. Unlike selecting sections for creating swept blends, you

O
cannot move the start point except within Sketcher.

Managing Sketched Sections

se
The sketched sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard.
U
The system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use the
divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can
al

blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs.
rn

Within the Section tab of the dashboard, the following two options are
available for managing sketched sections:
te

• Insert – Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section.
In

If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Sketching
Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Sketch_Sections SKETCH_SECTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by sketching a section.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

y
nl
2. Click Swept Blend from the Shapes group in the ribbon.
3. Click Solid from the dashboard, if necessary.

O
4. Select the curve as the trajectory.

5. In the dashboard, select the

Sections tab.
se
U
6. Notice that the ends are available
points for sketching sections.
al

7. Select the left endpoint and click

rn

Sketch.

8. Enable only the following

te

Sketcher Display types:

In

.
9. Click Corner Rectangle and
C

starting in the upper-left corner,

sketch a symmetrical rectangle.
PT

10. Click One-by-One and edit the

width and height to 150 and 100,
respectively.
r
Fo

11. Click OK .

12. In the Sections tab, click Insert.

13. Select the vertex between the
line and arc and click Sketch.

Module 12 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 14. Click Sketch View .
15. Click Center and Point from
the Circle types drop-down list
and sketch a 100 diameter circle.
16. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch two
centerlines at angles of 45.

17. Click Divide from the Editing

y
group and divide the circle
at each of the four centerline

nl
intersections.

O
18. Select the upper-left corner, then
right-click and select Start Point.

19. Click OK and orient to the

Standard Orientation. se
U
20. Select the far right trajectory
endpoint, and notice that the
al

section relocates.
rn

21. In the Sections tab, select

te

Section 1 and click Insert.

In

22. Select datum point PNT0 from

the model tree and click Sketch.
C

23. Click Sketch View .

PT

24. Click Corner Rectangle

and, starting in the upper-left
corner, sketch a symmetrical
rectangle.
r
Fo

25. Click One-by-One and edit

both the width and height to 75.
26. Click OK .

27. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.
28. Right-click and select Trajectory.
29. Click the trajectory direction
arrow to flip the blend.
30. Notice that the sections maintain
the same reference numbers.
31. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 11

 32. Select datum point PNT0 in the
model tree, then right-click and
select Edit.
33. Edit the point ratio value from 0.5
to 0.7 and click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options
There are numerous section options available when creating
a swept blend feature.
• Z-Rotation
– Each section independent
– Range: +/-120 degrees
• Section X-axis directions
– Sets X-axis direction for active
section

y
– Only available with Automatic

nl
Horizontal/Vertical control

O
• Blend vertices
– Sketched sections:

se
♦ Managed in section Figure 1 – Blend Vertices
– Selected sections:
U
♦ Managed using Sections tab
and drag handles
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Modified Section

C

X-Axis Directions Figure 3 – Z-Rotation Modified

PT

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

Consider the following section options that are available when creating a
swept blend protrusion or cut.
r
Fo

Adding Blend Vertices

For a sketched section, blend vertices are created and managed in the
section itself, within Sketcher. That is, you add blend vertices within Sketcher
while sketching the section.
For selected sections, blend vertices are added using the Add Blend Vertex
option in the Sections tab of the dashboard. Each blend vertex displays in the
graphics window as a drag handle. You can move the blend vertex locations
by dragging their handles. In Figure 1, two blend vertices were added to the
rear section and dragged to the top corners.
You cannot add a blend vertex at the start point of a section.
You can add blend vertices only to start and end sections that are
located at trajectory vertices. You cannot add blend vertices to
intermediate sections.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 13

Modifying the Section X-Axis Directions
The Section X-axis directions option enables you to set the X-axis direction
for the active section. When Horizontal/Vertical control in the References tab
is specified as Automatic, the Section X-axis directions in the Sections tab
is synchronized with the X direction reference at the start in the References
tab. This option is available only when Automatic is specified as the
Horizontal/Vertical control. In Figure 2, the X-axis direction was modified from
one datum plane to another datum plane. Notice how the section reoriented.

Modifying the Z-Rotation

You can specify the section’s rotation angle about the Z-axis for each location
at which a sketched section is defined. Rotation angles can range in value

y
between –120 and +120 degrees. In Figure 3, the Z-rotation was modified for

nl
each section individually to create different geometry.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Section_Options [Link]

Task 1: Edit the swept blend Z rotation and section X-axis direction.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Swept
Blend 1.

y
3. Select the Sections tab and

nl
select Section 2.
• Edit the Rotation angle to 20.

O
4. Select Section 3 and click

se
Sketch.
5. Enable only the following
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al

6. Click Sketch View from the

rn

Setup group in the ribbon.

te

7. Notice the default X-direction in

the Sketch view.
In

8. Press CTRL, select both

construction lines, right-click,
and select Geometry.
C
PT

9. Click Delete Segment and

delete all of the top, right, and
bottom line segments.
r
Fo

10. Click One-by-One , then

select the right triangle point and
right-click Blend Vertex.
11. Notice that the triangle faces in
the X-direction.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 15

 12. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.
13. In the Sections tab, click in
the Section X-axis directions
collector and select datum plane
DTM1 from the model tree.
14. Notice the change in geometry
orientation.
15. Click Complete Feature .

y
Task 2: Create a swept blend protrusion and add blend vertices to a

nl
section.

O
1. Click Swept Blend from the

se
shapes tab in the ribbon.
2. Click Solid from the
U
dashboard, if necessary.
3. Select TRAJ_2 as the trajectory.
al
rn
te
In

4. In the dashboard, select the

Sections tab.
• Select the Selected Sections
C

option.
PT

5. Select the rectangle as Section

1.
r
Fo

6. In the Sections tab, click Insert

and select the front sketch as
Section 2.
• Notice that the # column in
the Sections tab has 4 and 6
entities, respectively.

Module 12 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 7. Select Section 1 and drag the
start point to the lower-left.
8. Click Add Blend Vertex and
drag it to the upper-right corner.
9. Click Add Blend Vertex again
and drag it to the upper-left
corner, if necessary.
10. Notice that the # column in the
Sections tab now has 6 and 6
entities.

y
11. Click Complete Feature .

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 17

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control
You can modify the swept blend's moving section frame
orientation to create different geometry.
• Section plane control options:
– Normal To Trajectory
♦ Normal to Origin trajectory
by default
– Constant Normal Direction
♦ Section Z-axis parallel to

y
specified reference direction

nl
– Normal To Projection
♦ Origin trajectory projected

O
onto specified reference
Figure 1 – Section Normal
to Trajectory

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Section Constant Figure 3 – Section Normal

Normal Direction to Projection
PT

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

Each sketched or selected section is placed on a moving section frame. You
r

can adjust the orientation of this moving section frame using section plane
Fo

control settings in the References tab of the dashboard.

The following three section plane control options are available:
• Normal To Trajectory – The moving section frame is always normal to a
specified trajectory. By default, the section frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory. If you have specified a Secondary trajectory, you can make the
section frame normal to it by selecting the N check box in the References
tab for the Secondary trajectory. In Figure 1, the section frame has been
specified normal to the Secondary trajectory. Notice that the section is
perpendicular to this Secondary trajectory.
• Constant Normal Direction – The Z-axis (or section normal) of the moving
frame is parallel to a specified direction. In the case of a datum plane, the
Z-axis is parallel to the plane normal direction, so the section becomes
parallel to the plane. The Direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete the reference to which the Z-axis is parallel. In Figure 2, the

Module 12 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 section plane control has been set to Constant Normal Direction, with the
direction reference set to a datum plane. Notice that the section is parallel
to the datum plane.
• Normal To Projection – The section frame remains normal to the Origin
trajectory as it is viewed along the projection direction. The Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory at the direction specified.
In Figure 3, the section plane control has been set to Normal To Projection.
The Origin trajectory is projected onto Direction reference TOP. The
resulting section frame is normal to this projected Origin trajectory.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane
Control

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Section_Plane SECTION_PLANE.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the section plane control options available for a swept
blend protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select TRAJ_1.

nl
3. Orient to the RIGHT view

O
orientation.
4. Notice that the trajectory is

se
curved in this view, also.
5. Orient to the Standard
U
Orientation.
al

6. Edit the definition of Swept

Blend 1.
rn

7. In the dashboard, select the

References tab.
te

• Notice that the Section plane

control is Normal To Trajectory.
In

• Press CTRL and select the

additional trajectory.
C

8. Orient to the TOP view

PT

orientation.
9. In the References tab, select the
N check box for the Secondary
r

trajectory.
Fo

10. Notice that the section is normal

to the Secondary trajectory.

11. In the References tab, select

the N check box for the Origin
trajectory.
• Right-click Secondary and
select Remove.
12. Reorient the model and notice
that the section is normal to the
Origin trajectory.

Module 12 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 13. Edit the Section plane control
from Normal To Trajectory to
Constant Normal Direction.
14. Enable Plane Display .
15. Select datum plane DTM1, orient
to the TOP view orientation, and
notice that the section is parallel
to the datum plane.
16. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

y
nl
17. Edit the Section plane control
from Constant Normal Direction

O
to Normal To Projection.
• Select the References tab to

se
close it and select datum plane
TOP from the model tree.
• Select the References tab
U
and click Flip.
al

18. Orient to the RIGHT view

orientation.
rn

19. Notice that the section is normal

to datum plane TOP.
te

20. Click Complete Feature .

In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 21

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a
Swept Blend
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame
rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along
the swept blend feature.

• Automatic
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction
• Normal To Surface

y
– Y-axis “points” normal to

nl
selected surface
• X-Trajectory

O
– Only available with two
trajectories
– X-axis of section plane “points”
to Secondary trajectory se
U
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control

r
Fo

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation
around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend
protrusion or cut. There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.
Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the
swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the swept blend. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the
X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that
have a straight segment at the start.
When the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Automatic, you can
specify the X-Direction reference at start. The X-Direction reference at start

Module 12 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 sets the initial X-orientation of the section frame. The X-orientation is the
positive X direction in the sketch view for the section. You can either specify
this reference or leave it at Default, meaning that the system specifies a
default orientation. In Figure 1, the Horizontal/Vertical control is set to
Automatic. In turn, the X-Direction reference at the start is a datum plane.
• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section frame points in the direction
of the surface selected, normal to any surface associated with the Origin
trajectory. This is the default selection when the Origin trajectory has
at least one associated surface. Click Next to toggle through possible
surfaces, as shown in Figure 2.
• X-Trajectory – This option becomes available when there is both an Origin
and Secondary trajectory specified. The X-trajectory is the Secondary
trajectory, and it must be at least as long as the Origin trajectory. For this

y
option, the X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection

nl
point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep,
as shown in Figure 3.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in a Swept Blend
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Horiz_Vert [Link]

Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
nl
2. View the geometry:
• Orient to the TOP view

O
orientation.
• Orient to the RIGHT view

se
orientation.

3. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

U
Standard Orientation.
al

4. Edit the definition of Swept

Blend 1.
rn

5. In the dashboard, select the

References tab and view the
te

current settings.
6. Notice that the current
In

Horizontal/Vertical control is
specified as Normal To Surface
C

in the drop-down list.

• Click Next four times to view
PT

the different possibilities.

7. Select Automatic from the

r

Horizontal/Vertical control
Fo

drop-down list.
8. Notice that the sections have
been reoriented.

9. Click in the X direction reference

at start collector, select the
References tab to close it, and
select datum plane RIGHT from
the model tree.
• Select the References tab to
open it and click Flip.

Module 12 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 10. In the graphics window, select
Section 2, then right-click and
select Sketch.
11. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types: .

12. Click Sketch View from the

Setup group in the ribbon.
13. Notice the current X direction.
14. Click OK .

y
nl
15. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

O
16. Right-click and select Trajectory,
if necessary.
17. Press CTRL and select the
Secondary trajectory. se
U
al
rn

18. Select the References tab.

• Edit the Horizontal/Vertical
te

control from Automatic to

X-Trajectory.
In

• Notice that the X check

box is now selected for the
C

Secondary trajectory.
19. Notice that the sections have
PT

been reoriented.

20. Right-click and select Sketch.

r
Fo

21. Click Sketch View .

22. Notice the new X-direction.
23. Click OK .
24. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 25

Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency
You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end
of the swept blend feature.

• Tangency conditions:

– Free

– Tangent

– Normal

y
• Sketcher point conditions:

nl
– Sharp
Figure 1 – Geometry Before

O
– Smooth
Tangency

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Smooth and Sharp

Figure 2 – Geometry After Tangency Conditions
In

Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

C

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept
PT

blend protrusion or cut. You can change tangency condition settings either in
the Tangency tab of the dashboard or by right-clicking the tangency condition
icons in the graphics window and selecting the desired condition.
r

There are three available tangency conditions:

Fo

• Free – The start or end section is a free end; tangency is not defined.

• Tangent – The specified end is to be tangent to the selected adjacent

surfaces. You must specify the adjacent surface to which each edge is to
be tangent. The Entities collector advances automatically to the next entity.

• Normal – The start or end of the swept blend is normal to the section
plane. The Entities collectors are not available and references are not
required.
If a Sketcher point is used at the start or end of the swept blend feature, you
can define the condition for the geometry as Sharp or Smooth.
You cannot define tangency for a thin protrusion.

Module 12 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Tangency [Link]

Task 1: Add tangency constraints to the End Sections of a swept blend

protrusion.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Swept

y
Blend 2.

nl
3. In the dashboard, select the
Tangency tab.

O
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the Start Section from Free

se
to Tangent.
• Select the surface adjacent to
U
the highlighted edge.
4. Continue selecting the remaining
al

three adjacent surfaces. Notice

that the first surface highlights
rn

after all four surfaces have been

selected.
te

5. In the graphics window,

In

right-click the icon for the

End Section and select Tangent.
C

• Select the surface adjacent to

the highlighted edge.
r PT
Fo

6. Continue selecting the remaining

three adjacent surfaces.
7. Notice the change in the
geometry shape.
8. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 27

Task 2: Edit the tangency for a Sketcher point condition of a swept blend
protrusion.

1. Edit the definition of Swept

Blend 1.

y
nl
2. Select Section 2, if necessary.
3. Right-click and select Sketch.

O
4. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types: .
5. Drag a window around the
U
existing rectangle sketch and
delete it.
al

6. Click Point from the

Sketching group and place a
rn

sketch point at the crosshairs.

te

7. Click OK .
In

8. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.
C

9. Click Preview Feature .

10. Notice the sharp cap that has
PT

formed at the end.

r
Fo

11. Click Resume Feature .

12. In the dashboard, select the
Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the End Section from Sharp
to Smooth.
13. Click Complete Feature .

Module 12 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 14. Right-click Draft 1 and select
Edit.
15. Edit the draft angle from 10 to
-10 and click Regenerate .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 29

Analyzing Swept Blend Options
You specify blend control for a swept blend feature.

• Blend control
– No blend control
– Set perimeter control
♦ Create curve through center
of blend.
– Set cross-section area control

y
♦ Predefined cross-sections
cannot be edited.

nl
Figure 1 – No Blend Control

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Cross-Section
C

Figure 2 – Options Tab Area Control

PT

Analyzing Swept Blend Options

You can control swept blend geometry by controlling the cross-sectional
r

area between defined sections and by controlling how the perimeter varies
Fo

between the sections. The following options are available:

• No blend control – No blend control is specified for the swept blend. In
Figure 1, no blend control is specified.
• Set perimeter control – Forces the perimeter of the blend to vary linearly
between sections. You can also have the system create a curve through the
center of the blend. This curve becomes a part of the swept blend feature.
• Set cross-section area control – Enables you to specify the cross-section
area at designated locations of the swept blend. A table displays each
specified location and the cross-sectional area at that location. The
predefined cross-sections display in the table but the area cannot be edited
in this table. To add additional locations, click in the table to activate it,
then select points on the trajectory and edit the desired cross-section
area. In Figure 2, the Options tab displays the four locations where the
cross-section's area is controlled. For Sections 1 and 2, the Area cell is

Module 12 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 grayed out because these sections are predefined. The resulting geometry
for the specified cross-section control is shown in Figure 3.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Swept_Blend_Options SW—BL_OPTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Analyze swept blend options.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Edit the definition of Swept

y
Blend 1.

nl
3. Select the Options tab.

O
• Select Set perimeter control.
• Notice that the preview

se
geometry updated.
• Select the Create curve
U
through center of blend
check box.
al

4. Click Preview Feature .

5. From the In Graphics toolbar,
rn

select Wireframe from the

Model Display types drop-down
te

menu.
In

6. Notice the new center curves

close to the original trajectory.
C

7. Select Shading from the

PT

Model Display types drop-down

menu.
8. Click Resume Feature .
r
Fo

9. Select the Options tab.

• Select Set cross-section
area control.
• Notice the defined Area for
Section 1 and Section 2.
These areas are defined
by the sketch or selected
section and cannot be
modified in this table.

Module 12 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 10. Select the vertex between the
arc and line.
11. In the Options tab, edit the Area
from approximately 9750 to
12000.

12. Press CTRL and select datum

point PNT0.
13. Edit the Area to 8500.

y
nl
14. Click Complete Feature .

O
se
15. Select datum point PNT0 in the
model tree, then right-click and
select Edit.
U
16. Edit the ratio from 0.3 to 0.7.
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 33

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules
There are rules and restrictions to consider when creating a
swept blend feature.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – A Swept Blend Cannot Figure 2 – Creating a Swept Blend
Intersect Itself Over Non-Tangent Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Start Points Not Lining Up Figure 4 – Using Blend Vertices

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules

r
Fo

Consider the following rules and restrictions when creating a swept blend
feature:
• For a closed trajectory profile, one section must be located at the start point
and at least one other section at another location.
• A swept blend cannot intersect itself. Common causes of intersection are:
– The trajectory intersects itself.
– A section that is too wide is swept around too sharp of a corner, resulting
in intersecting geometry.
In Figure 1, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory,
resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red
cross-section lines in the front view display that the geometry does not
overlap. In the right image, however, the section is too wide for the corner
radius, resulting in intersection, and therefore failing, geometry.

Module 12 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 • Creating a swept blend over a non-tangent trajectory results in a mitered
effect in the geometry. In Figure 2, notice the sharp corner due to the
non-tangent trajectory.
• Section references at the chain start and end points of the trajectory are
dynamic and update if the trajectory is trimmed.
• When using the Normal To Trajectory section plane control option, the
secondary trajectory must consist of entities that are tangent to one
another.
• Section locations can be referenced to model geometry, but modifying the
trajectory may invalidate the references and cause the swept blend to fail.
• If the start points do not line up between sections, a twisting effect is
created, and this twisting effect can cause a feature to fail. In Figure 3, the

y
swept blend start points are mismatched, resulting in the twisted geometry.

nl
You can also view the resulting geometry when the start points of the same
sections are properly aligned.

O
• If there are unequal quantities of entities between sections, you must divide
them or use blend vertices to create an equal number. In Figure 4, one

se
section of the swept blend has four entities, while the other has six. It
was necessary to add two blend vertices to the section containing fewer
entities, and the resulting preview geometry can be seen.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 35

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 Module 13

y
Advanced Layers

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Layers provide a means of organizing model items, such as features,
datum planes, parts in an assembly, and even other layers, so that you can
perform operations on those items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify
U
geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features
or assembly components in the graphics window. Layers can also be used
al

to perform actions, such as suppress all the items in a layer at once. You
can create rules in a layer so that items that fulfill the rule are automatically
rn

added to the layer.

te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand layers.
C

• Create and manage layers.

PT

• Create layer rules.

• Create layers in assemblies.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 1

Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize
features, components, and even other layers.

• Managed in layer tree

• Uses include:
– Collectively perform operations
♦ Hide/Unhide
♦ Select
– Model management

y
• Layer types include:

nl
– Default

O
– Automatic
– User-created

se
U
al

Figure 1 – Viewing the Layer Tree

rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Hiding Items using Layers

r
Fo

Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assembly
parts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you need
and associate items with more than one layer.

Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer.
Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control
the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you
to more easily perform tasks.
The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include:
• Hiding and Unhiding Layers — You can hide and unhide layers in parts and
assemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 2,

Module 13 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing any
datum axes on the model.
Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items.
However, there are significant differences:
– When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of
the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphics
window.
– A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as mass
properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations.
• Selecting Items on the Layer — Layers enable you to easily select
multiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is a
beneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such as

y
needing to select 82 out of 100 part axes.

nl
Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them.
Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming

O
them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified
representation.

The Layer Tree

se
U
You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers.
You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers
al

from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon
rn

again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the top of
the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 1 displays the layer tree.
te

Layer Types
In

There are three types of layers that you can create in a model:
C

• Default — Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If your

company uses part and assembly templates containing default layers,
PT

Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model to

specific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the same
initial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer control
at the assembly level since each model’s layers are identically named.
r
Fo

• Automatic — When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items
are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer.
• User-Created — You can create your own layers in a model and add items
to them manually.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 3

Creating and Managing Layers
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and
selecting geometry items or components to add from the model
tree or the graphics window.

• Layer Properties:
– Name
– Contents
– Rules
• Different icons for layers with or

y
without rules

nl
• Set the Active Layer
• Status

O
– Save

se
– Reset
– Warning Figure 1 – Layer Properties
U
Dialog Box
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Layer with No Rule Figure 3 – Layer Created with Rule

Creating and Managing Layers

C

You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry
PT

items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This
type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommended
that you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task.
r

When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown
Fo

in Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information:

• Name — This is the name of the layer.
• Contents — The Contents tab displays which items are included or
excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed
with a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that are
excluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus (–) symbol in the
Status column. When selected, items are included on the layer if the
Include button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the
Exclude button is turned on.
• Rules — The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have been
defined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon
defined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer,
name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer
Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In

Module 13 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent
when creating templates.
Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those
layers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does not
contain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule.
The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layer
properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and
selecting Layer Properties.
You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set as
the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed
on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the
active layer.

y
nl
Understanding Layer Status

O
Whenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status for
that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the

se
model is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish to
retain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer status
by selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Status
U
types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in the
layer tree and select Save Status.
al

If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, the
rn

message log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here:

te

.
In

You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting the
View tab and selecting Reset Status from the Status types drop-down
C

menu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selecting
Reset Status.
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 5

Creating Layer Rules
Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria.

• Layer options:
– Associate
– Rules Enabled
– Independent
• Different icons for layers
with/without rules.

y
• The Rule Editor:

nl
– Look for
– Look in

O
– You can search for:
♦ Attributes
♦ History
se
U
♦ Status
♦ Geometry
al

• Query Builder
rn
te
In

Figure 1 – Rule Editor Dialog Box

C

Creating Layer Rules

PT

Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. The Rules tab
of the Layer Properties dialog box displays the rules, if any, that are defined
r

for the layer. To create a layer based on a rule, you simply need to create a
Fo

layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the
Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool.
In addition to being useful in specific tasks, a ruled layer is beneficial when
creating templates.
There are three options for ruled layers:
• Associative – Enables the rules to apply for existing model features. Layers
are non-associative by default.
• Rules Enabled – Enables the rules to apply for new features as they are
created.
• Independent – Enables the layer to be independent of the default layer
model, therefore enabling customization. Layers are dependent by default.
Layers that are created with rules are indicated by a different icon than those
layers that were created without rules.

Module 13 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Using the Rule Editor
You can create rules using the Rule Editor dialog box, which is very similar to
the Search Tool. The Rule Editor includes several options to search models
by a variety of criteria including:
• Look For – Specify the type of items for which you want to search. For
example, you can search for features, components, or solid models.
• Look In – Specifies against which model or models to conduct the search.
You can have the rule look in a top-level assembly, a sub-assembly, or a
part. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object,
you can select whether sub-models are included. You can set the Look
in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool

y
dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model from
the graphics window.

nl
• The Rule Editor dialog box enables you to further narrow your criteria by

O
using the following search options:
– Attributes – Enables you to search for the following attributes:

se
♦ Name – Feature or component name.
♦ Type – Feature type (round or hole, for example).
U
♦ Size – Solid model size.
– History – Includes feature or component ID, and feature or component
al

Number.
rn

– Status – Includes Regeneration status, Layer status, and Display status.

– Geometry – Enables you to search for the following geometry
te

parameters:
♦ Zone – The component or solid model based on a defined zone.
In

♦ Distance – Component or solid model based on a defined distance

from a point.
C

♦ Exterior Comps – Component or solid model based on a location

PT

towards the outside of an assembly.

Using the Query Builder

r

The Rule Editor dialog box contains the Query Builder area. The Query
Fo

Builder enables you to build a set of rules. Rules can be combined using
AND and OR operators in the Query Builder. You can switch the operator
from AND to OR and vice versa.
The Query Builder enables you to add new rules and remove and update
existing rules. You can also move selected rules up and down, as well as
save the query for reuse.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Creating Layer Rules

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Rule_Layers [Link]

Task 1: Create a rule on a new part layer.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. In the top of the model tree, click

y
nl
Show and select Layer
Tree.

O
3. Right-click in the layer tree and
select New Layer.

se
4. Type HOLES as the Name. U
5. Select the Rules tab and click
Edit Rules.
al

6. In the Rule Editor dialog box,

click Options and verify that
rn

Build Query is not selected.

• Edit the Look for drop-down
te

list to Feature, if necessarry.

In

• Select Type as the Rule.

• Select Hole as the Value.
C

• Click Preview Results.

• Click OK.
PT

By default, only new holes

are added to the layer.
r
Fo

7. Click Options > Associative in

the Layer Properties dialog box
and click OK.
8. Right-click the HOLES layer and
select Hide.
9. Click Repaint .
10. In the top of the layer tree, click
Show and select Model
Tree.

Module 13 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 11. Press CTRL, select Hole 2 and
Hole 3, and click Mirror
from the Editing group.
12. Select datum plane RIGHT and
click Complete Feature .
13. In the top of the model tree, click
Show and select Layer
Tree.
14. Expand the HOLES layer and

y
notice the additional holes.

nl
15. Click Regenerate to update the rule.

O
16. Right-click HOLES and select Unhide.

se
17. Right-click HOLES and select Hide.

18. Click Repaint .

U
19. Click Close Window .
al

Task 2: Create a rule on a new assembly layer.

rn
te

1. Click Open and double-click

[Link].
In

2. In the top of the model tree, click

Show and select Layer
C

Tree.
PT

3. Right-click and select New

Layer.
4. Type HARDWARE as the Name.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 9

 5. Select the Rules tab and click
Edit Rules.
6. In the Rule Editor dialog box,
click Options > Build Query.
• Edit the Look for drop-down
list to Component.
• Select Name as the Rule.
• Type bolt* as the Value.
• Click Add New.
7. Edit the Look for drop-down list

y
to Solid Model.

nl
• Select Size as the Rule.

O
• Select Relative as the Criteria
Type.

se
• Select is less than as the
Criteria Comparison.
U
• Type 0.20 as the Value.
• Click Add New.
al

• Click Preview Results and

click OK.
rn

8. Click Options > Associative

te

and click OK.

9. Right-click layer HARDWARE,
In

select Hide, and click Repaint

.
C

10. Assemble bolt_20dia.prt into the

PT

front hole and click Regenerate

to update the rule.
r

11. The bolt is automatically hidden.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Layers in Assemblies
Options are available when you try to add an external item onto
a layer.
• Place External Item options:
– Place component on current
layer
– Place item on all selected layers
– New layer
– Ignore item

y
– Ignore All

nl
• Cascading layer control:
– Control a part level layer from

O
an assembly.
– Both part and assembly must Figure 1 – Placing an External
contain layer of the same name.
se Component on a Layer
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Placing an External

Feature on a Layer Figure 3 – Cascading Layer Control

Creating Layers in Assemblies

r
Fo

You can place any assembly feature or assembled component onto an

assembly layer the same as you can with a part layer in a part. However, if
you try to place an external item onto an assembly layer, such as a part
feature from an assembled component or a component belonging to an
assembled sub-assembly, the Place External Item dialog box appears and
requires that you make some decisions.
• Place component on current layer – If you select a component to place
on a layer that is found within a sub-assembly, you can select this option
to place the component on the layer. The layer is only created at the
assembly level, and not the sub-assembly. Note that, as shown in Figure 1,
when a component is selected, the option Place item on all selected layers
is grayed out in the Place External Item dialog box.
• Place item on all selected layers – If you select a part level feature from
a component, the dialog box displays all the layers found in the part. It
automatically selects the layer or layers that the feature is already on.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 11

 You then have the option of selecting additional layers to which you want
the feature added. Remember that selecting this option causes the part
feature item to be placed on a part level layer, not the assembly level layer.
Note that, as shown in Figure 2, when a feature is selected, the option
Place component on current layer is grayed out in the Place External Item
dialog box.
• New layer – Creates a new layer and places the selected component or
feature on that layer. Again, note that the layer is created in the part from
which the selected component or feature is selected. The new part layer
name is the same as the one you are creating at the assembly level, and
helps to facilitate cascading layer control.
• Ignore item – Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or
add any features or components to existing layers.

y
nl
• Ignore All – Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or
add any features or components to existing layers.

O
Cascading Layer Control in Assemblies

se
Layers in assemblies can provide you with cascading control. You can control
a part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a
layer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the
U
layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shown
in the lower-left figure.
al

The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the common
rn

layer.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Layers in Assemblies

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Assy_Layers [Link]

Task 1: Experiment with the active object drop-down list.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Examine the model tree and expand [Link].

y
3. Notice that some of the nuts and bolts are in the sub-assembly, and

nl
some are at the top level.

O
4. In the top of the model tree, click
Show and select Layer

se
Tree.
5. Expand 01__PRT_DEF_DTM_
U
PLN and notice that this layer is
found both in the assembly and
al

in part models.
6. Right-click 01__PRT_DEF_
rn

DTM_PLN and select Hide.

te

7. Click Repaint and notice

the cascading effect from the
In

assembly through the parts.

8. Select LAYER_BASE.PRT from

C

the active object drop-down list

PT

at the top of the layer tree.

9. Notice that the 01__PRT_DEF_
DTM_PLN layer is hidden at this
r

level.
Fo

10. Select [Link] from the

active object drop-down list.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 13

Task 2: Create layers in assemblies.

1. Right-click in the layer tree and

select New Layer.
2. Type BOLTS as the Name.
3. Select BOLT_12DIA.PRT.
4. Select BOLT_20DIA.PRT.
• The Place External Item dialog
box displays.
• Click Place component on

y
current layer.

nl
5. Click OK.

O
6. Right-click the BOLTS layer,
select Hide, and click Repaint
.
se
U
al

7. Right-click and select New

rn

Layer.
te

8. Type NUTS as the Name.

9. Select NUT_12MM.PRT.
In

10. Select NUT_20MM.PRT. The

Place External Item dialog box
C

displays because the nut is in a

sub-assembly.
PT

• Click New Layer.

11. Click OK.
r
Fo

12. Expand the BOLTS and NUTS

layers.
13. Notice that the BOLTS layer is
just at the assembly level.
14. Notice that the NUTS layer is
in both the HARDWARE and
LAYER assemblies.
15. Right-click the NUTS layer,
select Hide, and click Repaint
.

Module 13 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 16. Orient to the Standard
Orientation and enable Axis
Display .

y
nl
O
17. Right-click and select New
se
U
Layer.
18. Type HOLES as the Name.
al

19. Query-select the left rear hole.

rn

The Place External Item dialog

box appears because the feature
is in the part model.
te

• Click New Layer.

In

20. Query-select the right rear hole.

• In the Place External Item
C

dialog box, select the HOLES

layer and click Place item on
PT

all selected layers.

21. Click OK.
r

22. Expand the HOLES layers in the

Fo

part.
23. Notice that there are no items in
the top-level assembly HOLES
layer.
24. Right-click the HOLES layer,
select Hide, and click Repaint
.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 15

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 Module 14

y
Advanced Reference Management

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Creo Parametric's advanced reference management tools enable you to
efficiently manage parent/child relationships and design intent. You can edit
and replace feature references without redefining those features. You can
U
replace Sketcher geometry to reroute children to the new reference, and
you can replace missing Sketcher references and solve the section with
al

the new references.

rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Edit feature references.
In

• Replace feature references.

• Replace Sketcher references.
C

• Replace Sketcher geometry.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 1

Editing Feature References
You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to
alternate selections.

• You can roll the model back.

• The system highlights each
reference during reroute.
• Reroute options:
– Alternate
– Same Ref

y
– Ref Info

nl
O
Figure 1 – Selecting an Alternate
Reference

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Viewing Reference

Figure 2 – Viewing the Rerouted Hole Information
r

Editing Feature References

Fo

You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to alternate

selections. When you edit the references of a feature, the system cycles
through and highlights all the references used to create the feature, in the
order originally selected. For each reference, you can then select to either
maintain the same reference, or select or create a new one.
When you initialize the Edit References functionality, you are prompted to
decide whether to roll back the model. The options for this prompt are:
• No – The feature Insert Indicator is left in its current position in the
model tree.
• Yes – The feature Insert Indicator is automatically moved to the current
feature, temporarily suppressing all subsequent features in the model tree
and display. Rolling a model back is useful because it simplifies the display
when several features follow the feature being rerouted.

Module 14 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Reroute Options
To handle each feature reference, you can select from the following three
options:
• Alternate – Enables you to select or create an alternate reference for the
feature. You can use the datum features toolbar if necessary, while in the
Reroute menu, to construct new references.
• Same Ref – Causes the currently highlighted reference to remain the same.
• Ref Info – Displays information about the highlighted reference in an
information window. This option provides the reference identifier and the
type of reference. This is important because you can only reroute to like
reference types.

y
You can create datum features on-the-fly while in Reroute mode.

nl
These features are placed before the current feature in the model
tree, and are available for selection during Reroute. If you quit the

O
Reroute operation, the datum features remain.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Editing Feature References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Edit\Edit_References EDIT_REFERENCES.PRT

Task 1: Reroute feature references using Edit References functionality.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Hole 1 from the model

y
tree.

nl
• Notice this feature is midway
in the model tree.

O
3. Right-click and select Edit

se
References.
4. Click Yes to roll back the model.
U
5. Notice that the Insert Indicator
is now beneath Extrude 2,
al

and that all downstream features

are temporarily suppressed.
rn

6. Read the prompt in the

te

message window and notice the

highlighting.
In

7. Notice that Alternate is specified

in the menu manager, and select
C

the top of the cylinder.

PT

8. Read the prompt and notice the

r

highlighting.
Fo

9. Select datum axis CYL.

10. Notice that the hole is rerouted,
and the downstream features are
restored.

Module 14 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 11. Right-click Hole 3 and select
Edit References.
12. Click No to keep the model from
rolling back.
13. Notice that the Insert Indicator
location is unchanged.

14. Read the prompt in the

message window and notice the

y
highlighting.

nl
15. Notice that Alternate is specified

O
in the menu manager, and select
datum axis A_2.

se
U
16. Read the prompt in the
message window and notice the
al

highlighting.
17. Click Same Ref.
rn

18. Read the prompt in the message

window, notice the highlighting,
te

and click Same Ref.

In

19. Notice that the hole is rerouted.

C

20. Enable Plane Display .

PT

21. Right-click Extrude 3, select

Edit References, and click No.
22. Read the prompt in the
r

message window and notice the

Fo

highlighting on the hole surface.

23. Select the main model surface
as the alternate reference.

24. Read the prompt in the

message window and notice the
highlighting.
25. Notice that Alternate is specified,
and select datum plane RIGHT.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 5

 26. Read the prompt and click Ref Info.
27. Notice that the reference is datum plane, and click Close.
28. Click Same Ref from the menu manager.

29. Read the prompt and click Ref

Info.
30. Notice that the reference is the
round edge, and click Close.
31. Click Alternate and select the
front model surface.

y
32. Notice that the protrusion is

nl
taller.

O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Replacing Feature References
You can replace a reference with an alternate reference for all
children of that reference.

• You can replace:

– A feature.
– Individual entities.
• You can replace a reference for:
– A selected feature.

y
– All children of the reference.

nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Replacing an
Individual Entity
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Model with Replaced

Figure 2 – Original Model Sketch Feature
r
Fo

Replacing Feature References

You can replace a reference with an alternate reference. You can select
whether to replace the reference for a specified feature or for all children of
that reference. The All Children option is a powerful function, because it can
replace downstream usage of the reference for multiple features at once.
To replace a reference, you simply select the entity you want to replace,
then select the new, alternate entity. The following two types of entities can
be replaced:
• Feature – Enables you to select a feature. In the lower figures, a sketch
is replaced.
• Indiv Entity – Enables you to select an individual entity, such as an edge,
vertex, or plane. In the upper-right figure, one datum axis is replaced.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 7

Once you have specified the entity to be replaced, you must specify how
to handle the children of the replaced entity. You have two options from
which to select:
• Sel Feat – Replaces the reference in a selected feature.
• All Children – Replaces the reference in all child features. In Figure 1,
all three holes reference the left datum axis. When the left datum axis is
replaced with the right datum axis for all children, all three holes move to the
right datum axis. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, both the rib and variable section
sweep features reference the sketch. When the sketch is replaced for all its
children, the geometry for both the rib and variable section sweep updates.
It does not matter which feature you select to initiate the Replace

y
Ref command, unlike Reroute.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Replacing Feature References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Edit\Replace_References REPLACE_REFS.PRT

Task 1: Replace an individual entity reference.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Examine the model tree, and

y
notice that the two datum axes

nl
are not individual axis features.

O
3. Select Hole 1, Hole 2, and Hole
3 from the model tree to review
their locations.
4. With Hole 3 still selected,
right-click and select Edit se
U
References.
5. Click No to prevent the model
al

from rolling back.

rn

6. In the menu manager, click

Replace Ref > Indiv Entity.
te

• Select the datum axis running

In

through the hole as the

reference to be replaced.
• Select the other datum axis as
C

the alternate axis.

PT

• Click All Children.

7. Notice that all three holes
update, even though each hole
r

individually references the axis,

Fo

not each other.

Task 2: Replace feature references.

1. Click the Operations group

drop-down list and select
Resume > Resume Last Set.
2. Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 9

 3. Select SKETCH_A, SKETCH_B,
Profile Rib 1, and Sweep 1 to
review their locations.
SKETCH_A is currently
referenced by Profile Rib 1
and the sweep as a sketch
and trajectory, respectively.

4. With Sweep 1 still selected,

right-click and select Edit

y
References.

nl
5. Click No to prevent the model
from rolling back.

O
6. In the menu manager, click
Replace Ref > Feature.

se
• Select SKETCH_A as the
reference to be replaced.
U
• Select SKETCH_B as the
alternate feature.
al

• Click All Children.

rn

• Click Done/Return from the

menu manager.
te

7. Notice that both features have

updated to the new reference.
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Replacing Sketcher References
References can be replaced using the References dialog box.

• Replace missing or valid

references.
• Similar to Reroute, but in Sketcher.
• Reference status.
• Solve option.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Replacing a Missing
Reference

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Solving with Replaced Figure 3 – Viewing the Solved

C

Reference References
PT

Replacing Sketcher References

You can replace valid, invalid, and/or missing references in Sketcher. This
is similar to using the Reroute option in Part mode, but is available from
r
Fo

within Sketcher mode. The system preserves the original ID of the replaced
reference for the best possible handling of any child features. The following
options are found in the References dialog box:
• Replace – Enables you to select a reference from the list and replace it
with a new reference.
• Delete – Deletes the currently selected reference.
• Reference Status – Indicates the current status of references.
– Unresolved References – There are missing and/or unresolved
references. References need to be replaced or additional references
may be required.
– Unsolved Sketch – Adequate references exist to place the sketch, but
there still may be missing or invalid references.
– Fully Placed – All references are valid and there are adequate
references to place the sketch.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 11

• Solve – Attempts to solve the sketch based on the current references.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Edit\Replace_Sketch_Refs REPLACE_SK_REFS.PRT

Task 1: Resume a feature and replace a reference in Sketcher using the

new option.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

y
2. In the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree

nl
Filters.
• Select the Suppressed Objects option if necessary.

O
• Click OK.

se
3. Press CTRL and select
OVAL_SKETCH and OVAL_CUT
U
from the model tree.
• Right-click and select
al

Resume.
• Notice the message window
rn

states that there is a

regeneration failure and in
te

the model tree, the features

highlighted in red.
In

• Edit the definition of

OVAL_SKETCH.
C

4. Notice the missing references.

PT

5. Select the first MISSING

REFERENCE and click Replace.
• Select datum plane RIGHT
r
Fo

from the model tree.

6. Select the next MISSING
REFERENCE and click Replace.
• Select datum plane RIGHT
from the model tree.
• Since the reference is now the
same, it is removed from the
list.
• Notice that the Reference
status is currently "Unsolved
sketch."

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 13

 7. Click Solve.
• Notice that the Reference
status is now "Fully Placed."
8. Notice that the remaining
reference is not missing, but is to
an edge of a round.
• Select the
Edge:F12(ROUND_2) refer-
ence and click Replace.
• Select datum plane FRONT

y
from the model tree.

nl
• Click Solve and then click
Close.

O
9. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types:
.
U
10. Edit the dimensions as shown.
al
rn

11. Click OK .
te
In
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 14 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Replacing Sketcher Geometry
The Replace function helps mitigate missing reference failures
when editing sketches.
• Select Replace from the
Operations group drop-down
menu:
– Select the original entity.
– Select the new entity.
– The children of the replaced
entity are rerouted to the

y
new entity.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Deleting an Entity
U without Replace
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 - Replacing an Entity

C
PT

Figure 3 – Part Model Before

and After Replace

Replacing Sketcher Geometry

r
Fo

When a change is made to a parent feature, it automatically updates any

children. This is beneficial functionality and demonstrates the power of Creo
Parametric. However, if a change to a parent feature results in a child not
being able to find a particular parent's reference, a failure occurs. Creo
Parametric reports this error in the message window and failure diagnostics
window as, “Feature references are missing.”
Editing a sketch can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a
model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other
features, failures can occur. In Figure 1, the sketched entity is being deleted
to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric indicates that this entity is
referenced by other entities (a round feature). If you decide to continue and
delete this entity, the child features fail due to this reference being removed.
One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is
to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references from
an old entity to the new entity you have created. This means the children of

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 15

the replaced entity are automatically rerouted to the new entity. You can click
the Operations group drop-down menu, then select Replace. You then select
the original entity that contains the references, then select the new entity to
which you want references transferred.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Edit\Replace_Sketch_Geom REPLACE_SK_GEOM.PRT

Task 1: Replace Sketcher geometry in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of
BASE_PROTRUSION.

y
3. In the graphics window,

nl
right-click and select Edit
Internal Sketch.

O
4. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types: .

5. Click Sketch View from the

U
Setup group.
6. Select the right side angled
al

line, then right-click and select

rn

Delete.
7. Read the warning message and
te

click Yes.
8. Click 3-Point / Tangent End
In

from the Sketching group and

sketch an arc in its place.
C

9. Click OK .
PT

10. Click Complete Feature .

11. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and
r

its children fail.

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 17

 12. In the model tree, right-click
SIDE_ROUND and select Info >
Feature.
13. Notice that SIDE_ROUND
is failing because feature
references are missing.
14. Close the Browser.

15. Edit the definition of

y
SIDE_ROUND.

nl
16. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab, select Set 2, and click in the

O
Driving Surface collector.
17. Spin the model and select the

se
surface to satisfy the missing
reference.
U
18. Click Complete Feature .
al

Task 2: Transfer references using Replace to avoid a missing references

failure.
rn

1. Edit the definition of

te

BASE_PROTRUSION.
In

2. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Edit
Internal Sketch.
C

3. Enable only the following

PT

Sketcher Display types: .

4. Click Sketch View from the

r

Setup group.
Fo

5. Select the right arc and click

Mirror from the Editing
group.
• Select the vertical centerline
and de-select the mirrored arc.

Module 14 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 6. Click the Operations group
drop-down menu and select
Replace.
• Select the left angled line.
• Select the newly mirrored arc.
• Click Yes in the Replace Entity
dialog box.
7. Click OK .
8. Click Complete Feature .

y
Using the Replace

nl
functionality enables you to
transfer references to the

O
arc entity and avoid failures.

se
U
This completes the procedure.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 19

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 Module 15

y
Family Tables

nl
O
Module Overview

se
When creating design models, you can vary existing models and quickly
create multiple instances by using family tables. This is especially useful for
common hardware items such as screws, bolts, and nuts.
U
In this module, you learn how to create multiple design variations of models
al

using family tables.

rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand the theory behind family tables.
In

• Learn how to create a family table and multi-level family table.

• Pattern family table instances.
C

• Edit family table members.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 1

Understanding Family Table Theory
Family tables enable you to create a large number of common
parts quickly based upon an initial or "generic" design model.
• Family tables:
– Collection of parts, assemblies,
or features.
– Spreadsheets comprised of
rows and columns.
– Promote use of standardized
components.

y
• Family tables consist of:

nl
– A “generic” model.

O
♦ Original model
– Items that can be varied.
– One or more “instance” models.
♦ Family members se
Figure 1 – Family Table
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Family Table Instances Figure 3 – Selecting the Instance

r

Understanding Family Table Theory

Fo

Family tables are a collection of parts, assemblies, or features that are similar,
but deviate slightly in some aspect, such as size or which detail features are
included. For example, bolts of a certain type, though different in size, all look
alike and perform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them as a
“family” of part models. Parts in family tables are also known as table-driven
parts. Family tables promote the use of standardized components.

Family Table Structure

Family tables are essentially spreadsheets, comprised of columns and rows.
A family table consists of the following three components:
• The generic object, or base object – All members of the family table are
based on the generic object.
• The items specified in the generic that can be varied in the instances.

Module 15 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Instances – The family members created in the table based on the generic
model.
The family table rows contain the generic model and instances of parts and
their corresponding values. The generic model is the first row in the family
table.
The family table columns are used to specify the items in the generic model
that can be varied in the instances.
The family table also contains a header that specifies the column names.
It is important to note that when creating a family table, the system is not
actually creating additional *.prt files for each instance; the instances are
virtual. When a particular instance is opened, the system actually opens the

y
“generic” model first, and then regenerates it according to the information in

nl
the family table row for that instance.

O
Family Tables Uses

se
You can use family tables for any of the following reasons:
• Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly within
U
a single model.
• Save time and effort by standardizing part generation.
al

• Generate variations of a part from one part file instead of having to model
each one.
rn

• Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations to change

the model.
te

• Create a table of parts that can be included in part catalogs or on a drawing.

In

Family Table Instance Identification and Facts

C

Instances are identified in the following ways:

PT

• You can set the [Link] option menu_show_instances to yes to display

all instances in the File Open dialog box and Browser. Instances display as
instance_name<generic_name>.prt.
r

• When you open a generic model, the system prompts you to specify which
Fo

file to open in the Select Instance dialog box. You may select to open the
generic file or an instance associated with it. You can open a file By Name
or By Column. The By Column option enables you to filter which instance to
open based on the values defined for the variable items in the family table.
• When a family table model is opened in Creo Parametric, the lower-left
corner of the graphics window indicates whether it is a generic or instance.
• You use the [Link] option modeltree_show_gen_of_instance to control
the display of the name of the generic instance in the model tree. The
default setting displays the generic name. For example, if the generic model
is called BOLT_FAM.PRT and you open instance BOLT_6-[Link] from it,
the instance displays in the model tree as BOLT_6-15<BOLT_FAM>.PRT.
• You can right-click an instance and select Open Generic to open the
generic model. This option is available from the top node in a part model,
or from a component in an assembly model.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 3

Creating a Family Table
You can create variations of design models using family tables.

• To create a family table:

– Create the generic
– Create the table and
specify items to be varied
– Insert and configure new
instances
– Verify instances Figure 1 – Family Table

y
• Other family table

nl
operations:
– Cut/Copy/Paste

O
– Find Instance
– Preview Instance
– Lock/Unlock Instance
– Edit With Excel se
U
al

Figure 2 – Family Table Instances

rn

Creating a Family Table

Adhere to the following steps to create a family table:
te

• Create the model that is to be used as the generic model in the family table.
In

• Create the new family table in the model. Specify the items in the generic
model that can be varied in the instances using Add Columns in the
C

Family Table dialog box. Each item specified in the generic is added as
PT

a new column to the table, in the order in which the items were specified.
The following items can be added to the family table:

– Dimensions – Features – Merge Parts

r
Fo

– Components – Parameters – Ref Models

– Groups – Pattern Tables – Other

All aspects of the generic model that are not included in the family table
as items to be varied, automatically occur in each instance. For example,
if the generic model contains a 2” hole, all instances contain the same 2”
hole in the same location.
• Add rows with the names of instances using Insert Instance , and
configure each instance based on the items available to be varied in the
table. For each instance, depending upon the item type, you can specify a
value of Y or N (Yes or No) or type a numerical value. For example, you
can specify a different value for a dimension or parameter. All dimension
table cells must have a value specified. If the value is specified as an
asterisk (*), that item uses the generic's value. If a value is specified as N,

Module 15 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 the feature is suppressed in the regeneration cycle for that instance. If the
value is specified as Y, the feature is included in the regeneration cycle for
that instance. In Figure 1, the 6-POINT feature is included in only the 1/4”
socket, while the 12-POINT feature is included in only the 3/8” and 1/2”
sockets. In Figure 2, the left image displays the 1/4” socket and notice that
only the 6-POINT feature is visible.
• Verify the family table instances using Verify Instances in the Family
Table dialog box. The Verify function attempts to regenerate each instance
in the table utilizing the values specified for that instance. If the values
enable the instance to properly regenerate, its verification status is listed as
“Success”. If the values cause a geometry failure or some other type of
failure, the verification status is listed as “Failure.”

y
Any time a change is made to the family table you must reverify

nl
all instances.

O
Other Family Table Operations

se
Within the Family Table dialog box, the following additional operations can
be performed:
U
• Cut Cells /Copy Cells /Paste Cells Operations – You can cut,
copy, and paste cell values. You can also use CTRL+C, CTRL+X, and
al

CTRL+V, or right-click and select Delete Rows to remove any unwanted

rn

instances.
• Find Instance – Enables you to find a particular instance or group of
te

instances based on Type and the Type's value.

• Preview Instance – Enables you to preview an instance in a separate
In

window.

• Lock Unlock Instance – Enables you to lock an instance so its values

C

cannot be modified.
PT

• Edit With Excel – Enables you to use Microsoft Excel (if it is installed)
to populate the family table.
r

Best Practices
Fo

To make identification easier, rename dimensions that are to be used in family

tables. The column header name for dimensions displays as the name of the
dimension. Thus, in the family table it is easier to identify the dimension as
“DRIVE_SIZE”, rather than d3, as shown in Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating a Family Table

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Create_Fam-Tab FAMILY_TABLE.PRT

Task 1: Create a family table for a socket set.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click
DRIVE and select Edit.

y
3. Click the Model Intent group

nl
drop-down menu and select
Switch Symbols.

O
4. Notice the dimensions defining
the socket drive.

se
U
al

5. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family
Table .
rn

6. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .

te

7. In the Family Items dialog box,

In

select Dimension if necessary,

and select the DRIVE_SIZE
C

dimension.
• Select Parameter, select the
PT

Description parameter, and

click Insert Selected > Close
in the Select Parameter dialog
r

box.
Fo

• Select Feature, select the

6-POINT and 12-POINT
features, and click OK.

8. In the Family Table dialog box,

click Insert Instance .
• Click Insert Instance two
more times to add a total of
three instances.
• Edit the three Instance
Names to 1-4_SOCKET,
3-8_SOCKET, and
1-2_SOCKET.

Module 15 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the DRIVE_SIZE column,
type 6.35, 9.55, and 12.70 for
the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets,
respectively.
10. In the DESCRIPTION column,
type 1/4” SOCKET, 3/8”
SOCKET, and 1/2” SOCKET for
the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets,
respectively.

11. In the 6-POINT column, type Y,

y
N, and N for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2

nl
sockets, respectively.
12. In the 12-POINT column, type N,

O
Y, and Y for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2
sockets, respectively.

13. In the Family Table dialog box,

se
U
click Verify Instances .
14. In the Family Tree dialog box,
al

click Verify > Close.

15. Notice that the graphics window
rn

now displays the original model

as the GENERIC Instance.
te

16. In the Family Table dialog box,

In

select the 1-4_SOCKET and

click Preview Instance .
• Click Close.
C
PT

17. In the Family Table dialog box,

r

right-click 1-2_SOCKET and

Fo

select Open.
18. Notice that the instance opens
in a new window and that the
graphics window displays its
name.
19. Notice that 6-POINT is absent
from the model tree.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 7

 20. Click Open , select
family_table.prt, and click
Open.
21. In the Select Instance dialog box,
select 3-8_SOCKET, and click
Open.
22. Notice the model tree displays
the instance name with the
generic name in brackets.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Patternizing Family Table Instances
You can use the Copy with Increments tool to automatically
generate a large number of instances by incrementing
dimensions.
• Direction
• Quantity
• Items
• Increment value

y
Figure 1 – Patternizing Instances

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Family Table Figure 3 – Patternized Models

Patternizing Family Table Instances

C
PT

You can use the Copy With Increments tool to automatically generate a
large number of instances by incrementing dimensions. This tool works well
for family tables of parts whose family items are consistently incremented,
such as nuts, bolts, socket sets, and so on.
r
Fo

When you start the Copy with Increments tool, the Patternize Instances
dialog box appears, enabling you to configure the patternizing options. The
following options are available for patternizing instances:
• Direction – Defines the group of items that are to be patternized.
• Quantity – Specifies the quantity of instances that are patternized in a
given direction.
• Items – Specifies which Family Items are to be patternized. Any Family
Item that requires a value can be patternized. Features that are defined as
Y or N in the family table cannot be patternized.
• Increment value – Defines the value that the Item is patternized for each
instance.
If you define multiple directions to be patternized, the system creates a matrix
of instance results. In Figure 2, the socket size is incremented in the first
direction for a total quantity of 6, and the socket depth is incremented in the

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 9

second direction for a total quantity of 2. Therefore, a total of 12 instances
are created, 6 for all socket sizes at one depth, and 6 for all socket sizes
at the second depth.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Patternizing Family Table Instances

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Patternize [Link]

Task 1: Patternize a part model to create multiple instances.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select

y
Parameters .

nl
3. Notice that there is a parameter

O
named SOCKET_SIZE.
• Click OK.

se
U
4. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit.
al

5. Click the Model Intent group

drop-down menu and select
rn

Switch Symbols .
te

6. Click the Model Intent group

drop-down menu and select
In

Relations .
7. Notice that the DIA dimension is
C

controlled by the SOCKET_SIZE

PT

parameter.
• Click OK.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 11

 8. Click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select
Family Table .
9. In the Family Table dialog box,
click Add Columns .
10. In the Family Items dialog box,
select Parameter, select the
SOCKET_SIZE parameter, and
click Insert Selected > Close in
the Select Parameter dialog box.

y
• In the Family Items dialog box,

nl
select Dimension, select the
DEPTH dimension, and click

O
OK > OK.
11. In the Family Table dialog box,
click Insert Instance .
se
U
12. Click Copy With Increments
al

.
rn

13. In the Patternize Instance

dialog box, edit the Quantity for
Direction1 to 6.
te

• Select SOCKET_SIZE and

In

click Add Item .

• Edit the Increment to 1.
C

• Select Add Direction and

edit its quantity to 2.
PT

• Select d1, DEPTH and click

Add Item .
• Edit the Increment to 30.
r
Fo

Module 15 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 14. Click OK in the Patternize
Instance dialog box.
15. In the Family Table dialog box,
right-click PATTERNIZE_INST
and select Delete Rows.
16. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog
box.
17. Edit the Instance Names
for the 25.4 depth to
XXmm_SHALLOW, where

y
XX is the socket size.

nl
18. Edit the six “*” values to 25.4.
19. Edit the Instance Names for the

O
55.4 depth to XXmm_DEEP,
where XX is the socket size.

20. In the Family Table dialog box,

se
U
click Verify Instances .
21. In the Family Tree dialog box,
al

click Verify > Close.

rn

22. In the Family Table dialog box,

select 15MM_SHALLOW and
click Preview Instance .
te

• Click Close.
In

• Select 15MM_DEEP and click

Preview Instance .
C

• Click Close.
23. Click OK in the Family Table
PT

dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 13

Creating a Multi-Level Family Table
You can use an instance from a family table as the generic for
a different family table.

• Creation
– Instance from one family
table is the generic for
another family table.
• Recognition
– Folder icon in original

y
generic table's Type column.

nl
– Select Instance dialog box
displays twice.

O
se
Figure 1 – The 1/4 Inch Drive
12mm Socket
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Opening a Multi-Level

PT

Instance Figure 3 – Multi-Level Family Table

Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

r
Fo

A family table is not restricted to a single level of a table. You can create
instances of instances by opening an instance and creating a new family
table for it. In other words, the instance of the first family table is now the
generic for a second family table. This is known as a “nested” family table.
Another way to create a nested family table is to open a generic model's
family table, select the desired instance that is to become the generic of the
new family table, and click Insert > Instance-Level Table in the Family Table
dialog box main menu.

Recognizing a Multi-Level Family Table

When you open a generic model, the Select Instance dialog box enables you
to select any instance in the family table. If you select an instance that is the
generic for another family table, the Select Instance dialog box opens again
and displays the instances for this second family table, enabling you to select
any instance in the second family table.

Module 15 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 If you open the family table of the original generic model, the instances that
contain family tables of their own display a folder icon in the Type column
of the Family Table dialog box, as shown in Figure 3. You can also switch
from the generic family table into the instance's family table within the Look
In drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3. Because the nested instances are
children of the original family table, they must also be reverified any time a
change is made to the generic model.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Multi-Level MULTI_FAM-[Link]

Task 1: Create a multi-level family table.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the Select Instance dialog box,
select The generic and click

y
Open.

nl
3. Click the Model Intent
drop-down menu and select

O
Family Table .

se
4. Notice that the family table
consists of three different drive
sizes.
U
5. In the Family Table dialog box,
al

select the 1-4_DRIVE instance.

• Click Insert > Instance-Level
rn

Table from the top menu.

te

6. A new family table is created for

the 1-4_DRIVE instance.
In

7. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .

C

8. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter, select

PT

SOCKET_SIZE, and click Insert Selected > Close.

• In the Family Items dialog box, select Feature, select Revolve 1,
and click OK.
r
Fo

9. In the Family Table dialog box,

click Insert Instance six
times to insert six instances.
• Increment the cells in the
SOCKET_SIZE column from 8
to 13, one millimeter at a time.
• Type Y for REVOLVE_1 for the
8 and 9 SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type N for REVOLVE_1 for
the 10–13 SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type XXmm_SOCKET for the
Instance Name, where XX is
the SOCKET_SIZE.

Module 15 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 10. In the Family Table dialog box,
click Verify Instances .
11. Notice that these instances are
sub-instances to the 1-4_DRIVE
instance.
12. In the Family Tree dialog box,
click Verify > Close.

y
nl
O
13. In the Family Table dialog box,
edit the Look In drop-down to se
U
MULTI_FAM-TAB.
al

14. Notice that the 1-4_DRIVE

instance now displays a folder
rn

icon in the Type field.

15. Right-click 1-4_DRIVE and
te

select Open.
16. Click the Model Intent
In

drop-down menu and select

Family Table .
C

17. Notice the family table and click

PT

OK.

18. Click Open , select

r

[Link], and click

Fo

Open.
19. In the Select Instance dialog
box, select 1-4_DRIVE and click
Open.
20. In the Select Instance dialog box,
select 12MM_SOCKET and click
Open.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 17

 21. In the model tree, right-click 12MM_SOCKET<MULTI_FAM-TAB>.PRT
and select Open Generic.
22. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 1-2_DRIVE and click Open.
23. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Family Table ,
click Add Columns , and add the SOCKET_SIZE parameter.

• Click Insert Instance six times to insert six instances.

24. Increment the cells in the

SOCKET_SIZE column from 14

y
to 19, one millimeter at a time.

nl
25. Type XXmm_SOCKET for the
Instance Name, where XX is the

O
SOCKET_SIZE.

se
U
26. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify Instances .
• Click Verify > Close.
al

27. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.

rn

28. Select the View tab, click

Windows , and select
te

MULTI_FAM-[Link].
In

29. Click the Model Intent

drop-down menu and select
Family Table and notice that
C

1-2_DRIVE is now a multi-level

PT

family table.

30. Edit the Look In drop-down list to 1-2_DRIVE.

r

31. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 15 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Editing Family Table Members
The resulting geometry and behavior of models varies depending
upon whether you edit a family table generic or instance.

• Editing feature dimensions in the generic model.

• Editing feature dimensions in an instance.
• Adding or editing features in the generic model.
• Adding or editing features in an instance.

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Creating a Feature in the Generic
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Creating a Feature in the Instance

PT

Editing Family Table Members

The behavior of Creo Parametric models and the resulting geometry can be
r

different depending upon whether you edit a generic model or an instance.

Fo

Consider the following scenarios and what happens to the generic model
and family table instances.

Editing Feature Dimensions in the Generic Model

If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is not a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model
and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, only the geometry in the generic model updates
unless an instance's dimension value in the family table is set to “*”. The
instance geometry remains at the dimension value set in the family table
column.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 19

Editing Feature Dimensions in an Instance
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is not a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model
and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is a dimension able to be varied
in the generic's family table, the system informs you that the dimension is
table-driven. Upon confirming the family table modification, you can edit
the value and update the geometry in the instance. The family table in the
generic is updated for that particular instance row, but no other instance.

Adding or Editing Features in the Generic Model

y
If you suppress or delete a feature in the generic model that is not a feature
able to be varied in the family table, the feature is automatically suppressed

nl
or deleted in all instances.

O
If you suppress a feature in the generic model that is able to be varied in the
family table, only the feature in the generic model updates unless the variable

se
value in the family table is set to a value of “*”. The instance feature remains
at the value set in the family table column. That is, if the value is set to Y, then
the feature is displayed; if the value is set to N then the feature is suppressed.
U
If you delete a feature in the generic model that is a feature able to be varied
al

in the family table, the column is removed from the family table, and the
feature is deleted from all instances.
rn

If you add a feature to the generic model, the feature is added to all instances,
as shown in Figure 1.
te

Adding or Editing Features in an Instance

In

If you suppress a feature in an instance that is not a feature able to be varied

in the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular
C

instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only a
PT

temporary effect. If you delete a feature, it is deleted only in that particular

instance. The generic's family table is modified by adding the deleted feature
as an item that can be varied. This then enables you to suppress the feature
in other instances.
r
Fo

If you suppress a feature in an instance that is a feature able to be varied in

the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular
instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only
a temporary effect. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or
resumed according to the value set in the family table column. The value in
the family table for the feature that was suppressed does not change. If you
delete a feature from an instance, the feature is deleted only in that particular
instance. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed
according to the value set in the family table column. The value in the family
table for the feature that was deleted changes to N for that particular instance.
If you add a feature to an instance, the feature is added as an item to be
varied in the generic's family table. The column value is set to Y for the
instance to which the feature was added, and N for the generic and all other
instances. In Figure 2, the round was added to the instance. Consequently,
the round was added to the generic's family table as an item to be varied.

Module 15 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Editing Family Table Members

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Edit_Members [Link]

Task 1: Edit the members of a family table.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the Select Instance dialog box,
double-click The generic.

y
3. Click the Model Intent group

nl
drop-down menu and select

O
Family Table .
4. Notice that the family table drives

se
the socket's depth, but not its
diameter. U
5. Click OK.

6. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit.

al

• Edit the diameter from 27 to 30 and edit the depth from 31.86 to 40.
rn

• Click Regenerate .
te

7. Click Open and double-click

In

[Link].
8. In the Select Instance dialog box,
C

select 3-8_SOCKET and click

Open.
PT

9. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

Edit.
r

10. Notice the diameter updated, but

Fo

not the depth.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 21

 11. Edit the diameter from 30 to 35.
12. Double-click the 31.86 depth
dimension and notice it is table
driven.
13. Click Confirm from the menu
manager, edit the depth to 45,
and click Regenerate .
14. Click Close .
15. Click the Model Intent group

y
drop-down menu and select

nl
Family Table , and notice
that the 3/8” socket depth value

O
updated to 45.
• Click OK.

Task 2:
se
Create new features in family table members.
U
al

1. Select Edge Chamfer from

the Chamfer types drop-down
rn

list.
2. Spin the model and select the
te

edge.
In

3. Edit the D value to 2.

4. Click Complete Feature .
C
PT

5. Click the Model Intent group

drop-down menu and select
Family Table .
r

• Right-click 1-2_SOCKET and

Fo

select Open.
6. Notice that the chamfer is found
in the instance model.

7. Click Round from the Round

types drop-down menu.
8. Right-click to select the four
intent edges.
9. Edit the radius to 1.
10. Click Complete Feature .
11. Click Close .

Module 15 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 12. Notice that the round is not found
on the generic model in the
graphics window.

13. In the model tree, click Settings

y
nl
> Tree Filters.
14. Enable Suppressed Objects in

O
the Model Tree Items dialog box,
and click OK.

se
15. Notice that the round is in the
generic model's model tree, but
U
it is suppressed.
al

16. Click Tools > Family Table.

17. Notice that the round has
rn

been added to the family table,

and it is only turned on in the
te

1-2_SOCKET instance.
18. Click OK.
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 23

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Module 16

y
Reusing Features

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Creo Parametric enables you to reuse existing geometry when creating new
design models. You can create inheritance features that enable one-way
associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part
U
to a target part within an assembly. You can vary dimensions and other data
propagated from the reference part.
al

You can also reuse geometry in a design model by creating user-defined

rn

features (UDFs). A UDF consists of selected features, all their associated

dimensions, any relations between the selected features, and a list of
te

references for placing the UDF on various design models.

In

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
C

• Create user-defined features (UDFs) to reuse geometry.

PT

• Place user-defined features.

• Create user-defined features using on-surface coordinate systems.
• Create inheritance features to transfer geometry from existing design
r

models.
Fo

• Use external merge to add and remove material.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 1

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a
library of commonly used geometry.

• Define a UDF from a “template”

model.
– Standalone
♦ Reference Part option
– Subordinate
• Select features to include.

y
– Must be sequential

nl
• Define prompts.

O
– Every reference requires a
prompt.
• Define any variable items
(optional).
– Variable elements or se
Figure 1 – “Template” Model
U
dimensions
– Family Table
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface

While Defining Prompts
r
Fo

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and
dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by
helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.

Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model

To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same
base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the
features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is
shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the
number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number
of references makes the most efficient UDFs.
Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name.
The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company,

Module 16 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from
the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.
Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
• Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and
automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the
UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the
subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the
original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF.
• Standalone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the
original model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to
the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a
standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part.

y
If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a

nl
“_GP” suffix.

O
Selecting Features to Include
Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features

se
must be sequential in the model tree. U
Defining Prompts
You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected
al

features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require
prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference
rn

when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the

target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should
te

be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you

define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create
In

more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple
prompts for that reference.
C

• Single – Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several

features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the
PT

reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group
that use the same reference.
• Multiple – Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this
r

reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is

Fo

highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.

Defining Variable Items

You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an
optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a
dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's
dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of
the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features,
dimensions, and parameters.

Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You
can edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Create_udf CREATE_UDF.PRT

Task 1: Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the

y
model tree and select Info >

nl
Reference Viewer.

O
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog
box, notice that Extrude 2
references datum plane RIGHT

se
and Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to
U
Extrude 1 and cursor over each
of the surface references.
al

5. Notice that the top, flat surface

and the circular surface are the
rn

two references on the model.

te

6. Click Close from the Reference

Viewer.
In

7. In the ribbon, select the Tools

tab.
C

8. Click UDF Library from the

PT

Utilities group.
9. Click Create from the menu
manager.
r
Fo

10. Type keyway as the name and

press ENTER.
11. In the menu manager, click
Subordinate > Done > Add >
Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature
to add and click Done/Return.

Module 16 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 13. Notice the top surface highlighted
in red. This is the first required
reference.
14. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press
ENTER.

y
16. Notice datum plane highlighted in

nl
red. This is the second required
reference.

O
17. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
18. Type orientation reference
plane and press ENTER. se
U
al
rn

19. Notice the cylindrical surface

te

highlighted in red. This is the

third required reference.
In

20. Notice the prompt for you to type

the prompt for the surface.
C

21. Type cylinder surface and

press ENTER.
PT

22. Click Done/Return from the

menu manager.
r
Fo

23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length)
2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 5

 26. Notice that the first dimension is
highlighted.
27. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press
ENTER.

29. Notice that the second dimension

is highlighted.

y
nl
30. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the dimension.

O
31. Type key length and press
ENTER.

se
32. Click OK in the UDF dialog box
to complete the UDF creation.
U
This completes the procedure.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your
company's UDF library into your model.
• Open existing UDF (*.gph)
• Select Placement references
– Prompts can aid you
• Edit Variable Dimensions and
Annotations Elements
• Options

y
– Scaling

nl
– Dimension display
– Redefine features on-the-fly

O
• Adjustments Figure 1 – Viewing References

se
– Flip orientation on the Original UDF
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Selecting References

PT

for UDF Placement Figure 3 – The Placed UDF

Placing UDFs
r

If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design
Fo

models, it can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for
you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be
much faster than creating it new each time.

Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)

When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a
UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group in the
ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template
model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides
the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place
UDFs in multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model.
The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created
from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 7

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts
Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that
was defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references,
you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the
correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement
dynamically updates in the graphics window.

Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements

You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation.
These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.

Specifying Options

y
nl
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement.
You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a

O
scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size
of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units.
Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of

se
the elements that are not specified as variables in the UDF.
U
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF
on-the-fly. This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After
selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF
al

back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them.
rn

After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears,

enabling you to redefine it.
te

Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement

In

Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in

one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the
C

Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its
orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is
PT

successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the
UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model.
You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.
r
Fo

Updating a Modified UDF

If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it
results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group
without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied
group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original
UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the
group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking
UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu
and then regenerating the model.

Module 16 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Place_UDF PLACE_UDF.PRT

Task 1: Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group.

y
• Select [Link] and click Open.

nl
• Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration
and click OK.

O
3. Notice that a reference model

se
has been created for this UDF,
and displays in a subwindow.
U
• Notice that the first required
reference is highlighted in the
al

subwindow, and placement

preview of the feature is shown
rn

in the main graphics window.

• Notice that Reference 1 is
te

highlighted in the User Defined

Feature Placement dialog box
In

and the description prompt

reads sketching plane.
• Select a corresponding planar
C

surface, as shown.
PT

4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog

box.
r

• Notice that this reference is

Fo

highlighted in the subwindow.

• Notice that the description
prompt reads orientation
reference plane.
• Select a corresponding plane,
as shown.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 9

 5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog
box.
• Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
• Also notice that the description
prompt reads cylinder
surface.
• Select a corresponding
surface, as shown.

y
nl
O
6. In the User Defined Feature
Placement dialog box, select the

se
Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5
dimension from 2.00 to 4.
U
al
rn
te

8. In the User Defined Feature

Placement dialog box, select the
In

Adjustments tab.
9. In the User Defined Feature
Placement dialog box, click Flip
C

and then click Accept .

PT

For a more complex UDF,

there may be multiple
reference directions that can
r

be flipped. The system lists

Fo

each reference direction

in the dialog box, enabling
you to flip/preview each
reference.

This completes the procedure.

Module 16 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate
Systems
UDFs gain capability when utilizing an on-surface Csys.

• Set up UDF features to reference

only an on-surface Csys.
– Quick and flexible placement.
– Drag location and angle.
• Include on-surface Csys in UDF.

y
– No UDF prompts required.

nl
– Specify on-surface Csys
references upon placement.

O
Figure 1 – UDF Fea-
tures Referencing

se On-Surface Csys
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Placing UDF on

Figure 2 – Locating UDF Alternate Surface
On-Surface
r

Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

Fo

The placement of a User-Defined Feature (UDF) gains some capabilities

when the features used to create the UDF reference is an on-surface
coordinate system. Upon placement, the UDF appears in a dynamic preview
that can be dragged to locate the UDF. You can also specify an additional
rotation angle for the UDF.
Keep in mind the following regarding the on-surface Csys and UDFs:
• The features comprising the UDF should reference ONLY the on-surface
Csys. They should not have any parents other than the on-surface Csys
in the model from which the UDF is created. To simplify this, create three
orthogonal datum planes through the on-surface Csys to act as a set of
“default datum planes.”
• If an on-surface Csys is included in the UDF features, the UDF setup
requires prompt creation only for the references of the Csys.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 11

 – When placing the UDF in this case, you can select references to place
the on-surface Csys in the destination model.
• If an on-surface Csys is NOT included in the UDF features, the UDF setup
requires the creation of one prompt for the selection of a coordinate system.
– When placing the UDF in this case, you have the option to create an
on-surface Csys on-the-fly.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs Using On-Surface
Coordinate Systems

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\UDF_On-Surface CREATE_UDF.PRT

Task 1: Create and place a UDF using an on-surface coordinate system.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Select CSO from the model tree.
3. Right-click and select Edit.

O
This in an on-surface Csys,
and is the only parent to the
geometry for the UDF.
se
U
4. Select the Tools tab and click
UDF Library .
al

• Click Create, type UDF1 as

rn

the name, and press ENTER.

5. Click Stand Alone > Done > No.
te

6. Select CSO, press SHIFT, and

select HOLE from the model
In

tree.
7. Click Done > Done/Return.
C

8. Press ENTER, if necessary, to

PT

accept the default prompts.

9. Click Done/Return and OK.
r
Fo

10. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

11. Click Open . Select PLACE_UDF.PRT and click Open.

12. Disable Csys Display .

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 13

 13. Click User-Defined Feature
from the Get Data group, select
UDF1, and click Open.
14. Click OK and select a surface to
place the on-surface Csys.
15. Drag the placement handles to
the front and right surfaces, then
position the UDF as shown.

y
nl
16. Drag the additional rotation
handle to approximately 90.

O
17. Select the Options tab.
• Scroll down and select the

se
HOLE check box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
U
• Click First Feature and
then Last Feature .
al
rn

18. Enable Countersink from

te

the dashboard.
In

• Disable Counterbore .
• Click Complete Feature .
C

19. Click Complete Feature to

complete the UDF.
r PT
Fo

20. Click User-Defined Feature

from the Get Data group, select
UDF1, and click Open.
21. Click OK and select a surface to
place the UDF.
22. Right-click and select Offset
References. Press CTRL and
select the top and right surfaces,
then position the UDF.

Module 16 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 23. Select the Options tab.
• Select the Pattern 1 check
box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
• Click First Feature and
then Last Feature .
24. Edit the 5 quantity to 3 in the
dashboard.
• Click Set Angular Extent .

y
• Click Complete Feature .

nl
25. Click Complete Feature to
complete the UDF.

O
26. Click Regenerate , if

se
necessary. U
This completes the procedure.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 15

Creating Inheritance Features
You can transfer geometry from existing design models by
creating inheritance features.

• Transfer features from one design model to another.

• Inheritance features can be dependent or independent of the original
design model.
• Inheritance features can be edited without affecting the original design
model.
• External inheritance features can be created.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Target Figure 3 – Completed

Figure 1 – Reference Part Part Inheritance Feature
te

Creating Inheritance Features

In

Inheritance features enable one-way associative propagation of geometry

and feature data from a reference part (the original, existing model) to a target
C

part (the new model). The created target part is fully functional, even when
PT

the reference part is not in session, and can contain one or more inheritance
features. Inheritance features promote data reuse.

Defining Inheritance Feature Dependency

r
Fo

You can control whether inheritance features are dependent on the reference
part. By default, inheritance features are dependent on the reference part.
Any design changes that you make in the reference part are associatively
propagated to the dependent inheritance feature when both reference
and target parts are in the same Creo Parametric session. Independent
inheritance features do not update when the reference part is modified.

Defining Varied Items in an Inheritance Feature

By default, the geometry and data contained in the inheritance feature are
identical to the reference part from which they are derived. However, you can
define geometry items that can be varied in the inheritance features without
changing the reference part, by selecting Varied Items from the Options tab
of the dashboard. These items include dimensions, parameters, geometric
tolerances, and a suppressed or resumed state of features. You can modify
these items without having the reference part in the session.

Module 16 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 External Inheritance Features
External inheritance features are useful when representing the evolution of a
design during manufacturing, or when creating standard design elements.
You can externalize an inheritance feature, thus creating an external
inheritance feature. The relative location of the target and reference part in
the assembly is used for placement of inheritance features in the target part.
The externalize operation removes reference to the assembly context and
enables you to use placement constraints to define placement of the external
inheritance feature in the target part. An inheritance feature created within a
part model is automatically created as an external inheritance feature.
A target part can contain one or more external inheritance features. Features
propagated from the reference part are represented in the target part as

y
sub-features of the external inheritance feature. You can create a reference

nl
pattern in the target part based on the pattern of external inheritance
sub-features.

O
Editing External Inheritance Features

se
An external inheritance feature displays in the model tree as a single feature.
Expanding its node displays the features that comprise the original reference
U
part, as shown in Figure 4.
al
rn
te
In

Figure 4 – Inheritance Feature Model Tree

C

Editing the definition of an external inheritance feature enables you to view

PT

the varied items for that feature and modify them accordingly in the Varied
Items dialog box. If you know the items that can be modified, you can simply
edit them in the graphics window. You cannot edit any area of the inheritance
r

feature that is not specified as a varied item. However, if you try to edit
Fo

a dimension within the inheritance feature that is not a varied dimension,

the system enables you to add it as a varied dimension, thus enabling you
to edit the dimension.
If you update the reference part, any dependent external inheritance feature
must be updated to reflect those changes. You can do this by right-clicking
the external inheritance feature in the model tree and selecting Update
Inheritance. A warning dialog box appears, indicating that the inheritance
will be recreated according to the current base model state and defined
modifications. The base model is the reference part.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Inheritance Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Inheritance [Link]

Task 1: Create an external inheritance feature in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Close from the

nl
Quick Access toolbar to close
[Link].

O
3. Click Working Directory in
the folder browser.

se
• Double-click INHERITANCE.
PRT from the Browser to open
U
it.
4. Click the Get Data group
al

drop-down menu and select

Merge/Inheritance.
rn

5. In the dashboard, click Open

te

.
In

6. In the Open dialog box, select

[Link] and click
Open.
C

7. Select coordinate system

PT

SPROCKET in the
[Link] window.
8. Select coordinate system
r

SPROCKET in the
Fo

[Link] window.
9. In the Component Placement
dialog box, select the Preview
check box.

Module 16 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 10. Click Apply-Save Changes
in the Component Placement
dialog box.
11. In the dashboard, click Toggle
Inheritance .
• Click Complete Feature .

12. Disable Csys Display .

13. Spin the model to observe it.

y
nl
O
Task 2: Add a varied item to the inheritance feature, and update the
reference model [Link].

1. Edit the definition of External

Inheritance. se
U
2. In the dashboard, select the
al

Options tab.
• Click Varied Items.
rn

3. In the [Link] model

tree, select the Protrusion id
te

5388 feature.
• Select the 8 dimension.
In

4. In the Varied Items dialog box,

edit the New Value to 12.
C

• Click OK.
PT

5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Notice that the sprocket depth
r

has increased.
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 19

 7. In the model tree, right-click
External Inheritance and
select Open Base. The
[Link] model opens.
8. In the model tree, right-click
Pattern (CUT_1) and select
Edit.
• Edit the number of cuts from
57 to 43.

9. Click Regenerate .

y
nl
10. Click Close to return to
[Link]. Notice that

O
the teeth have not updated.

se
11. In the model tree, right-click
External Inheritance and select
Update Inheritance.
U
• Click OK in the Warning dialog
box.
al

12. Notice that the teeth have

rn

updated.
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 Using External Merge to Add Material
Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry
from another model into the current model.

• Process
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into
target model.
• References:

y
– Annotations

nl
– Copy Datums

O
• Options:
– Dependent
– Refit Datums
se
U
Figure 1 – Completed External
Merge
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model

Using External Merge to Add Material

r
Fo

Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another
model into the current model. You can use the external merge feature to add
solid geometry into a part model that already contains solid geometry, or you
can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a part with
no current solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to add material, insert the merge from the current
model to which you wish to add material (the target model), then open or
select the source model. Next, “assemble” the source model into the target
model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material
icon, if necessary, to disable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of
the following from the source model:
• Annotations

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 21

• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the
source model, the copied datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their
names.
There are also two different options available when creating the merge
feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the
source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This
option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the
source model.
There is also a Merge component operation in Assembly mode,

y
used to add component geometry in the current assembly.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Add Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Merge_Add-Mtl [Link]

Task 1: Use external merge to create a machined part from its casting.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Notice the model geometry.

y
nl
3. Click Close .

O
se
U
al

4. Click Open and double-click

add_matl.prt.
rn

5. Notice that there is no geometry.

te

6. Click the Get Data group

drop-down menu and select
In

Merge/Inheritnce.
7. In the dashboard, click Open
C

and double-click [Link].

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 23

 8. Resize and reposition the
accessory window, if necessary.
9. In the Component Placement
dialog box, select the Preview
check box.
• Edit the Constraint Type
to Default and click
Apply-Save Changes .
10. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.

y
• Notice that the Dependent

nl
check box is selected.

O
11. Click Complete Feature .
12. Notice that the target model

se
seems identical to the source
model.
U
13. In the model tree, notice the
External Merge feature.
al

14. Click File > Options.

rn

15. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, click Model Display and
select Show silhouette edges to enable it.
te

16. Click Entity Display and select Show smooth lines, if necessary.
In

17. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.

18. Select one surface of the model,

C

then right-click and select Solid

PT

Surfaces.
19. Select the View tab and click the
Appearance Gallery drop-down
menu.
r
Fo

20. From the Library section, select

the ptc-std-steel appearance.

Module 16 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 21. Select the Model tab.

22. Click Revolve from the Shapes group, then right-click and select
Remove Material.
23. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
24. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane
and click Sketch.

25. Click Sketch View from the Setup group.

26. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Model

y
Display types drop-down menu.

nl
27. Enable only the following

O
Sketcher Display types:
.

28. Click References from the

Setup group and select the three se
U
additional vertical references.
al

29. Click Centerline from the

Datum group and sketch the
rn

centerline.
30. Sketch and dimension as shown.
te

31. Click OK .
In

32. Select Shading from the

Model Display types drop-down
C

menu and click Change Material

PT

Direction .
33. Click Complete Feature
and spin the model to view the
r

underside.
Fo

34. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

Standard Orientation.

35. Click File > Options.

36. Click Entity Display and disable Show smooth lines.
37. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 25

 38. Click Hole from the
Engineering group and select the
flange surface.

39. Right-click and select Offset

y
References Collector.

nl
• Press CTRL and select datum
planes RIGHT and FRONT

O
from the model tree.
40. In the dashboard, select the
Placement tab.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane se
U
RIGHT to 22.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane
al

FRONT to Align.
rn

41. Edit the diameter to 4 and the

depth to Through All .
te

42. Click Complete Feature .

In

43. With the hole still selected, click

Pattern from the Editing
C

group.
PT

44. Edit the pattern type to Axis and

select the datum axis running
through the model.
r

45. Accept the default options and

Fo

click Complete Feature .

46. Disable Plane Display and
Axis Display .

Module 16 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 47. Right-click the External Merge
feature and select Open Base.
48. Right-click Hole 1 and select
Edit.
49. Edit the diameter from 10 to 20
and click Regenerate .
50. Click Close .

y
nl
51. Click Regenerate . Notice

O
that the hole diameter updated.

se
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 27

Using External Merge to Remove Material
Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract
geometry in another model from the current model.

• Process:
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into
target model.
– Toggle on Remove Material

y
icon.

nl
• References:

O
– Annotations
– Copy Datums

se
• Options:
– Dependent Figure 1 – Completed External
U
– Refit Datums Merge
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model

PT

Using External Merge to Remove Material

Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in
r

another model from the current model. You can use the external merge
Fo

feature to remove solid geometry from a part model that already contains
solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to remove material, insert the merge from the current
model to which you wish to remove material (the target model), then open or
select the source model. Next, “assemble” the source model into the target
model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material
icon, if necessary, to enable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of
the following from the source model:
• Annotations
• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the
source model, the copied datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their
names.

Module 16 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 There are also two different options available when creating the merge
feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the
source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This
option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the
source model.
There is also a Cutout component operation in Assembly mode,
used to subtract component geometry in the current assembly.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Remove Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Merge_Remove-Mtl [Link]

Task 1: Use external merge to remove material from a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the model geometry.

y
3. Click Close .

nl
O
4. Click Open
se
, select remove_matl.prt, and click Open.
U
5. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select
Merge/Inheritnce.
al

6. In the dashboard, click Open , select [Link], and click Open.

rn

7. Resize and reposition the

accessory window, if necessary.
te

8. In the Component Placement

In

dialog box, select the Preview

check box.
C

• Edit the Constraint Type to

Default .
PT

• Click Apply-Save Changes

.
r

9. In the dashboard, select the

Fo

Options tab.
• Notice that the Dependent
check box is selected.
10. Click Remove Material .
11. Click Complete Feature .

Module 16 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click View Manager from
the In Graphics toolbar and
select the Xsec tab.
• Right-click Xsec0001 and
select Visibility.
• Click Close.
13. De-select all geometry.

14. In the model tree, right-click the

External Cut Out feature and

y
select Open Base.

nl
15. Right-click Extrude 1 and select

O
Edit.
16. Edit the thickness from 1.5 to 3.5

se
and click Regenerate .
17. Click Close twice.
U
al

18. Click Open , select

seat_belt.asm, and click
rn

Open.
te

19. Click Regenerate and

notice that the cut out geometry
In

has been updated.

C

This completes the procedure.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 31

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Module 17

y
Advanced Copy

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Creo Parametric enables you to create copies of features and groups using
various advanced options. You can copy features so that they are still
dependent on the original, but alter certain aspects of the copied feature to
U
make it different than the original. You can also copy features and replace
their references to move them to different locations.
al
rn

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
te

• Configure the independency of dimensions and sections.

In

• Perform advanced reference configuration on features.

• Copy features fully dependent with options to vary.
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 1

Configuring Independency
You can edit the dependency of specific areas of a dependently
copied feature.
• Make a dimension independent
– All other aspects still dependent.
• Make a section independent
– Depth still dependent.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating Dependent
Copies

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Dimension Independent

C

Height Figure 3 – Section Independent

PT

Configuring Independency
There are two different methods you can use to edit the dependency of a
r

dependently copied feature:

Fo

• Make Dimension Independent – You can break the dependence of any

of the copied feature's dimensions by selecting the dimension, then
right-clicking and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other aspects of the
copied feature remain dependent on the original feature. For example, in
Figure 2, the dependently copied feature's height dimension has been
made independent of the original. Consequently, when the height of the
original feature is modified, the copied feature's height remains unchanged.
However, notice that when the width of the original feature is modified, the
copied feature's width increases also.
• Make Section Independent – You can break the dependence of the copied
feature section by selecting the copied feature, then right-clicking and
selecting Make Sec Indep. This enables you to edit any dimension in the
copied feature's section independently of the original feature. However, the
copied feature's depth is still dependent on the original value. For example,
in Figure 3, the section of the highlighted dependently copied feature has

Module 17 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 been made independent. Consequently, if the original feature's section
width is modified, the copied feature's section width remains unchanged.
However, notice that when the height of the original feature is modified, the
copied feature's height increases also.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Configuring Independency
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Config_Indep [Link]

Task 1: Move and rotate copied features, then configure independency

on those copied features.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Select Extrude 2.

nl
3. Click Copy from the

O
Operations group.

se
4. Click Paste Special from the
Paste types drop-down menu.
5. In the Paste Special dialog box,
U
select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies
al

check box and click OK.

rn

6. Select datum plane DTM1 from

the model tree and edit the offset
te

value to 3.
7. Click Complete Feature .
In

8. Click Paste Special from the

C

Paste types drop-down menu.

PT

9. In the Paste Special dialog box,

select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies
r

check box, and click OK.

Fo

10. Select datum plane DTM1 from

the model tree and edit the offset
value to 3.

11. Right-click and select New

Move.
12. Right-click and select Rotate.
13. Select datum axis in the original
features, and edit the offset
angle to 90.
14. Click Complete Feature .

Module 17 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 15. Disable Plane Display and Axis Display .

16. Right-click Extrude 2 and select

Edit.
• Edit the feature height to 3.
• Edit the feature width to 1.5.

17. Click Regenerate . The

feature width and height of all
three features updates.

y
nl
18. In the model tree, right-click

O
Extrude 2 (3) and select Edit.
19. Select the 3 height dimension,
then right-click and select Make
Dim Indep.
se
U
• Select feature Extrude 2 (2).
• Click OK in the Select dialog
al

box.
rn

20. Edit the feature height of Extrude

2 (2) to 2 and click Regenerate
te

. Only that feature's height

updates.
In

21. In the model tree, right-click

C

Extrude 2 (3) and select Make

Sec Indep.
PT

22. In the model tree, right-click

Extrude 2 and select Edit.
• Edit the feature width to 1.
r
Fo

• Click Regenerate . Notice

that the width of Extrude 2 (3)
remains unchanged.

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 5

 23. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 2 and select Edit.
• Edit the feature height to 4.

• Click Regenerate .
24. Notice that the height of Extrude
2 (2) remains unchanged
because its height dimension
was made independent.
25. Notice that the height of Extrude

y
2 (3) updates even though its
section was made independent.

nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 17 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration
You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy
features by changing the placement references of the original
feature.

• Map references from original

feature to copied feature.
– Select a replacement reference
– Use original reference
– Used By

y
• Define alternate orientation.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Advanced Reference
U
Configuration Dialog Box
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Copied Group

Figure 2 – Selecting a Replacement
r

Reference
Fo

Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration

You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy features by changing
the placement references of the original feature. This is done by mapping
references of the original feature to new references for the copied feature.
When you enable advanced reference configuration in the Paste Special
dialog box, the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box opens and
displays all the original feature's placement references in a list. You can
now replace the original placement references with new ones for the copied
feature, or keep some of the original references.
When you select any of the original feature's placement references from
the list, the reference highlights in the graphics window. Also, the Used By
field in the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box displays which
other features use this reference. You can either replace that reference by

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 7

selecting a different reference, or you can select the Use Original Reference
check box, which forces the system to use the reference from the original
feature for the copied feature.
If there are alternate orientation options for placing the copied feature, the
Preview dialog box opens. The Preview dialog box displays which items can
have more than one orientation. You can select the desired item and flip its
orientation.
Advanced reference configuration settings do not enable you to edit
dimension values associated with the references. For example, if the offset to
a given datum plane is 10 in the original feature, you cannot edit the copied
feature's offset during the advanced reference configuration procedure.
Depending on the dependency you specified for the copied feature, you can

y
edit the offset value after the copy has been created.

nl
When you perform advanced reference configuration, you cannot

O
apply move or rotate transformations to the copies.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 17 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Reference
Configuration

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Adv_Ref_Config ADV_REF_CONFIG.PRT

Task 1: Use advanced reference configuration to copy a group.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

y
2. Select Group TAB1 from the model tree.

nl
3. Click Copy from the Operations group.

O
4. Select Paste Special from the Paste types drop-down menu.

se
5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference
configuration check box and click OK.
U
6. In the Advanced Reference
Configuration dialog box, select
al

each of the four references

rn

to highlight the corresponding

geometry.
te

• Click Apply Changes .

7. In the Preview dialog box, click
In

Apply Changes to accept

the default orientation.
C

8. Notice that the copy is created

PT

coincident with the original.

9. De-select all geometry and

r

rename Group TAB1_1 to

Fo

TAB2.
10. Right-click Group TAB2 and
select Edit.
11. Select the 80 dimension, then
right-click and select Make Dim
Indep.
• Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box.
12. Edit the 80 dimension to 140 and
click Regenerate .

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 9

 13. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy and click Paste Special .
14. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference
configuration check box and click OK.

15. In the Advanced Reference

Configuration dialog box, select
the first reference RIGHT and
select datum plane MOUNT_2
from the model tree.
• Select the second reference

y
Surf and select the left vertical

nl
cylindrical surface.
• Select the third reference

O
TOP_2 and select datum
plane MOUNT.

16. Click Apply Changes .

se
U
17. In the Preview dialog box, click
Apply Changes .
al

18. De-select all geometry and

rn

rename Group TAB1_1 to

TAB3.
te

19. Click Plane Display to

disable their display.
In

20. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy and click Paste Special .
C

21. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference
PT

configuration check box and click OK.

22. In the Advanced Reference

r

Configuration dialog box, select

Fo

the first reference RIGHT and

select datum plane MOUNT_2
from the model tree.
• Select the second reference
Surf and select the right
vertical cylindrical surface.
• Select the third reference
TOP_2 and select datum
plane MOUNT_3 from the
model tree.

Module 17 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 23. Click Apply Changes .
24. In the Preview dialog box, select
the Offset direction and click
Flip.
• Select the Section
Orientation and click Flip.
• Click Apply Changes .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 11

Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options
to Vary
You can create copies of features that are fully dependent on the
original but vary in specified ways.

• Denoted in model tree with

'Copied' prefix.
• Right-click to access Copied
Feature menu:
– Varied Items

y
– Break Dependence

nl
– Remove Dependence

O
se
U
al

Figure 1 – Copied Feature with

Varied Dimensions
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Copied Feature in

r

the Model Tree Figure 3 – Varied Items Dialog Box

Fo

Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary

By default, when you copy a feature dependently using Paste Special,
only dimensions and annotation element details of the resulting copy are
dependent on the original. Selecting the Fully Dependent with options to
vary option in the Paste Special dialog box enables you to create a feature
copy that is fully dependent on the original. However, you can also specify
items to vary in the copied feature.
The fully dependent copied feature is identified in the model tree by its prefix
'Copied'; for example, Copied Extrude 3, as shown in Figure 2. Initially, this
copied feature is created directly on top of the original feature in the graphics
window. However, you can now vary options of the copied feature. When
you right-click the copied feature, the following options are available in the
Copied feature menu selection:

Module 17 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 • Varied Items – Enables you to edit the dependency of specific copied
feature elements including Dimensions, References, 3D Notes, and
Parameters. Each feature element specified is placed in the Varied Items
dialog box. Within the Varied Items dialog box you can view the original
value, and you can specify the new value of the feature element within
the copied feature, as shown in Figure 3. An alternate method of adding
dimensions to the Varied Items dialog box is to simply edit the feature and
double-click the dimension you wish to vary. The system warns you that
the dimension is to be added to the Varied Items table.
• Break Dependence – Makes the copied feature temporarily independent
of the original feature. This enables you to make changes to the copied
feature or original feature while not affecting the other. You can then
restore the dependency between the original feature and copied feature

y
after the desired changes have been made.

nl
• Remove Dependence – Permanently breaks the link between the copied
feature and the original feature. The copied feature becomes independent

O
of the original feature.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Copying Features Fully Dependent with
Options to Vary

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Vary_Options
FULL_DEP_VARY-[Link]

Task 1: Copy a feature fully dependent and vary its dimensions.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy

nl
from the Operations group.

O
3. Click Paste Special from the

se
Paste types drop-down menu.
4. In the Paste Special dialog box,
U
select the Fully Dependent with
options to vary option.
al

• Click OK.
5. Notice the feature name in the
rn

model tree.
6. Notice that the copied feature is
te

coincident with the original.

In

7. In the model tree, right-click

Copied Extrude 3 and select
C

Copied feature > Varied items.

PT

8. In the graphics window, select

the 2 feature length dimension,
the 4.5 distance dimension, and
the 1 feature width dimension.
r
Fo

9. Notice each dimension in the

Varied Items dialog box.
10. Middle-click to finish selecting
items.

Module 17 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 11. In the Varied Items dialog box,
edit New Value for the 2.000 Orig
Value to 2.5.
• Edit the New Value for the
4.500 Orig Value to 1.75.
• Edit the New Value for the
1.000 Orig Value to 2.00.
• Click OK.

y
nl
O
12. In the model tree, right-click
Copied Extrude 3 and select
Copied feature > Break
dependence. se
U
13. Notice the feature name in the
model tree.
al

14. Right-click Extrude 3 and select

rn

Edit.
15. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and
te

click Regenerate .
In
C
PT

16. In the model tree, right-click

Extrude 3 and select Copied
feature > Restore dependence.
17. Notice the feature name in the
r
Fo

model tree.
18. Notice the copied feature height.

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 15

 19. In the model tree, right-click
Copied Extrude 3 and select
Copied feature > Varied items.
20. In the Varied Items dialog box,
edit the 2.500 New Value to 3.
• Click OK.

y
nl
O
21. In the model tree, right-click

se
Copied Extrude 3 and select
Copied feature > Remove
dependence.
U
22. Read the contents of the Warning
dialog box and click Yes.
al

23. In the model tree, right-click

rn

Extrude 2 and select Edit.

24. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and
te

click Regenerate .
In
C
PT

25. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 3 and notice that there is no
Copied feature selection.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 17 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 Module 18

y
Advanced Patterns

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Creo Parametric enables you to create complex patterns of features by using
various advanced options such as Curve pattern, Fill pattern, and pattern
tables. You can use pattern tables if your design calls for irregular patterns
U
of features, components, or groups of features. Using pattern tables, you
can specify unique dimensions for each instance in the pattern. Multiple
al

tables can be established for a pattern, enabling you to change the pattern
by switching the table that drives it. You can also perform editing operations
rn

such as unpatterning. You can even move and mirror patterns, and create
patterns of patterns.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

C

• Understand pattern regeneration options.

• Create dimensional patterns in one and two directions.
PT

• Create rotational dimension patterns in one and two directions.

• Create fill patterns and specify fill pattern settings.
r

• Create and apply pattern tables.

Fo

• Create curve patterns.

• Create point patterns.
• Understand how to unpattern patterned members.
• Create patterns of patterns.
• Move and mirror patterns.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 1

Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options
The three types of pattern regeneration are a trade-off between
robustness and regeneration speed.

Pattern regeneration options:

• General
– Default regen option
– Most robust
– Slowest regen speed

y
• Variable

nl
• Identical

O
– Least robust
– Fastest regen speed Figure 1 – General Pattern

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Variable Pattern Figure 3 – Identical Pattern

In

Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options

C

There are three types of regeneration options when creating a pattern. The
PT

three regeneration types are a trade-off between robustness and regeneration

speed. The three types of pattern regeneration option are:
• General – Patterns are the most robust, but take the longest to regenerate.
r
Fo

All patterns are created as General by default. For the general pattern
regeneration option, the pattern members may intersect each other and
other features. In Figure 1, the pattern must be a general pattern because
its members intersect both themselves and other geometry.
• Variable – Patterns' members cannot intersect each other, but may intersect
other features. In Figure 2, the pattern can be set to variable because its
pattern members do not intersect, but it does intersect other features. This
pattern can also be set to general, but cannot be set to identical.
• Identical – Patterns are the least robust, but regenerate the fastest. For
the identical pattern regeneration option, the pattern members must be
identical to the original pattern leader. They cannot intersect each other,
nor can they intersect other features. This option automatically becomes
grayed out if the pattern leader intersects other features. In Figure 3, the
pattern can be set to identical because its pattern members do not intersect
each other or other features.

Module 18 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction
The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in
a given direction.

• Direction and increments based

on selected dimension.
• Dimension must be in feature or in
another feature within the group.
• Select a first direction dimension
and specify the increment.

y
• Specify number of members.

nl
• Specify additional, optional
dimensions to increment.

O
se
U
Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning
al

an Extrude in One Direction

rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Editing the Dimension Pattern and Pattern Leader

Fo

Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in a given
direction. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern
in one direction:
• Specify a First Direction dimension – The pattern extends in a direction
based on the dimension selected. The dimension selected must belong
to the feature being patterned, or, in the case of a group, belong to a
feature in the group. In Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is
the 1 distance dimension.
• Specify the increment in the first direction – The increment is the spacing
between pattern members. When you select the dimension reference, you
must specify the increment to be used. You can edit the increment in the
Dimensions tab in the dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 3

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction – Type the
number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern members
includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image has four
pattern members, while in the image second from the left, the number
of pattern members is six.
Make sure to select a distance dimension when specifying the
direction dimension. If you select a dimension that denotes the
width or height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern
instances are created directly on top of the pattern leader, because
it is the width or height dimension that is being incremented rather
than the distance between pattern members.

y
Incrementing Additional Dimensions

nl
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the

O
same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to
increment additional dimensions in the first direction:

se
• Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader –
The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
U
• Specify the increment value – In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was
incremented 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height increases
al

0.5 over the previous pattern member.

Make sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions
rn

to be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension

that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected
te

dimension.
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in One
Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Dim_Pattern_1st DIM_PATTERN_1ST.PRT

Task 1: Dimension pattern an extrude feature in one direction.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select Extrude 2 and click
Pattern from the Editing

nl
group.

O
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
type to Dimension, if necessary.

se
4. Select the 1 distance dimension.
• Edit the spacing to 2.
U
5. Edit the number of members to
4.
al

6. Click Complete Feature .

rn

7. With the Pattern feature still

te

selected, right-click and select

Edit.
In

8. Edit the number of patterned

extrudes from 4 to 6.
C

9. Click Regenerate .
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 5

 10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.
11. In the dashboard, select the
Dimensions tab.
• Click in the Direction 1
Dimension collector.
• Press CTRL and select the 1
height dimension.
• Edit the increment to 0.5.

y
nl
O
12. Click Complete Feature .
13. De-select all features.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

14. In the model tree, expand the

pattern feature.
15. Select the pattern leader, then
r

right-click and select Edit.

Fo

16. Edit the width from 2 to 3.

17. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions
The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in
a given direction.

• Direction and increments based

on selected dimensions.
• Select a first and second direction
dimension and specify the
increments.
• Specify number of members in first

y
and second directions.

nl
• Specify additional, optional Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning
dimensions to increment. a Group in Two Directions

O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Dimension Pattern, Two

In

Figure 2 – Dimension Patterning a Directions, Three Additional

Group in Two Directions Result Dimensions
C

Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions

PT

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in two

directions. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern
in two directions:
r
Fo

• Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions – The pattern extends in
the directions based on the dimension references selected. In Figure 1, the
first direction dimension reference specified is the 2 distance dimension,
and the second direction dimension reference specified is the 1 distance
dimension.
• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions – The increment
is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension
reference, you must specify the increment to be used for that direction.
You can edit the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. The
increment can be different between the first and second directions. In
Figure 2, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction
increment is 2.0.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions
– Type the number of members in the dashboard. Again, the number of
pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 7

 members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the first direction has four
pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern members.
Be sure to select distance dimensions when specifying the direction
dimensions. If you select dimensions that denote the width or
height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern instances are
created directly on top of the pattern leader, because it is the width
or height dimension that is being incremented rather than the
distance between pattern members.

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,

y
or both, at the same time to create a “varying” pattern. The following items are

nl
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
• Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader –

O
The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
The dimensions selected can be different for each direction.

se
• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction
can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width was incremented
U
by -0.2 in the first direction, the radius dimension was incremented 0.075
in the first direction, and the extrude feature height was incremented 0.5
al

in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's width

decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in
rn

the second direction over the previous pattern member. Additionally, each
pattern member's radius increases by 0.075 in the first direction.
te

Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to

be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension
In

that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected
dimension.
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in Two
Directions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Dim_Pattern_2nd DIM_PATTERN_2ND.PRT

Task 1: Dimension pattern an extrude feature in two directions.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude
2 and Round 1.

nl
3. Right-click and select Group.

O
4. Rename the group to OVAL.

se
5. Select Group OVAL and click
Pattern from the Editing
U
group.
6. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
al

type to Dimension, if necessary.

7. Select the 2 distance dimension
rn

as the first direction reference.

• Edit the spacing increment to
te

2.50.
In

8. Edit the number of members to

4.
C

9. In the dashboard, click in the

PT

Direction 2 Reference collector.

• Select the 1 distance
dimension as the second
r

direction reference.
Fo

• Edit the second direction

spacing increment to 2.
• Edit the second direction
number of members to 5.

10. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 9

 11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.
12. In the dashboard, select the
Dimensions tab.
• Click in the Direction 1
Dimension collector.
• Press CTRL and select the 2
extrude width dimension.
• Edit the increment to -0.20.
• Press CTRL and select the
R0.1 radius dimension and

y
edit the increment to 0.075.

nl
13. In the Dimensions tab of the

O
dashboard, click in the Direction
2 Dimension collector.

se
14. Press CTRL and select the 1
extrude height dimension and
edit the increment to 0.50.
U
15. Click Complete Feature .
al
rn
te
In
C

16. In the model tree, expand the

PT

pattern feature.
17. Select the pattern leader, then
right-click and select Edit.
r
Fo

18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.

19. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns
The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features angularly
and radially.

• Direction and increments based

on selected dimension.
• Dimension must be in feature or in
another feature within the group.
• Select a first and second direction
dimension and specify the
increment.

y
nl
• Specify number of members in
each direction.

O
• Specify additional, optional Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning
dimensions to increment. an Extrude in One Direction

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Dimension Pattern in Two Directions and Incre-

menting Additional Dimensions
In

Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns

C

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features both angularly and
PT

radially in a given direction. The following items are required to create a

rotational dimension pattern in two directions:
• Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions – The pattern extends
r

in the directions based on the dimensions selected. The dimension

Fo

selected must belong to the feature being patterned. In the case of a

group, the dimension selected must belong to a feature in the group. In
Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is the 30 degree dimension.
In Figure 2, the second direction dimension specified causes the pattern
to extend outward. When creating a rotational dimension pattern of a
sketch-based feature (such as extrude), use a datum plane to create the
angle dimension. Do NOT use an angle dimension from a centerline in
the sketch for patterning. Unlike datum planes, centerlines do not have a
distinct positive and negative side that the system can use to correctly
determine the angular pattern dimension.
• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions – The increment
is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension
reference, you must specify the increment to be used. You can edit
the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. In Figure 1, the
increment is 45 degrees. In Figure 2, the increment was edited from 45

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 11

 degrees to 90 degrees in the first direction, and set at 2.5 in the second
direction.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions
– Type the number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern
members includes the pattern leader. The number of pattern members can
be different for each direction. In Figure 2, the left and center images have
eight pattern members in the first direction, and the right image has four
pattern members in the first direction. There are three pattern members in
the second direction.

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,

y
or both, at the same time to create a “varying” pattern. The following items are

nl
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
• Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader –

O
The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
The dimensions selected can be different for each direction. In Figure 2,

se
the left hole diameter is incremented in the first direction by 0.075. The
right hole diameter, feature height, and angle are also incremented. It is
U
important to note that the same 30 degree dimension was incremented in
both directions, which results in the pinwheel effect.
al

• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction
can be different. In Figure 2, the 30 degree dimension was incremented
rn

45 degrees in the first direction and the same 30 degree dimension was
incremented 10 degrees in the second direction. In the right image, the
te

increment was edited to 90 degrees.

Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to
In

be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension

that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected
C

dimension.
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Rot_Dim_Pattern ROT_DIM_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Create a rotational dimension pattern in two directions.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Press CTRL and select ANGLE,

y
Extrude 2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.

nl
3. Right-click and select Group.

O
4. Rename the group to TAB.

se
5. Select Group TAB and click
Pattern from the Editing
group.
U
6. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
al

type to Dimension, if necessary.

7. Select the 30 dimension as the
rn

first direction reference.

• Edit the spacing angle to 45.
te

8. Edit the number of members in

In

the first direction to 8.

9. Click Complete Feature .
C

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

PT

TAB.
11. In the dashboard, click in the
Direction 2 Reference collector.
r

• Select the 2 distance

Fo

dimension as the second

direction reference.
• Edit the second direction
spacing increment to 2.5.
• Edit the second direction
number of members to 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 13

 12. Click Complete Feature .
13. Disable Plane Display .

14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

y
TAB.

nl
15. In the dashboard, select the
Dimensions tab.

O
• Click in the Direction 1
Dimension collector.

se
• Zoom in, press CTRL, and
select the left 0.25 hole
U
diameter dimension. Edit the
increment to 0.075.
al

16. In the Dimensions tab of the

rn

dashboard, click in the Direction

2 Dimension collector.
te

• Press CTRL, select the right

0.25 hole diameter dimension,
In

and edit the increment to 0.25.

• Press CTRL, select the 1
height dimension, and edit the
C

increment to 1.
PT

• Press CTRL, select the 30

degree angle dimension, and
edit the increment to 10.
r
Fo

17. Click Complete Feature .

18. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

Module 18 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 19. Right-click Pattern 1 of TAB and
select Edit.
20. Edit the pattern from 8 LOCAL
GROUPS to 4.
21. Edit the 45 dimension to 90.

22. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 15

Creating Geometry Patterns
You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern
to pattern it.

• Create geometry patterns using any

conventional pattern type except for
Dimension patterns.
• Use cases:
– Pattern resultant geometry from
multiple features.

y
– Features to be patterned are not
consecutive in the model tree.

nl
– Pattern geometry exists on

O
imported geometry not in
conventional features.

se
Figure 1 – Geometry Selected
from Multiple Features
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Viewing the Completed

Figure 2 – Creating a Geometry Pattern Geometry Pattern
r
Fo

Creating Geometry Patterns

You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern to pattern
it. You can select surfaces using any method, including manually, seed and
boundary, and so on. You can create geometry patterns using any of the
conventional pattern types available, except for Dimension patterns.
Geometry patterns are useful in the following cases where:
• Resulting geometry from multiple features is to be patterned.
• Features to be patterned are not consecutive in the model tree, and
therefore cannot be easily grouped.
• Geometry to be patterned exists on imported geometry that does not have
conventional features.
The resulting feature creates a pattern of copy geometry surface features,
and therefore does not include the pattern leader in the geometry pattern

Module 18 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 branch in the model tree. However, the total quantity of the pattern is
maintained as in a typical feature pattern.
Geometry pattern functionality is technically not new for Creo
Parametric, but it is easier to find. It was available in Creo
Elements/Pro 5.0 (formerly Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0), although
only from the Edit menu and not via the pattern icon from the
feature toolbar.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Geometry Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Geometry GEOM_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Investigate and select geometry to be patterned.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Press CTRL and select Hole 1
and Extrude 2 from the model

y
tree.

nl
3. The geometry that these features
create is to be patterned,

O
however the features are not
consecutive.

4. Press ALT to directly select the se

U
surface.
al
rn
te
In

5. Press SHIFT and select the

boundary surface.
C
r PT
Fo

6. Release SHIFT and notice the

resulting surface selection.

Module 18 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Create a geometry pattern.

1. With the surfaces still selected,

select Geometry Pattern
from the Pattern types drop-down
menu.
2. Select the front face of the
model.

y
3. In the dashboard, click Flip

nl
Pattern Direction .

O
4. Edit the number of members to 3
and edit the spacing to 250.

se
U
al
rn
te
In

5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Notice that the pattern in
C

the model tree contains two

PT

instances, but the total pattern

quantity is three.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 19

Creating Fill Patterns
A fill pattern fills the area of a sketch with the specified feature
or group.

• Select or define a Sketch feature

for “filling.”
• Fill spacing types include:
– Square
– Diamond
– Hexagon

y
nl
– Circle
– Spiral Figure 1 – Square Fill Pattern

O
– Curve
• Fill options:
– Spacing
– Boundary Spacing se
U
– Grid Rotation
al

– Radial Spacing
Figure 2 – Circle Fill Pattern
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Spiral Fill Pattern Figure 4 – Curve Fill Pattern

Creating Fill Patterns

r

A fill pattern fills in the area of a selected sketch feature with the feature or
Fo

group of features you wish to pattern. The sketch feature defines the outline
for “filling.” You can either select an existing sketch or define a new, internal
sketch. If the shape or size of the sketch feature referenced by the Fill pattern
is edited, the pattern updates.

Fill Pattern Spacing Types

The following fill pattern spacing types are available:

• Square Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a square pattern.

• Diamond Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a diamond

pattern.
• Hexagon Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a hexagon
pattern.

Module 18 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 • Circle Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a concentric circle
pattern.

• Spiral Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a spiral pattern.

• Curve Spacing – Spaces the pattern members along the specified
sketch feature.

Fill Options
Once the fill pattern type has been specified, you can edit the following fill
options:

• Pattern Spacing – Sets the spacing between pattern member centers.

y
nl
• Pattern Boundary Spacing – Sets the minimum distance between
the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary. Negative values

O
enable centers to lie outside the sketch.
• Pattern Grid Rotation – Sets the grid rotation angle about the origin.

se
The origin is the location of the pattern leader.
U
• Pattern Radial Spacing – Sets the radial spacing. Available only for
Circular and Spiral fill pattern types.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Fill_Pattern FILL_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the different fill pattern spacing types and options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 2 and click
Pattern from the Editing

y
group.

nl
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
type to Fill.

O
4. Select Sketch 2 from the model
tree.
5. Edit the Pattern Spacing
1.5.
to
se
U
6. Click Complete Feature .
al

7. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

rn

Extrude 2.
8. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation
te

to 45.
In

9. Click Complete Feature .

C

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

PT

Extrude 2.
11. Edit the Pattern Boundary
r

Spacing to 1.
Fo

12. Click Complete Feature .

Module 18 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 13. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of
Extrude 2.
14. Select Hexagon Spacing
from the Spacing types
drop-down menu.
15. Edit the Pattern Boundary
Spacing back to 0.
16. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation
back to 0.

y
17. Click Complete Feature .

nl
18. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

O
Extrude 2.
19. Select Circle Spacing from
the Spacing types drop-down
menu. se
U
20. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing
al

to 2.5.
21. Click Complete Feature .
rn

22. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

te

Extrude 2.
In

23. Select Spiral Spacing from

the Spacing types drop-down
menu.
C

24. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing

PT

to 2.
r

25. Select Curve Spacing from

Fo

the Spacing types drop-down

menu.
26. Edit the Pattern Spacing to
2.
27. De-select the pattern leader
dot and the two corner pattern
members.
28. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 23

Specifying Fill Pattern Settings
Fill pattern settings can be edited to affect how the resulting
fill pattern geometry appears.

Options include:
• Use alternate origin
• Follow leader location
• Follow surface shape
– Follow surface direction

y
– Spacing

nl
♦ As projected
♦ Map to Surface space

O
♦ Map to Surface UV space
Figure 1 – Using an Alternate Origin

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Follow Surface Shape: Follow Surface Direc-

C

tion Enabled and Disabled

PT

Specifying Fill Pattern Settings

Once you have specified a Fill pattern, you can set some options to affect
r

how the resulting geometry appears.

Fo

Use Alternate Origin

The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center.
The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can
specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option.
Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern
member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified
origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly
specified origin; instead, the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement,
but the system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern
leader. You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin:
• Datum points
• Coordinate systems
• A vertex

Module 18 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 • The end of a sketched curve
You can only select features created before the pattern leader as
the alternative origin.

Follow Leader Location

With Follow leader location enabled, the system offsets pattern members
from the sketch plane of the fill curve by the same distance as the leader.
With the option disabled, the system centers the pattern members around the
sketch plane of the fill curve.

Follow Surface Shape

y
You can configure the pattern members to follow a surface contour by

nl
enabling the Follow surface shape option. In the images of Figure 2, the
pattern members move up and down with respect to the surface shape

O
specified.

se
You can then control the instance orientation to follow the surface direction,
if desired. Enabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that each
pattern member is oriented to follow the surface, as shown in the left image of
U
Figure 2. Disabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that all pattern
members have a constant orientation on the selected surface, but will still
al

relocate according to the shape of the surface. The orientation of all members
is the same as the pattern leader, as shown in the right image of Figure 2.
rn

Spacing Options
te

When using the Follow surface shape option, you have the following spacing
In

options available:
• As projected
C

• Map to surface space

PT

• Map to surface UV space

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Specifying Fill Pattern Settings

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Fill_Settings FILL_PATTERN_SETTINGS.PRT

Task 1: Create a fill pattern and specify an alternate origin.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select EXTRUDE_1 and click
Pattern from the Editing

y
group.

nl
3. Edit the pattern type to Fill.

O
• Select SKETCH_1.
• Edit the Pattern Spacing

se
to 1.5.
• Edit the Pattern Boundary
U
Spacing to 1.0.
al

4. Select Diamond Spacing

rn

from the spacing types

drop-down menu.
te

5. Click Named Views and

In

select BOTTOM.
6. Notice that the pattern is
C

using the leader as the pattern

origin, and therefore it is not
PT

symmetrical within the sketch.

7. Enable Point Display .

r
Fo

8. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Select the Use alternate
origin check box.
• Select datum point PNT0 as
the new origin.
• Notice that the pattern is now
using the point as the pattern
origin, and is symmetrical
within the sketch.

Module 18 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click Complete Feature .
10. Select SKETCH_1 to view it.
• Notice that the pattern remains
in the alternate arrangement,
but the system has adjusted
the pattern placement to be
centered on the pattern leader.

y
nl
11. Disable Point Display .

O
Task 2: Create a fill pattern and make it follow a surface shape.

se
1. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
Standard Orientation.
U
2. Select EXTRUDE_2 and click
Pattern .
al

3. Edit the pattern type to Fill.

rn

• Select SKETCH_2.
• Edit the Pattern Spacing
te

to 2.00.
In

• Edit the Pattern Boundary

Spacing to 0, if necessary.
C

4. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 27

 5. In the model tree, right-click
SHAPE and select Unhide.
6. Right-click Pattern 2 of
EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit
Definition.
7. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Enable Follow surface
shape.
• Select the surface quilt.

y
• Enable Follow surface

nl
direction, if necessary.
8. Click Complete Feature .

O
Notice that all pattern

se
members follow the
specified surface contour. U
9. Right-click Pattern 2 of
EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit
al

Definition.
rn

10. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
te

• Disable Follow surface

direction.
In

11. Click Complete Feature .

C

Notice that all pattern

members are now facing in
PT

the same orientation as the

pattern leader, but they still
follow the specified surface
r

contour.
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Pattern Tables
You can create complex or irregular patterns of features,
components, or groups using pattern tables.

• Specify the dimensions for the

table.
– Table Dimensions tab
• Edit the table using Pro/TABLE.
– Exit and Save

y
– Quit does not save

nl
O
Figure 1 – Table Dimensions Tab

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Pro/TABLE Editor Figure 3 – Created Table Pattern

r
Fo

Creating Pattern Tables

A pattern table is a pattern created by specifying pattern instances in a tabular
format within Creo Parametric's Pro/TABLE editor. You can create complex
or irregular patterns of features, components, or groups using pattern tables.
Using pattern tables, you can also control the location of individual instances
by specifying absolute dimensions for each instance in the pattern to the
same reference, such as the pattern leader.
You can use pattern tables in Assembly mode to pattern assembly features
and components. Pattern tables do not act as family tables. Pattern tables
can only drive pattern dimensions. You have to unpattern the members to
make them independent. You can also include pattern tables in family tables,
so a particular family instance can use a specified pattern table.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 29

Specifying the Dimensions for the Table
A pattern table is similar to a family table. Within a family table you must
specify the items you wish to vary from instance to instance. Within a pattern
table you must specify the feature dimensions you wish to vary from pattern
member to pattern member. For example, if you know a hole feature's
diameter must change for different pattern members, you must specify that
hole diameter dimension to be varied in the pattern table. Or, if you know
the pattern members must grow vertically, you must specify the feature
dimension that enables this direction of pattern member growth. Pressing
CTRL enables you to add multiple dimensions to the pattern table. The
added dimensions can be viewed within the Table Dimensions tab of the
dashboard, as shown in Figure 1.

y
Editing the Table using the Pro/TABLE Editor

nl
When you edit the pattern table, the system launches the Pro/TABLE editor

O
with the Table Dimensions you have specified, as shown in Figure 2. Each
Table Dimension is placed in its own column, in the order it was selected.

se
The system automatically creates the first column with a header name of idx.
This is simply an index number for the pattern members, and begins with a
value of 1. Each pattern member must contain an index number, and each
U
index number must be unique. The pattern table starts numbering at zero
(for the lead instance) but does not display this instance in the table since it
al

cannot be modified using the table.

rn

Each pattern member resides in its own row in the Pro/TABLE editor. Edit the
Table Dimensions as desired for each pattern member. Specifying a value
te

of “*” causes that pattern instance's Table Dimension to be equivalent to

that of the pattern leader. Distance values are measured from the pattern
In

leader. When finished editing the pattern table, you must click File > Exit
from the Pro/TABLE editor to save the table and return to Creo Parametric.
File > Quit aborts all changes.
C

It can be beneficial to create the pattern as a Dimension pattern first,

PT

and then edit the definition of the Dimension pattern and edit its type
to Table. Doing this automatically propagates the pattern table with
all pattern members from the Dimension pattern and the dimension
r

values used. Pattern member rows can then be deleted from the
Fo

table and additional Table Dimensions can be added.

You can modify a table pattern at any time after you create the pattern. When
editing table patterns, it is important to understand the difference between
variable and invariable dimensions. Variable dimensions are those that
are listed in the pattern table and can vary from one instance to another.
All other dimensions of the patterned feature are invariable. All instances
share the same value for invariable dimensions. Any change to a variable
dimension affects only the instance that contains that variable dimension and
the table updates with the new value. Any change you make to an invariable
dimension affects all instances.
Suppressing or deleting a table-driven pattern suppresses or
deletes the pattern leader.

Module 18 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Pattern Tables
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Create_Pat_Table PATTERN_TEMPLATE.PRT

Task 1: Create a pattern template on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern
from the Editing group.

y
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern

nl
type to Table.
• Select the Table Dimensions

O
tab.
• Press CTRL and select the
7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions,
respectively.
se
U
4. Notice that these dimensions are
added to the Table Dimensions
al

tab.
rn
te
In

5. In the dashboard, select the

Tables tab.
C

• Click in the Name field, edit

the table name to HOLES, and
PT

press ENTER.
• Click Edit.
r
Fo

6. The Pro/TABLE Editor launches.

7. Notice that each Table Dimension
is added as its own column in
addition to the idx column.
8. Notice that each Table Dimension
is given a name.
9. Notice that the Table Dimension
values in the graphics window
have been replaced by the
corresponding column name
from Pro/TABLE.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 31

 10. In the idx column of Pro/TABLE,
starting in row R12, type number
1 through 15.
11. Edit the remainder of the table
as shown in the figure.
12. In the Pro/TABLE Editor, click
File > Exit.

y
nl
O
13. Click Complete Feature .
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 18 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Applying Pattern Tables
You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file and
reading it into another model's pattern table.

• Write a *.ptb from a pattern table.

• Read a *.ptb file into a pattern
table.
– Number of Table Dimensions
must equal number of columns
in table.

y
– The order of Table Dimensions
does matter.

nl
• You can switch the Active Table.

O
se
Figure 1 – Applying a Pattern Table
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Applying a Different

PT

Pattern Table

Applying Pattern Tables

r
Fo

You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file. This is done by
right-clicking the table you want to reuse in the Tables tab and selecting
Write. The *.ptb file has the same name as the table from which it was
written. You can maintain a library of *.ptb files for use with standard pattern
configurations, and read them into various part models to easily switch
between configurations.

Reading *.ptb Files into a Model

You can read an existing *.ptb file into a pattern table by right-clicking in the
Tables tab of the Pattern table dashboard and selecting Read. You can then
browse to find the desired *.ptb file for your pattern table. The rules about
reading in an existing pattern table *.ptb file, are as follows:
• The number of dimensions specified in the Table Dimensions tab must
equal the number of dimensions found within the *.ptb file. If the number is
different, the table fails to be read in.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 33

• The order in which you specify dimensions in the Table dimensions matters.
The system maps the Table Dimensions to the pattern table columns in the
order they are found in the Table Dimensions tab. Thus, if your first Table
Dimension is a diameter dimension and the first column in the pattern table
is a distance, you will most likely not achieve the desired pattern results.

Switching the Active Table

Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, so you can change the
pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can either read in a *.ptb file
to create a new table or you can add a new one by right-clicking in the Tables
tab and selecting Add. Once the table is created you can edit it appropriately.
While multiple tables can be established for a pattern, only one table can

y
be the Active table at any given time. The Active table is displayed in the

nl
dashboard. You can specify a different Active table by selecting it from the
drop-down list or right-clicking the desired table in the Tables tab and selecting

O
Apply. For example, Figure 1 displays a pattern table that is the active pattern
table. Figure 2 displays a different pattern table that was made the active

se
table. You can also edit the table name in the Tables tab of the dashboard.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Applying Pattern Tables

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Apply_Pat_Table APPLY_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Apply pattern tables to a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of
Hole 1.

y
3. In the dashboard, select the

nl
Tables tab.
• Right-click #1 (Active) and

O
select Write.

se
4. Expand the message window
and notice the message
that states, “Pattern table
U
MUFFLER-1 was written to the
file [Link].1.”
al

5. Click Complete Feature .

rn

6. Click Folder Browser from

te

the Navigator.
7. In the Folder Browser, click
In

Working Directory and

double-click [Link] to open
C

it.
r PT
Fo

8. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern

.
9. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
type to Table.
• Press CTRL and select the
7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions,
respectively.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 35

 10. In the dashboard, select the
Tables tab.
• Notice that the Active table is
TABLE1.
• Right-click in the collector and
select Read.
• In the Open dialog box, select
[Link] and click Open.
Note that TABLE2 is created.
• Edit the name from TABLE2

y
to MUFFLER-1 and press
ENTER.

nl
11. Right-click in the collector and select Read.

O
• In the Open dialog box, select [Link] and click Open. Note
that TABLE3 is created.

se
• Edit the name of TABLE3 to MUFFLER-2.
U
12. In the Tables tab, right-click
MUFFLER-1 and select Apply.
al

• Right-click TABLE1 and select

rn

Remove.
13. Click Complete Feature .
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of
Hole 1.
15. In the dashboard, select
MUFFLER-2 from the Active
table drop-down list.
16. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 37

Creating Curve Patterns
A Curve pattern follows the shape of a curve.

• The curve can be open or closed.

• Spacing options:
– Spacing between pattern
members
• Pattern options:
– Use alternate origin
– Follow surface shape

y
♦ Follow surface direction

nl
♦ Spacing

O
– Follow curve direction Figure 1 – Follow Surface
Shape Enabled

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Follow Curve Direction Figure 3 – Follow Curve

te

Enabled Direction Disabled

In

Creating Curve Patterns

You can create a Curve pattern of a feature or a group of features by selecting
C

an existing curve as the reference. In a Curve pattern, the pattern members

follow the shape of the curve. The selected curve can be open or closed.
PT

The original feature should be located at the starting point of the

reference curve to prevent the pattern objects from being offset
from the curve. Creo Parametric determines the starting point by
r

the first sketched entity. The location at which you first click to begin
Fo

sketching the curve becomes the starting point.

Controlling the Number of Pattern Members

You can control the number of pattern members that are created using either
of the following methods:

• Member Spacing – You can use the Use Member Spacing option to
specify the spacing between pattern member centers. The total quantity of
pattern members created is determined by the spacing specified.

• Member Quantity – You can use the Use Member Quantity option
to specify the total number of pattern members that are created. The
spacing between pattern members is determined by the total quantity of
pattern members.

Module 18 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 Use Alternate Origin
The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center.
The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can
specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option.
Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern
member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified
origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly
specified origin; the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement, but the
system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern leader.
You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin:
• Datum points
• Coordinate systems

y
nl
• A vertex
• The end of a sketched curve

O
You can only select features created before the pattern leader as
the alternative origin.

Follow Surface Shape se

U
You can configure the pattern members to follow the shape of a specified
al

surface. Enabling Follow surface shape causes the pattern member

placement to follow the shape of the selected surface, as shown in Figure 1.
rn

You can then set the member orientation to follow the surface direction.
Enabling Follow surface direction specifies that each pattern member be
te

oriented to follow the surface, as shown in Figure 1. Disabling Follow surface

direction specifies that all pattern members have a constant orientation on
In

the selected surface. The orientation of all members is the same as the
pattern leader.
C

The following spacing options are available when using Follow Surface
PT

Shape:
• As projected
• Map to surface space
r
Fo

• Map to surface UV space

Follow Curve Direction

You can also configure the pattern members to follow the curve direction.
Enabling Follow curve direction specifies that each pattern member be
oriented to follow the curve on the sketch plane. For example, if the pattern
leader is normal to the curve, then each pattern member is also normal to
the curve, as shown in Figure 2. Constant, however, specifies that all pattern
members have a constant orientation along the curve on the sketch plane.
The orientation of all members is the same as the pattern leader, as shown
in Figure 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Creating Curve Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Curve_Pattern CURVE_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Create a curve pattern in a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 1 and click
Pattern from the Editing

y
group.

nl
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
type to Curve.

O
4. Select Sketch 1.

se
5. Edit the Use Member Spacing
value to 1.
U
6. Click Complete Feature .
al

7. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

Extrude 1.
rn

8. In the dashboard, click Use

te

Member Quantity .
• Edit the quantity to 7.
In

9. Click Complete Feature .

C

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

PT

Extrude 1.
11. Edit the Use Member Quantity
to 8.
r
Fo

12. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Disable Follow curve
direction.
13. Click Complete Feature .
14. Notice all pattern members
follow the curve but are oriented
the same as the pattern leader.

Module 18 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 15. In the model tree, right-click
SURFACE and select Unhide.
16. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of
Extrude 1.
17. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Enable Follow curve
direction.
• Enable Follow surface
shape.

y
• Select SURFACE.

nl
18. Click Complete Feature .

O
19. Right-click Sketch 1 and select
Unhide.
20. Spin the model and notice that
the pattern members follow the se
U
surface shape.
al
rn

21. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

Extrude 1.
te

22. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
In

• Disable Follow surface

direction for the Member
C

orientation.
PT

23. Click Complete Feature .

24. Notice that all pattern members
still follow the curve and the
r

surface shape, but they are all

Fo

oriented the same as the pattern

leader.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 41

Creating Point Patterns
Create a pattern by referencing multiple points.

• Points can be:

– Datum point features containing
multiple points.
– Sketch features containing
multiple Geometry Points.

Figure 1 – Original Model

y
nl
O
Figure 2 – Datum Point Selected se
Figure 3 – Point Pattern Created
U
Creating Point Patterns
al

You pattern a feature by selecting a datum point or sketch that contains

rn

multiple points. By default, a pattern member is then created for each of the
multiple points. However, like other pattern types, you can disable instances
te

by clicking the “preview dots.” You can also create reference patterns based
on a created point pattern. Other pattern properties also apply to Point
In

Patterns.
The points referenced for the pattern can be of two types:
C

• A standard datum point feature containing multiple points.

PT

• A sketch feature containing multiple Geometry Points. The sketch can also
contain other geometry, however the pattern members are only created at
Geometry Point locations.
r

– The sketch can preexist and be selected at the time of pattern creation.
Fo

– The sketch can also be created as an internal sketch, within the Point
Pattern feature. Like other internal sketches, the sketch containing the
points is hidden upon pattern creation.

Module 18 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Point Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Point_Pattern POINT_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Create point patterns using different types of datum points.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Extrude 1 from the model

y
tree.

nl
3. Click Pattern .

O
• Select Point as the pattern
type.

4. Click Use Point Feature se

U
from the dashboard.
5. Select a point from the POINT_1
al

feature.
rn

6. Select the “preview dots” to

disable two pattern members, as
te

shown.
In

7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Disable Point Display .

C
PT

9. Select Extrude2 from the model

tree.
r
Fo

10. Click Pattern .

11. Select Point as the pattern type.

12. Click Use Sketch Point .

13. Right-click and select Define
Internal Sketch.
• Click Use Previous.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 43

 14. Click Offset .
• Select the left curved outside
edge and type -0.25 as the
offset.
15. Click Divide from the Editing
group and select a point on the
arc to divide it in half.
16. Click Point from the Datum
group and place five points:

y
three on the arc ends and two on
the arc midpoints.

nl
17. Click OK .

O
18. Click Named Views from the
In Graphics toolbar and select
3D.
se
U
19. Select the “preview dot” to
disable the pattern member
al

shown.
rn

20. Click Complete Feature .

te
In
C

21. Select Draft 1, then right-click

and select Pattern.
PT

• Select Reference as the

pattern type and then click
Complete Feature .
r
Fo

22. Select Draft 2, then right-click

and select Pattern.
• Select Reference and then
click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Unpatterning Group Patterns
You can unpattern a Group Dimension pattern or a Group
Reference pattern.

• Pattern feature removed, leaving Group features.

• Each Group is independent, enabling individual manipulation.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Unpatterning a Patterned Group
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Deleted Independent Groups

C

Unpatterning Group Patterns

PT

A group Dimension pattern and a group Reference pattern can both be

unpatterned. When a pattern is unpatterned, the Pattern feature is removed
from the model tree, leaving each of the resulting group members, as
shown in Figure 1. These group features are now independent and can be
r
Fo

individually manipulated.
For example, in Figure 2, each of the group features in the middle of the
model were deleted because they are independent of each other. The groups
could not have been deleted if they were still part of the pattern. Furthermore,
the tab groups in the top row were ungrouped, enabling the round features to
be deleted.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 45

PROCEDURE - Unpatterning Group Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Unpattern [Link]

Task 1: Pattern and unpattern groups in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Group TAB and click
Pattern .

y
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern

nl
type to Dimension, if necessary.

O
4. Select the 2 distance dimension
as the first direction reference.

se
• Edit the spacing increment to
2.50.
U
5. Edit the number of members to
4.
al

6. In the dashboard, click in the

rn

Direction 2 Reference collector.

• Select the 1 distance
te

dimension as the second

direction reference.
In

• Edit the second direction

spacing increment to 2.
C

• Edit the second direction

number of members to 5.
PT

7. Click Complete Feature .

8. De-select all geometry.
r
Fo

9. Press CTRL and select Hole 1

and Hole 2.
• Right-click and select Group.
• Rename the group to HOLES.

Module 18 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 10. Select Group HOLES and click
Pattern .
11. Verify the pattern type is
Reference and the Reference
type is Group.
12. Click Complete Feature .

13. In the model tree, right-click

Pattern 2 of HOLES and select

y
Unpattern.

nl
14. Notice that the Pattern feature
has been replaced by Group

O
features in the model tree.
15. Notice that all features are still

se
present in the graphics window.
U
al
rn

16. In the model tree, right-click

Group LOCAL_GROUP_26 and
te

select Ungroup.
• Delete the first hole feature
In

and click OK.

17. In the model tree, right-click
C

Group LOCAL_GROUP_29 and

select Ungroup.
PT

• Delete the second hole feature

and click OK.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 47

 18. In the model tree, right-click
Pattern 1 of TAB and select
Unpattern.
19. Again, notice that the Pattern
feature has been replaced by
Group features in the model tree.
20. Again, notice that all features
are still present in the graphics
window.
21. Right-click Group

y
LOCAL_GROUP_12 and
select Delete.

nl
• Click OK to also delete the

O
child local hole group.

se
This completes the procedure.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Patterns of Patterns
You can now select an existing pattern to create a pattern.

• You can create patterns of an

existing pattern:
• You can reference pattern a pattern
along an existing pattern.
– Feature
– Group
– Both

y
nl
Figure 1 – Patterning a Pattern

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Reference Pattern Types

(Feature, Group, Both)
r

Creating Patterns of Patterns

Fo

You can now create a pattern of an existing pattern. The pattern types do
not need to be the same – for example, you can create a linear pattern of an
axis pattern, or vice versa. You can also use the Unpattern option to remove
each of the patterns.
In addition, you can reference pattern a feature along a pattern of a pattern,
provided a feature is created on the pattern leader of another pattern.
Depending on how the features were created, there are three different
reference pattern types that can be created:
• Feature – The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In
Figure 2, in the left image, the round feature is being Reference patterned
based on the existing axis pattern.
• Group – The Reference pattern references either a group or existing
pattern of a pattern. In Figure 2, in the middle image, an axis pattern is then

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 49

 direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature is
Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.
• Both – The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern
and a group pattern. In Figure 2, in the right image, the round is Reference
patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group
pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Patterns of Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Pattern_Patterns [Link]

Task 1: Pattern an existing pattern.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select
AXIS_PATTERN.

y
3. Click Pattern from the Editing

nl
group.

O
se
U
al
rn

4. Select Direction as the type.

te

• Select datum plane FRONT

In

from the model tree.

• Click Flip First Direction .
C

• Type 3 as the quantity.

• Type 50 as the spacing.
PT

5. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 51

Task 2: Reference pattern a round feature on an existing pattern of a
pattern.

1. Select ROUND_1.
2. Click Pattern .
• Notice the default pattern type
is Reference pattern and that
the default Reference type is
Feature.
• Also notice that the reference

y
pattern only occurs on the axis

nl
pattern.

O
se
U
3. In the dashboard, edit the
Reference type to Group.
al

• Notice that the round only

rn

patterns once per direction

pattern group.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 18 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 4. In the dashboard, edit the
Reference type to Both.
• Notice that the round patterns
on each member of the
axis pattern as well as each
member of the direction
pattern of the axis pattern.
5. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 53

Moving/Mirroring Patterns
You can now move and mirror patterns.

Move and Mirror Patterns

• Additional pattern types:
– Fill
– Direction
– Axis

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Pattern Mirrored

Figure 1 – Original Model and Rotated
te

Moving/Mirror Patterns
In

You can move or mirror patterns using Copy and Paste Special.
C

These operations can be performed on fill, direction, axis, dimension and

table patterns. However, the operations cannot be performed on group or
PT

reference patterns.
You can perform multiple translate or rotate operations within a
single copy operation.
r
Fo

Module 18 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Moving/Mirroring Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Pattern\Mirror_Pattern MIRROR_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Mirror the pattern of slots around datum RIGHT.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in

y
the model tree.

nl
• Click Mirror from the

O
Editing group.
• Select the RIGHT datum plane

se
from the model tree.
• Click Complete Feature .
U
Task 2: Copy and paste the pattern of slots.
al

1. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in

rn

the model tree.

• Press CTRL+C to copy the
te

pattern to the clipboard.

In

• Select Paste Special from

the Paste types drop-down list.
C

The Paste Special dialog box

appears.
PT

• Select Apply Move/Rotate

transformations to copies.
• Click OK.
r
Fo

2. Click Rotate from the

dashboard.
• Select axis through the middle
of the cover as the axis to
rotate the copy around.
• In the dashboard, type 25 for
the angle and press ENTER.
• Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 18 | Page 55

Copyright

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric

Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its
subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use
of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any
copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC.
Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation
may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or

y
transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no

nl
authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no

O
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the

se
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
U
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
al

we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
rn

scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
te

and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information:
In

For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm
products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 20xx. For other products, click Help >
About on the main menu of the product.
C

Registered Trademarks of PTC

Advanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Calculation
PT

Management Suite, CoCreate, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate,

EPD, [Link], Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine,
InPart, InterComm, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft, MECHANICA,
NetRegulus, NetRM, the NetRegulus logo, Optegra, OneSpace, Parametric Technology, Parametric
r

Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, ProductPoint, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E,

Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First,
Fo

Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo,
PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, StudyWorks, The Product
Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire, Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink,
Windchill MPMLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink..
Trademarks of PTC
3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, Arbortext
Companion for Word®, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext
Dynamic Link Manager, Arbortext Styler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher,
Arbortext CSDB for S1000D®, Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D®, Arbortext Reviewer for
S1000D®, Arbortext Authoring Interface for S1000D®, Arbortext Editor for S1000D®, Arbortext
Publisher for S1000D®, Arbortext Provisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext
Provisioning Transaction Manager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext
Learning Content Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext
Reviewer for EAGLE, Arbortext LSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, Auto
Round, CDRS, CoCreate Modeling, CoCreate Drafting, CoCreate Model Manager, CoCreate
Drawing Manager, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker,
Create Collaborate Control Communicate, ECAD Compare, EDAcompare, EDAconduit,
DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER,
eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM,
Harmony, Import Data Doctor, InSight, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm
 EDAconduit, collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System
Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE,
Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE,
Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/Manikin, Pro/MESH, Pro/[Link],
Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NC MILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC
SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR,
Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR,
Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS,
Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TABLE, Pro/TOOLMAKER, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/[Link],
Pro/[Link], Pro/WELDING, ProductView, ProductView ECAD Compare, ProductView
Validate, PTC Precision, PTC DesignQuest, PTC Channel Advantage, Realized Value Platform,
Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, Windchill ProjectLink, Windchill
SupplyLink, Windchill RequirementsLink, and Windchill Supplier Management..

y
Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

nl
Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or
pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998;
(EP)0240557/02-October-1986; 5,423,023/05-June-1990; 4,956,771/11-September-1990;

O
5,058,000/15-October-1991; 5,140,321/18-August-1992; 5,297,053/22-March-1994; 5,428,772/
27-June-1995; 5,469,538/21-Nov-1995; 5,469,538/21-November-1995; 5,506,950/09-April-1996;
4,310,614/30-April-1996; 5,513,316/30-April-1996; 5,526,475/11-June-1996; 5,561,747/01-October-

se
1996; 5,526,475/6-November-1996; 5,557,176/09-November-1996; 5,680,523/21-October-1997;
5,689,711/18-November-1997; 5,771,392/23-June-1998; 5,838,331/17-November-1998;
5,844,555/01-Dec-1998; 5,844,555/1-December-1998; 5,850,535/15-December-1998; 4,310,615/
U
21-December-1998; 4,310,614/22-April-1999; 6,275,866/14-Aug-2001; 6,275,866/14-August-2001;
6,308,144/23-October-2001; 6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002; 6,473,673B1/29-October-2002; PCT
03/05061/13-Feb-2003; 6,545,671B1/08-April-2003; GB2354683B/04-June-2003; GB2354683B/04-
al

June-2003; 6,580,428B1/17-June-2003; GB2354685B/18-June-2003; GB2354684B/02-July-2003;

6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,625,607B1/23-September-2003;
rn

GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003; GB2354686/15-October-2003;

GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003; GB2353115/10-December-
2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004; GB2388003B/21-January-
te

2004; GB2365567/10-March-2004; EU0812447/26-May-2004; GB2363208/25-August-2004;

GB2366639B/13-October-2004; 7,006,956/28-February-2006; 7,013,246B1/14-March-2006;
7,013,468/14-March-2006; (JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007; 7,464,007B2/09-December-2008.
In

Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc. I
C

Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. TeX is a trademark of the American
Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, and Tiger are trademarks or registered
PT

trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and RealDWG are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. BEA
WebLogic Server and BEA WebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. CATIA and
CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon, CETOL,
r

CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of
Fo

CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence
Design Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive,
HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies,
Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentum
is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor
Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC in the United
States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. 2D DCM,
3D DCM, CDM and AEM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. HP, Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are
registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2, DOORS, AIX, and WebSphere
are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, the
ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks or registered
trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countries and are
used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of
this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Feature-Following Anti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork
Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of
Logitech International S.A. [Link] is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of
MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design,
AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark
of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft, ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, the Windows logo, Visual
Basic, the Visual Basic logo, SharePoint, and Active Accessibility are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a
registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the
Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, FLEXnet Publisher, InstallShield, and InstallAnywhere are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Acresso Software Inc. Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Netscape
Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks or service
marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. OSF/Motif and
Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracle and interMedia are registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS, Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem
are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx, Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm,
More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync
logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONE is a registered trademark and
PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximity and Linguibase are registered
trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager and Softlock are trademarks of
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. RosettaNet is a trademark
and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit

y
organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. IRIX is a registered
trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D (R) is a registered trademark of ASD. SolidWorks

nl
and eDrawings are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARC is a
registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Products

O
bearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems,
Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the

se
Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and "The Network is the Computer"
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in
other countries. Symbolics, CLOE Runtime, and Minima are trademarks, and CLOE, Genera, and
U
Zetalisp are registered trademarks of Symbolics, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO
Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or
al

registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS,
Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks
or registered trademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment
rn

is a licensed trademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications,

Inc. API Tookit is a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered
trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
te

VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Product may contain
RealDWG technology by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright 1998-2006 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved
In

([Link]/autodeskrealdwg). File Filters © 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc. Certain

business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos. [Link] is copyrighted
software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. Pro/TOOLMAKER
C

contains licensed third-party technology: 5AXMSURF is copyrighted software of ModuleWorks

GmbH. Certain 3D Read CAD data exchange tools are copyrighted software of Datakit SRL.
PT

Hyphenologist Copyright 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved. RetrievalWare
is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of
DataDirect Technologies. PStill and PSRaster software is copyright © Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert,
1996 to present. FAST InStream is copyright © of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc. Portions of the
Mathcad Solver © 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted
r

software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open Text Corporation. Rational Rose and Rational
Fo

ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not
responsible for the operation of this software product. G POST is copyrighted software and a
registered trademark of Austin NC. Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion,
Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright © 1992-2006 Larson
Software Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork
Design 1990–2001. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.
Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Visual
Basic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer Network
Redistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted software
of Microsoft Corporation. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Fatigue
Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International. NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is
copyrighted software of MKS Inc.
Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 2002–2004
Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license
and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. PDFlib
software is copyright © 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Proximity Linguistic
Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain software products, including:
The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright © 1997 Bertelsmann Lexikon
Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/C.A.
Strombertg AB Database. Copyright © 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB. Copyright © 1989, All Rights
 Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions Fernand Nathan Database. Copyright
© 1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,
Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright © 1990 Espasa-Calpe. Copyright ©
1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre
i Maura Database. Copyright © 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright © 1991, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc.
Database. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994, All Rights
Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright © 1992
Hachette. Copyright © 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDE
a.s. Database. Copyright © 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright © 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved,
Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990
Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright © 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.;
The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright ©
1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994,
All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard International Publishers
Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright © 1990, All

y
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database. Copyright
© 1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The

nl
Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright © 1995, 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie by.
Copyright © 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/William

O
Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd.
Copyright © 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Zanichelli
Database. Copyright © 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity

se
Technology, Inc. Certain license management is based on Elan License Manager © 1989-1999
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. PDEFIT © 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski.
MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) © 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co.
U
KG. TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A. HOOPS
graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America,
Inc. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix
al

Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,
TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Parasolid
rn

is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company. VisTools library is copyrighted
software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging
to VKI Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Certain
te

graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies: GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk
L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any special,
In

indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or other tortious action, arising out of or in
connection with the use or performance of this software. JPEG: This software is based in part on
C

the work of the Independent JPEG Group. PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
PT

software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise,
including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In
no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arising
r

out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun
Fo

Icon: Copyright, 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine

copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc. Portions of software documentation are used
with the permission of the World Wide Web Consortium. Copyright © 1994–2006 World Wide Web
Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics
and Mathematics, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. [Link]
Such portions are indicated at their points of use. Copyright and ownership of certain software
components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of
which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001)
KCL (Kyoto Common Lisp) (C) Taiichi Yuasa and Masami Hagiya, 1984. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM,
AEM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 2006. BCGControlBar library (C) BCGSoft. Portions of this software
copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2004-2005. PDFNet SDK is copyright
PDFTron Systems Inc., 2001-2006, and distributed by CoCreate Software GmbH under license.
All rights reserved. FE Analysis: Portions of this software copyright The MacNeal-Schwendler
Corporation 1996-2006. GOelan V4 is a registered trademark of CN Industries. Portions of
this software copyright LightWork Design Limited 1990 - 2005, 2006. Cabling copyright MIP
Ltd [Link] PartLibrary copyright TECHSOFT Datenverarbeitung GmbH
([Link]
LAPACK libraries used are freely available at [Link] (authors are Anderson, E.
and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J.
and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.). Certain software
components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/or pursuant to the
Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier) or similar style license. All rights
are reserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations
(and license agreement) at [Link] This software is provided by its Contributors
AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or
implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement,
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache
Software Foundation or its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute
goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on
any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise)
arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Software includes: Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Apache POI,
Jakarta Regular Expression, Commons-FileUpload, Solr, Tika, and XMLBeans IBM XML Parser
for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition DITA-OT - Apache License
Version IzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator ([Link]

y
Jakarta–ORO NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark
© Copyright Andy Clark. All rights reserved. Lucene ([Link] Quartz

nl
(scheduler) Copyright 2004-20xx OpenSymphony ([Link]
Jetty Copyright [Link] ([Link] Google Web Toolkit,

O
Google Web Toolkit (GWT) Incubator, and GWTx; Copyright Google U3D Library Copyright
1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation MyFaces ([Link] JDBCAppender
([Link] EHcache Copyright 2003-2007 Luck

se
Consulting Pty Ltd ([Link] cglib Copyright 2002-2004 ([Link]
[Link]/) LOG4PLSQL Copyright 2002 The LOG4PLSQL project team. All rights reserved
([Link] Log4cxx ([Link] SPRING -
U
See [Link]. HttpComponents project software ([Link] Commons
Codec ([Link] Apache Log4net ([Link]
Beans Scripting Framework (BSF) Copyright 2002-2006 The Apache Software Foundation -
al

includes software developed at The Apache Software Foundation ([Link] WebFX

Coolbar 2 ([Link] WebFX Cross Browser tree Widget 1.17 ([Link]
PCRE 7.2 ([Link] JDOM Copyright 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin.
rn

All rights reserved. This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the JDOM Project ([Link] The Ajax Control Toolkit (including compiled,
object code and source code versions) are licensed only pursuant to the Microsoft Public License
te

(Ms-PL) which can be found at [Link] Microsoft Ajax

Library provided pursuant to the Microsoft Software Supplemental License Terms for Microsoft
In

[Link] 2.0 AJAX Extensions. The Boost Library - Misc. C++ software from [Link]
Provided pursuant to: Boost Software License [Link] and
[Link] AspectJ ([Link] and Eclipse SWT
C

([Link] Copyright 20xx The Eclipse Foundation are distributed under the
Eclipse Public License (EPL) ([Link] and is provided
AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are
PT

offered by PTC. Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Command Line Argument Parser. Author
peterhal@[Link] is licensed pursuant to the Shared Source License for Command Line
Parser Library and is provided by the author "as is" with no warranties (none whatsoever). This
r

means no express, implied, or statutory warranty, including without limitation, warranties of

Fo

merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or any warranty of title or noninfringement. No

contributor to the Software will be liable for any of those types of damages known as indirect,
special, consequential, or incidental related to the Software to the maximum extent the law permits,
no matter what legal theory it’s based on. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the
"BSD License" (Berkeley Software Distribution) or a similar style license: iCal4j is Copyright ©
2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Dojo – Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights
reserved. Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j) Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All
Rights Reserved. XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright ©
1999 - 2007, Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Groovy Copyright 2003 James
Strachan and Bob McWhirter. All Rights Reserved. Firebug Copyright 2007, Parakey Inc. JMSN
([Link] Thumb Plug TGA Copyright 1991-2003 Echidna, Inc. All
rights reserved. ASM Copyright 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved. PDFBox
Copyright 2002-2007, [Link]. All rights reserved. BerkeleyDB (as used with OpenDS);
Copyright 1990-20xx Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved.
MiGLayout - The Java Layout Manager for Swing & SWT; Copyright 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG
InfoCom AB. (miglayout@[Link]). All rights reserved. PCRE - Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions – Basic Library Functions written by: Philip Hazel, Email local part: ph10, Email
domain: [Link], University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright
1997-2008 University of Cambridge. All rights reserved. SIMILE Copyright The SIMILE Project
2006. All rights reserved. Note that JQuery: Copyright 2008 John Resig ([Link]) is
 included in the Ajax section of this distribution and is covered under the MIT LICENSE (see below).
Launch4j ([Link] The head subproject (the code which is attached to the
wrapped jars) is licensed under the MIT license. Launch4j may be used for wrapping closed source,
commercial applications. JempBox Java XMP Library: Copyright 2006-2007, [Link].
All rights reserved. FontBox - Copyright 2003-2005, [Link]. All rights reserved. ANTLR
Copyright 2003-2008, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Provided pursuant to ANTLR 3 License.
([Link] NativeCall Java Toolkit ([Link]
Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
is permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii)
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution;
and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

y
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT

nl
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

O
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

se
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Java [Link] file, copyright 1987
1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software
U
Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright © 1989, 1991.
PTC hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger. #ZipLib
licensed free of charge and there is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable
al

law. Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other parties provide the
program AS IS without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as
rn

to the quality and performance of the program is with you. Should the program prove defective,
you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. The following software is
incorporated pursuant to the "MIT License" (or a similar license): SLF4J source code and binaries
te

Copyright 2004-20xx [Link]. All rights reserved. [Link] (built on "[Link]").

Copyright 2005 Thomas Fuchs ([Link] [Link] ICU4J software Copyright
In

1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Except as
contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of
C

the copyright holder. json library: Copyright 2002 [Link]. XPM Copyright 1989-95 GROUPE
BULL. DynamicToolbar FCKEditor plugin, v1.1 (080810); Copyright 2008, Gonzalo Perez de la
Ossa ([Link] JQuery Copyright 2008 John Resig ([Link]) NATIVECALL
PT

(C) 2002–2008 Johann Burkard. All rights reserved. ([Link]

The above software is used and redistributed under the following permissions: Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
r

limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
Fo

of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. The Java™ Telnet Applet
([Link], [Link], [Link], [Link]), Copyright © 1996,
97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This
license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at [Link] (for
a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e mail
to leo@[Link] or marcus@[Link]—you are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said
source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. The following software,
which may be called by certain PTC software products, is licensed under the GNU General Public
License ([Link] and if used by the customer is provided AS IS by the
authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU GPL for more details). Upon request
PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing
this distribution: The PJA (Pure Java AWT) Toolkit library ([Link] The
following unmodified libraries are likewise distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each
are provided pursuant to an exception that permits use of the library in proprietary applications
with no restrictions provided that the library is not modified). The following products are licensed
with the Classpath exception (Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is
making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General
Public License cover the whole combination. As a special exception, the copyright holders of this
library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable,
regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the
resulting executable under terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked
independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module
is a module which is not derived from or based on this library.): [Link].j3d package; Copyright
1996-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA. All rights
reserved. The source code is licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2. This project
contains the following third-party source code that is provided under separate licensing terms (These

y
terms are found in the THIRDPARTY-LICENSE-*.txt files in the top-level directory of this project.
See the [Link] for more information.). 3D Graphics API for the Java Platform 1.6.0

nl
Pre-Release licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. #ziplib
(SharpZipLib, formerly NZipLib), a Zip, GZip, Tar and BZip2 library, Copyright 2000-20xx IC#Code.

O
All rights reserved. #ZipLib was originally developed by Mike Krueger (mike@[Link]) with
the following attributions: (i) Zip/Gzip implementation (a Java version of the zlib) originally created
by the Free Software Foundation (FSF); (ii) zlib authors Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@[Link]), Mark

se
Adler (madler@[Link]) and its other contributors; (iii) Julian R Seward for the bzip2
implementation; (iv) the Java port done by Keiron Liddle, Aftex Software (keiron@[Link]);
(v) tar implementation by Timothy Gerard Endres (time@[Link]); and (vi) Christoph Wille for
U
beta testing, suggestions, and the setup of the Web site. The following is distributed under GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is at [Link] and
is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of
al

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for more
details). Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution: eXist, an Open Source Native XML Database. You
rn

may obtain a copy of the source code at [Link] The source code
is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit. You may obtain a copy of
the source code at [Link] which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. Java
te

Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@[Link]). You may obtain a copy of the
source code at [Link] The source code is
In

likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. JFreeChart is licensed under the GNU LGPL and can
be found at [Link] OmniORB Libraries (OmniOrb is distributed under the terms and
conditions of the GNU General Public License). The generic AIM library provided pursuant to the
C

JAIMBot project ([Link] JAIMBot is a modular architecture for providing

services through an AIM client. It contains a generic AIM library and a Bot that uses this library to
provide such services as Offline Messaging and Weather. PTC does not use the Bot. JExcelApi
PT

([Link] 7-Zip Copyright 1999-2006 Igor Pavlov ([Link]

libiconv Copyright 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. ([Link]
NHibernate © 200x, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. All rights reserved ([Link]
org/[Link]). MPXJ © 2000-2008, Packwood Software ([Link] Java
r

Server Faces V3.0.1 ([Link] DevlL Image Lib [Link]

Fo

([Link] Zip Master Component Lib 1.79 ([Link] Exadel

RichFaces 3.0.1 ([Link] Jfree / Jfree Chart 1.0.0 ([Link] Memory
DLLLoading code 0.0.1 ([Link] source probjects/[Link]).
May include Jena Software © Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes: Jakarta–ORO
software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above).
ICU4J software Copyright © 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All
rights reserved. Software is used under the MIT license described above. Except as contained in
this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright
holder. CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott
 Ananian–used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard
to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall
the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any
damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract,
negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this
software. ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit
organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick
is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:
[Link] Info-Zip and UnZip (© 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All
Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete
Info ZIP license see [Link] "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set
of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup
Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert
Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor
Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,

y
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White. ICU Libraries (International
Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International Business Machines Corporation and

nl
others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICU Project (notice is set forth
above) at [Link] The Independent JPEG

O
Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. iText Library
- Copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved – source

se
code and further information available at [Link] [Link] - JPEG image
compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output; Provided pursuant to:
[Link] Pop up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape
U
Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin
Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at [Link]
Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1
al

(at [Link] Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is
distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied
(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original
rn

Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of
the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are
Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors:
te

Kazu Yamamoto (kazu@[Link]), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@[Link]), Tsukasa Maruyama

(mal@[Link]), Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@[Link]). The following components are subject
In

to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 at [Link] (the MPL) and
said software is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations under PTC’s
C

software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see the MPL for the specific language
governing rights and limitations the source code and modifications thereto are available under the
MPL and are available upon request): Gecko and Mozilla components Spidermonkey Charset
PT

Detector Saxon-B ([Link] Office Partner

Components 1.64 ([Link] Rhino JavaScript engine,
distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL). [Link] - Libtiff File IO Library
version 3.4: (see also [Link] [Link] Used by the image EFI
r

library; Provided pursuant to: [Link] The DITA standards, including

Fo

DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specification used in online help; copyright
2005-2009 OASIS Open. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. ([Link] Copyright © 1998
2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@[Link]) WHICH IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ''AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This
product also includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@[Link]). [Link] -
Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. [Link] Provided pursuant
to: PCRE License. [Link] - PNG image library version 1.2.0. [Link] Provided
pursuant to: [Link] libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of
Contributing Authors) at [Link] METIS is © 1997
Regents of the University of Minnesota.
Curl software, Copyright ©1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Software is used
under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for
any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings. Java Advanced Imaging (JAI)
is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) at [Link] The
terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTC software with respect to JAI

y
components. Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open

nl
source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Regular Expressions
support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer, Copyright © 1986 by

O
University of Toronto. SGML parser: Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 James Clark,
1999 Matthias Clasen. XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt
by Daniel Veillard, Copyright © 2001. libWWW (W3C's implementation of HTTP) can be found at:

se
[Link] Copyright © 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio
University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's Software Intellectual
U
Property License at: [Link]
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
al

PURPOSE. See W3C License [Link] for more details. Copyright

© 1995 CERN. "This product includes computer software created and made available by CERN.
rn

This acknowledgment shall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer
software included herein or parts thereof." Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit,
Version 5.0. Copyright © 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved. The cad2eda program
te

utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UI API, which is licensed
under the wxWindows Library License at [Link] ZLib - Compression library;
Copyright 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Provided pursuant to ZLib License at
In

[Link] ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by

the copyright holder "as is" with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use
or copy this software for any purpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are
C

retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted,
provided the above notices are retained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the
PT

above copyright notice. PTC reserves the right to modify this code and may do so without further
notice. OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License
Version 6.2 (the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License.
A copy of the License may be obtained at [Link] The Initial Developer
of the Original Code is Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan
r

92136, Issy Les Moulineaux, France. The Original Code is copyright © Open CASCADE S.A.S.,
Fo

2001. All rights reserved. "The Original Code” and all software distributed under the License
are distributed by OpenCASCADE on an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the
Initial Developer hereby disclaims all such warranties, including without limitation, any warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement (please see the License
for the specific terms and conditions governing rights and limitations under the License). PTC
product warranties are provided solely by PTC. Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are
as follows: CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright © 2000 NEWare Software.
STLPort - C++ templates; ©1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort License
[Link] Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright © 1990-2007.
Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License [Link]
Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to Inno
Setup License [Link] 7-Zip - Compression package; Copyright
1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-Zip License [Link] The
implementation of the loop macro in CoCreate Modeling is based on code originating from MIT
and Symbolics, Inc. Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1986 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology and Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 by Symbolics, Inc. All
Rights Reserved. Used under license pursuant to which permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is granted, provided
that the copyright holder’s copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The names "M.I.T." and
 "Massachusetts Institute of Technology" and "Symbolics" may not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Notice must
be given in supporting documentation that copying distribution is by permission of the copyright
holders. The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. ORACLE, ODBC, and
DB2/CLI Template Library, Version 4.0.126, Copyright Sergei Kuchin, 1996, 20xx. This library
is free software. Permission to use, copy, modify and redistribute it for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the preceding copyright statement appears in all copies. (see
[Link] The following items are used and licensed pursuant to the Common
Development and Distribution License (CDDL). See [Link] Metro
Web Services Stack, Copyright Sun Microsystems. The copyright holders of this library give
permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the
license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable
under differing terms, provided that, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions
of the license of that module are met. Source Code for Metro will be provided upon request and is
licensed under the terms of the CDDL. Open MQ – In addition, this project uses Mozilla Network

y
Security Services and Network Security Portable Runtime (NSS / NSPR) which are licensed under
the Mozilla Public License. OpenDS uses BerkeleyDB which is described above.

nl
The following components are licensed pursuant to the Common Public License (CPL). All warranties
and awarded damage relief from use of the technology as provided by PTC are provided solely by

O
PTC and same is disclaimed by other contributors. Source code for the program is available upon
request under the terms of the CPL: WIX Installer Toolkit, copyright Microsoft Corp. NSIS (Nullsoft
Scriptable Install System), Copyright 1995-20xx, all Contributors. Includes zlib/libpng, bzip2, and

se
lzma compression modules with licensing information at [Link] Certain
software is Copyright 2000 - 2008 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle ([Link]
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
U
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
al

to the following conditions. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
rn

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
te

BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
In

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
C

Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)

(JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
PT

procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 05222009
r

Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

Fo

PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T3403-380-01 08/03/2011 Initial Printing of:
Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric
Order Number DT-T3403-380-01
Printed in the U.S.A